Home

DocuPrint M255 df/M255 z User Guide Help

1. Paper Name Size Weight Paper Type Notes IBG Paper PFX Red amp White A4 80 gsm Plain Cont d Packaging FXA Professional A4 Plain FXCL Xcite A4 Plain FXCL Xcellence 80 A4 Plain FXCL Xceed 80 A4 Plain Double A Laser Paper A4 Plain KX H Paper A4 Plain Green Member A4 Plain BIO TOP 3 Extra A4 Plain AG Red Label Folio Plain THFX Paper Q A4 Plain Advance Argo FXM Diplomat A4 Plain FXM Excel A4 Plain FXM Xerox One A4 Plain FXA Colotech Idol A4 Plain 80 gsm FXA Colotech Idol A4 100 gsm Plain 100 gsm Colotech Plus 120 A4 120 gsm Lightweight gsm Cardstock FXM Label 16up A4 140 gsm Labels FXM Label 8up A4 Labels Printing Basics Loading Print Media Loading print media properly helps prevent jams and ensures trouble free printing Before loading print media identify the recommended print side of the print media This information is usually on the print media package NOTE After loading paper in the paper tray or the Priority Sheet Inserter PSI specify the same paper type on the operator panel E Capacity The paper tray can accommodate e 250 sheets of standard paper 27 5 mm 1 08 inches of thick paper 27 5 mm 1 08 inches of postcards e 10 envelopes e 20 labels The Priority Sheet Inserter PSI can accommodate 10 sheets for plain paper or one sheet for other paper E Print Media Dimensions The paper tray can acco
2. 016 767 Press the ox button to clear the message Check if the recipient address is correct and try scanning again 016 791 Insert the USB memory device and press the x button to clear the message 016 795 Press the x button to clear the message Check if the format of a file stored in USB 016 797 memory device is supported or the file is not broken 016 920 Press the x button to clear the message Check the wireless settings for the access point and the printer 016 930 Remove the device from the front USB port and press the x button to clear the mes 016 931 oT 016 981 Press the ox button to cancel the current job Try copying fewer documents 016 985 Attached file size is larger than you defined Press the x button to clear the message Try the following Enlarge Max E Mail Size eLower the resolution setting eChange the file format of the scanned image 017 970 Memory is likely to be full Press the x button to clear the message Try the following Delete the data stored in the memory eLower the resolution setting eReduce the number of pages 017 980 Press the ox button to clear the message Retry when the printer does not process any 017 981 job 017 988 Press the button to clear the message Check if the interface cable is securely con nected or your computer does not have any problem 018 338 Turn off the printer and then on If this does not solve the problem contact
3. 031 585 Press the button to clear the message Check if the FTP server encounters any 031 587 delete write protection or disk problem 031 588 Press the x button to clear the message Check if the FTP server encounters any write protection or disk problem 031 589 Press the button to clear the message Check if the storage location has free space 031 594 Press the x button to clear the message Contact your server administrator to check if the scanned file has wrong setting while being stored to FTP server If this does not solve the problem contact our local representative office or authorized dealer See also e Online Services on page 417 031 598 Press the x button to clear the message Check if the FTP server encounters any write protection or disk problem 033 503 Press the x button to clear the message Retry and check the report Delete the 033 513 unnecessary data stored in the memory 033 517 Press the button to clear the message Check if the password of the fax lock is cor rect 033 518 Press the button to clear the message Check if your region is set correctly 033 519 Fax service is locked To continue press the button and disable the fax lock See also Limiting Access to Copy Fax Scan and USB Direct Print Operations on page 333 033 787 Press the x button to clear the message The job is cancelled 033 788 Press the x button to clear the message Remove the received f
4. 4 Printer Connection and Software Installation Describes the basic information about how to connect the printer to your computer and how to install the print driver 5 Printing Basics Describes the supported paper how to load paper and how to print data using various print features 6 Copying Describes how to copy documents and the adjustment features 7 Scanning Describes how to set and use the Scan features 8 Faxing Describes how to set and use the Fax features 9 Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad Describes the setting items available on the operator panel their setup procedures and how to use the numeric keypad 10 Troubleshooting Describes the troubleshooting tips for printer problems such as paper jams 11 Maintenance Describes how to clean the printer how to replace the toner cartridge and how to see the printer status 12 Contacting Fuji Xerox Describes support information Using This Guide 13 E Conventions 1 In this guide personal computers and workstations are collectively called computers 2 The following terms are used throughout this guide IMPORTANT Important information that must be read and followed NOTE Additional information that merits emphasis See also e References within this guide 3 14 Orientation of documents or paper is described in this guide as follows D Long Edge Feed LEF Loading the
5. A Used for items that if not followed strictly can cause injuries to user or CAUTI O N damages to machine A A symbol for items to pay attention to when handling machine Follow instructions carefully to use machine safely AAAAAAA Caution Flammable Explodable Electric Heated Moving Pinched shock surface object fingers A symbol for prohibited items Follow instructions carefully to avoid any dangerous acts SQ OOOO Prohibited No fire Donottouch Donotusein Donot tear Keep away Never touch bathroom down from wet with wet hand A symbol for items that must be performed Follow instructions carefully to carry out these essential tasks 0O O Instructions Unplug Ground Earth Safety Notes 15 E Electrical Safety A WARNING This product shall be operated by the power source as indicated on the product s data plate Consult your local power company to check if your power source meets the requirements WARNING e Connect this product to a protective earth circuit This product is supplied with a plug that has a protective earth pin The plug fits only into an earthed electrical outlet This is a safety feature If the plug doesn t fit to the outlet contact an electrician to replace the outlet to avoid risk of electric shock Never use an earthed adapter plug to connect the product to the electrical outlet that has no earth connection terminal Improper connection of a grounding conductor may
6. Ensure that the document is not curled Fan the document well before loading it in the ADF Vertical stripes appear on the output when scanned using the ADF Clean the ADF glass See also e Cleaning the Scanner on page 395 A smear appears at the same location on the output when scanned using the document glass Clean the document glass See also e Cleaning the Scanner on page 395 Images are skewed Ensure that the document is loaded straight in the ADF or on the document glass Diagonal lines appear jagged when scanned using the ADF If the document uses thick media try scanning it from the document glass Troubleshooting 375 376 Problem Action The printer does not properly transfer scan data to a specified destination via the Scan to E Mail or Scan to Network feature Check if the following settings have been set correctly on the CentreWare Internet Services Scan to E Mail Check the following setting under Address Book Personal Address e Address Scan to Network Check the following settings under Address Book gt Computer Server Address Book e Name Displayed on Printer Network Type Host Address IP Address or DNS Name e Port Number e Login Name if required by host e Login Password e Name of Shared Directory e Subdirectory Path optional Cannot scan using WIA ona Windows Server 2003 computer Enable WIA on the computer
7. eee 71 Installing Print Drivers on Computers Running Windows ccceeeeee 73 Identifying Print Driver Pre install Status for Network Connection Setup essssssssssssssrrrrerrrrrrreeeeee 74 Inserting the Software Pack CD ROM eeessessseseererrrrerrreeneenn 75 USB Connection SGlUD atic ewisceecsacrdisin ei netins euaaioe 75 Network Connection Setup ccccccccccccccseeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeenes 76 Configuring Wireless Network Settings DocuPrint M255 z Only 2Aecs ci nattac Ae aie S Betae 77 Setting Up the Printer for Shared Printing eeeeeeeeee 104 Using the XML Paper Specification Print Driver 0 113 Installing Print Drivers on Computers Running Mac OS X ee 114 Configuring Wireless Settings on the Operator Panel DGOCUPTINE M253 Z OMY esene a eeen a aeneae 115 Installing Print Drivers on Computers Running Linux CUPS 120 Installing Print Drivers essseesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeresessssrrrrrrerrrrrrrrrrrneereee 121 Specifying the Queue cccccceeeeeeeseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaneeeeeseeeeeess 122 Specifying the Default Queue 2 225 ccececdeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenessceneces 125 Specifying Printing OptionS seeeeeeeeeeeeeeseessreererrrrrrrrrrrreeeeee 126 Setting the Password for Authority as the Printer Administrator 128 Uninstalling Print Drivers 2 iacc dad x biedeenmalecet A heed ms averted 129 Contents 3 Printing
8. H Configure Printer Trouble Shooting Guide panem D Return amp Previous 2 Start Installation S d Confirm there are no errors displayed on the LCD panel and then click Start Installation If you see any errors click Trouble Shooting Guide and follow the instruction If you agree to the terms of the License Agreement click accept the terms of the license agreement to continue the installation process and then click Next Check if the printer to be installed is listed in the Select Printer screen and then click Next NOTE Ifthe printer to be installed is not listed in the Select Printer screen try either of the following steps Click Refresh to update the information Click Add Printer and then enter the details of the printer manually Select the required items on the Enter Printer Settings screen and then click Next Select the software to be installed and then click Install Click Finish to exit this tool The wireless configuration is complete Printer Connection and Software Installation 83 Using Advanced Setup to Configure Wireless Network Settings To use the Advanced setup display the Configure Wireless Settings screen The following procedure uses Windows 7 as an example e Displaying the Configure Wireless Settings Screen 1 Insert the Software Pack CD ROM into your computer s CD DVD drive When the AutoPlay window appears click Run setup exe to start the Easy Install
9. mm system 200 A5 gt A4 141 A5 gt B5 122 100 B5 gt A5 81 A4 gt A5 70 50 Factory default menu setting Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad 317 inch system 200 Stmt gt Lgl 154 Stmt gt Ltr 129 100 Lgl gt Ltr 78 dgr gt Ltr 64 50 Factory default menu setting NOTE You can also use the numeric keypad to input the desired zoom ratio from 25 to 400 or press the gt button to enlarge the zoom ratio or press the q button to reduce the zoom ratio in 1 intervals This item is available only when N Up is set to Of f or Manual e Document Size Purpose To specify the default document size Values A4 210x297mm A5 148x210mm B5 182x257mm Letter 8 5x11 Folio 8 5x13 Legal 8 5x14 Executive Factory default menu setting e Document Type Purpose To specify the default document type Values Text Suitable for documents with text Mixed Suitable for documents with both text and photos gray tones Photo Suitable for documents with photos Factory default menu setting 318 Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad e Lighten Darken Purpose To specify the default copy density level Values Lighten2 Makes the copy lighter than the source document Works well with Lighten1 dark print
10. C Users adminAppData Local Fuj Browse Look Up Phone Book e ad Delayed Send Import and Add File Delayed Send Authorization Password l Start Sending Stop Sending Help L d 7 Specify the recipient in one of the following ways Enter a name and phone number directly Select a recipient from the Phone Book PC Fax Address Book saved on your computer or Address Book Device Address Book e Select a recipient from a database other than the Phone Book PC Fax Address Book or Address Book Device Address Book For details on how to specify the recipient click Help to see the Help of the fax driver NOTE When the Fax service is locked with a password enter the password in the Password box under Authorization 8 Click Start Sending Faxing 259 E Sending a Fax from Mac OS X NOTE The following procedure uses Mac OS X 10 6 TextEdit as an example The names of the windows and the buttons may be different from those given in the following procedure depending on the OS and application you are using The fax driver is installed along with the printer driver 1 Open the file you want to send by fax 2 Open the print dialog box from the application and then select your fax driver Printer FUJI XEROX DocuPrint M255 z Fax F a Presets Standard E Copies E M Collated Pages All O From 1 to 1 Paper Size A4 HJ 21
11. Computer z When using the FTP protocol you need to select a server and specify a destination to store scanned document using the CentreWare Internet Services or Address Book Editor The following is required to use the Scan to Server Computer feature e Using the SMB Your computer must run on one of the following operating systems and have the folder sharing enabled For Mac OS X a shared user account is required on the Mac OS X Windows Server 2003 Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows XP Windows Vista Windows 7 Mac OS X 10 4 10 5 10 6 10 7 Using the FTP One of the following FTP servers and an account to the FTP server login name and password are required Windows Server 2003 Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows Vista or Windows 7 FTP service of Microsoft Internet Information Services 6 0 Windows XP FTP service of Microsoft Internet Information Server 3 0 4 0 or Internet Information Services 5 0 5 1 Mac OS X FTP service of Mac OS X 10 4 11 10 5 8 10 6 10 7 For information on how to configure the FTP service contact your system administrator 214 Scanning Follow the procedure below to use the Scan to Network feature Confirming the Login name and the Password on page 216 Specifying a Destination to Store Scanned Documents on page 218 Configuring the Printer on page 228 Sending the Scanned File to the Network on page 233 Scanning 215 E Co
12. Ghosting on page 366 Fog on page 367 Bead Carry Out BCO on page 367 Auger Mark on page 368 Wrinkled Stained Paper on page 369 The Top Margin Is Incorrect on page 370 Protrudent Bumpy Paper on page 370 NOTE e In this section some procedures use the Printer Setting Utility or the SimpleMonitor Some procedures that use the Printer Setting Utility can also be performed using the operator panel See also e Understanding the Operator Panel Menus on page 282 e Printer Setting Utility Windows Only on page 52 SimpleMonitor Windows Only on page 53 Troubleshooting 361 The Output Is Too Light NOTE Problem Action The output is too light The toner cartridge may be low or need to be replaced Confirm the amount of toner in the toner cartridge 1 Check the toner level on the Consumables tab of the Printer Status window of the SimpleMonitor 2 Replace the toner cartridge as needed Verify that the print media is dry and the correct print media is used If not use the print media recommended for the printer See also e Usable Print Media on page 137 Try changing the Paper Type setting on the print driver 1 On the Paper Output tab for Printing Preferences of the print driver change the Paper Type setting Disable Toner Saving Mode on the print driver 1 On the Graphics tab in Printing Preferences of the print driver ensure that the Toner
13. L 10 Configure the security setting and then click Next The IP Address Settings screen appears gt TE Printer Setup Utility e Configure Printer IP Address Settings IP Mode iPv4 z What s this PAn IPv4 Settings P dai Tre Use Manual Address m What s this IP Address CE ee In case of IPv4 choose DHCP f a server router or other device Subnet Mask mM Mm Mm a automatically assigns IP addresses to devices on the network Gateway Address ti ww i i In case of IPV6 IP addresses are x ed manually click the check IPv6 Settings Pata ESR box and enter an existing IP address Use Manual Address What s this 9 P Addre L 11 Select IP Mode depending on your network scheme When IPv4 is selected configure the following a Select Type b If you have selected Use Manual Address from Type enter the following items IP Address of your printer e Subnet Mask e Gateway Address 80 Printer Connection and Software Installation When Dual Stack is selected configure the following a Configure IPv4 Settings b If you have selected the Use Manual Address check box under IPv6 Settings enter the following items IP Address of your printer e Gateway Address 12 Click Next The FAX Settings screen appears TE Printer Setup Utility Configure Printer FAX Settings I dont use FAX functionality FAX Settings Been wat Line Type PSTN What s this Dia
14. The following procedure uses Windows 7 as an example 1 Insert the Software Pack CD ROM into your computer s CD DVD drive When the AutoPlay window appears click Run setup exe to start the Easy Install Navi Macromedia Flash Player 8 Sraa Easy Install Navi gt 1 Language Welcome English PMH O PRE O BO Easy Setup Advanced Setup 1 2 3 Advanced Tools c _1 Start Setup _ More Information Press this button when you set the printer first User Guide A series of movies help you to set the printer easily The setting procedure includes the following Trouble Shooting Guide Setting the Printer Device Installing Drivers and Software Product Features L 2 Click Start Setup 3 Click Configure Printer The connection type selection screen appears 4 Select Wireless Connection and then click Next The setting method selection screen appears 78 Printer Connection and Software Installation 5 Ensure that Wizard is selected and then click Next vacomediffas Payers O OS O Easy Install Navi E bo fA D Configure Wireless Settings Select a method to configure wireless settings and then click Next w Wizard Wizard You can configure wireless settings using a USB cable _ Advanced After completing wireless configuration unplug the USB cable 6 Follow the on screen instructions to connect the USB cable and perform other set
15. Values off Does not set the runtime of a PS job On Imin Sets the runtime of a PS job lImin 900min Factory default menu setting 290 Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad PDF Settings Use the PDF Settings menu to change printer settings that only affect the PDF jobs e Quantity Purpose To specify the number of copies to print Values 1 Select a value in increments of 1 1 999 Factory default menu setting e 2 Sided Purpose To specify whether to print on either side of paper Values 2 Sided Print oOff Does not print on either side of paper On Prints on either side of paper Binding Edge Flip Long Prints on either side of paper to be bound on the long edge Edge Flip Short Prints on either side of paper to be bound on the short edge Edge Factory default menu setting e Print Mode Purpose To specify the print mode Values Normal For documents with normal sized characters High Quality For documents with small characters or thin lines or documents printed using a dot matrix printer Factory default menu setting e PDF Password Purpose To specify a password for printing secure PDF files Values KIO Ok kk kk kk KK KK Enter a password of up to 32 alphanumeric characters for printing KK KK Rk secure PDF files Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad 291 e Paper Size Purpose To specify the output paper size
16. 117 366 Turn off the printer and then on If this does not solve the problem contact our local 124 333 representative office or authorized dealer 134 211 See also e Online Services on page 417 191 310 Although the service life of your printer has been over and the printer stopped running you can still use the printer by pressing the lt gt Back button and the w button at the same time However continuous use of the printer will degrade the print quality See also e Machine life on page 312 191 311 The life of your printer has been over and you can no longer use the printer 193 700 A non genuine toner is installed Troubleshooting NOTE As for the following message which does not include an error code refer to the table below for the solution Error Message What You Can Do Wrong Paper Size Reload Paper then Press OK Load the specified paper and press the ox button to clear the message See also e Loading Print Media in the Paper Tray on page 144 e Loading Print Media in the Priority Sheet Inserter PSI on page 152 Job Cancelled Open ADF Cover and Remove All Paper Open the ADF cover Remove the jammed paper and then close the ADF cover See also e Clearing Paper Jams From the Automatic Document Feeder ADF on page 343 Troubleshooting 387 Contacting Service When you call for printer service be prepared to describe the problem you are experiencing or the error
17. E Sending a Fax from Windows NOTE The following procedure uses Windows 7 WordPad as an example The names of the windows and the buttons may be different from those given in the following procedure depending on the OS and application you are using The fax driver is installed along with the printer driver 1 Open the file you want to send by fax 2 Open the print dialog box from the application and then select your fax driver 3 Click Preferences r tb Print General Select Printer FX DocuPrint M255 z PS r i Status Ready Print to file Location Comment Find Printer Page Range Al Number of copies 1 Selectio ume Pages Collate aj zi 3 3 Cancel too _ L 4 Specify the fax settings For more information click Help of the driver NOTE The settings done here are only applied to a single fax job n Printing Preferences Basic Quality Image Orientation Standard 203x 98 DPI z Portrait Paper Size Landscape Letter 8 5 x 11 in z Letter 8 5x 11in Defaults a Gee Ge L 5 Click OK to close the Printing Preferences dialog box 258 Faxing 6 Click Print The Set Check Fax Transmission dialog box appears A S Set Check Fax Transmission Document Lo mo Recipient Setting Name Recipient List A Phone Number Name Phone Number My Phone Book File
18. For details on the SimpleMonitor see Help The following procedure uses Windows 7 as an example 1 Click Start All Programs Fuji Xerox Fuji Xerox Printer Software for Asia Pacific gt your printer SimpleMonitor Btype for Asia Pacific The Printer Selection window appears 2 Click the name of the desired printer from the list The Printer Status window appears 3 Click Help See also SimpleMonitor Windows Only on page 53 Checking Status on the CentreWare Internet Services Windows amp Mac OS X You can check the status of the print job sent to the printer on the Jobs tab of the CentreWare Internet Services See also Printer Management Software on page 49 174 Printing Basics E Printing a Report Page You can print various types of reports and lists For details on each report and list see Report List on page 283 Taking the System Settings page as an example this section describes two methods of printing a report page Printing the System Settings Page To verify detailed printer settings print the System Settings page e Using the Operator Panel NOTE The reports and lists are all printed in English 1 Press the Ti System button 2 Select Report List and then press the button 3 Select System Settings and then press the button The System Settings page is printed e Using the Printer Setting Utility Windows Only The following procedure uses Windows 7
19. Printer Connection and Software Installation This chapter includes e e Overview of Network Setup and Configuration on page 62 Connecting Your Printer on page 63 Setting the IP Address on page 67 Installing Print Drivers on Computers Running Windows on page 73 Installing Print Drivers on Computers Running Mac OS X on page 114 Installing Print Drivers on Computers Running Linux CUPS on page 120 Printer Connection and Software Installation 61 Overview of Network Setup and Configuration To set up and configure the network 1 2 3 4 Connect the printer to the network using the recommended hardware and cables Turn on the printer and the computer Print the System Settings page and keep it for referencing network settings Install the driver software on the computer from the Software Pack CD ROM For information on driver installation see the section in this chapter for the specific operating system you are using Configure the printer s TCP IP address which is required to identify the printer on the network Microsoft Windows operating systems Run the installer on the Software Pack CD ROM to automatically set the printer s Internet Protocol IP address if you connect the printer to an established TCP IP network You can also manually set the printer s IP address on the operator panel lt Mac OS X and Linux systems Manually set the printer s TCP IP address on the operator panel
20. 60 105 gsm Lightweight Cardstock 106 163 gsm Labels Envelope Recycled Postcard JPN Loading Capacity 250 sheets of standard paper You can load Monarch DL Yougata 2 and Yougata 3 envelopes in the LEF orientation into the paper tray with the flap unfolded Printing Basics 137 Priority Sheet Inserter PSI Paper Size A4 SEF 210 x 297 mm B5 SEF 182 x 257 mm A5 SEF 148 x 210 mm Letter SEF 8 5 x 11 inches Executive SEF 7 25 x 10 5 inches Legal 13 Folio SEF 8 5 x 13 inches Legal 14 SEF 8 5 x 14 inches Statement SEF 139 7 x 215 9 mm Com 10 Envelope SEF 4 125 x 9 5 inches DL Envelope SEF 110 x 220 mm C5 Envelope SEF 162 x 229 mm Yougata 4 Envelope 105 x 235 mm Younaga 3 Envelope 120 x 235 mm Nagagata 3 Envelope 120 x 235 mm Kakugata 3 Envelope 216 x 277 mm Custom size Width 76 2 215 9 mm 3 0 8 5 inches Length 210 355 6 mm 8 2 14 inches Paper Type Plain 60 105 gsm Lightweight Cardstock 106 163 gsm Labels Envelope Recycled Postcard JPN Loading Capacity 10 sheets for plain paper or one sheet for other paper NOTE SEF and LEF indicate the paper feed orientation SEF stands for short edge feed LEF stands for long edge feed Use only laser print media Do not use ink jet paper on your printer See also e Loading Print Media in the Paper Tray on page 144 e Loading Print Media in the Priority Sheet Inserter PS
21. AM PM 1 00 specified time Which factory default menu setting displays depends 12 59 on the value set for Time Format under the System Settings menu See Changing the Clock Mode on page 248 for more information Factory default menu setting NOTE A maximum of 19 delayed fax jobs can be stored in this printer Print from USB Defaults Use the Print from USB Defaults menus to configure the Print from USB Memory feature e 2 Sided Purpose To specify whether to print on either side of paper Values 1 gt 1 Sided Prints on a single side of paper Flip on Long Edge Prints on either side of paper to be bound on the long edge Flip on Short Edge Prints on either side of paper to be bound on the short edge Factory default menu setting e Layout Purpose To specify the output layout Values 1UP 2UP 4UP Factory default menu setting Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad 327 e AutoFit Purpose To automatically enlarge reduce the size of the image to fit it into the paper selected for printing Values Auto Reduces enlarges the size of the image to fit it into the paper before printing Off Prints the image as it is Factory default menu setting NOTE e This item is available only when a TIFF or JPG file is selected for printing e PDF Password Purpose To specify a password for printing secure PDF files Values KOR KR RK KK kk KK
22. Click the Add button to display Wireless network properties Printer Connection and Software Installation 99 h On the Association tab enter the following information and click OK Network name SSID xxxxxxxx Xxxxxxxx indicates a wireless device s SSID which you use Network Authentication Open Data encryption Disabled Wireless network properties Association Authentication Connection Network name SSID C Connect even if this network is not broadcasting Wireless network key This network requires a key for the following Network Authentication Open Data encryption Disabled i Click the Move up button to move the newly added SSID to the top of the list j Click OK to close the Wireless Network Connection Properties dialog box For Windows Vista Display Control Panel Select Network and Internet Select Network and Sharing Center Select Connect to a network oo 0 T Select xxxxxxxx XXXXXXXX indicates a wireless device s SSID which you use from the network items listed in the available network list and click Connect f Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success For Windows Server 2008 Display Control Panel Select Network and Internet Select Network and Sharing Center Select Connect to a network oa a aon Select xxxxxxxx XXXXXXXX indicates a wireless device s SSID which you use from the network items lis
23. Customizing Copy Options on page 187 Press the Q Start button to begin copying 194 Copying E Document Type You can select the copy image quality 1 Load a document s face up on the Automatic Document Feeder ADF with the top edge going in first or place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover See also e Making Copies From the Automatic Document Feeder ADF on page 186 e Making Copies From the Document Glass on page 184 Press the 3 Copy button Select Document Type and then press the ox button Select the desired setting and then press the ox button Text Suitable for documents with text Mixed Suitable for documents with both text and photos gray tones Photo Suitable for documents with photos Factory default menu setting If necessary customize other copy options including the number of copies and copy size See also e Customizing Copy Options on page 187 Press the Q Start button to begin copying Copying 195 E Lighten Darken You can adjust the copy density level to make the copy lighter or darker than the source document 1 196 Load a document s face up on the Automatic Document Feeder ADF with the top edge going in first or place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover See also e Making Copies From the Automatic Document Feeder ADF on page 186 e Making Copies Fr
24. Duplex Printing e ne ae e e ibaa ehh e AIEEE 161 Direct Printing Using a USB Storage Device cesses 166 Selecting Printing Options ec cecscceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeneeaeeea 167 Printing Custom Size Paper cc ccc ccccccceteeeeeesneescueceeeecessen dncneeteereee 172 Checking Status of a Print JOD cccck 5 c05i ced doeed deed ebeve ed cece inte 174 Printing a Report Page sis ctscorencectieinss aagecteetne noe smaneeies 175 Printer Settings 45 85 6ac Seat esd ee ate Eei 176 Printing with the Web Services on Devices c ceeeeeeeeeeeeeettttteeeeeees 178 Adding Roles of Print Services eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeens 178 PAGIFVEG FSU Dsianiseseescas cents ae e stuns E a EE ae D a eE eevee ndaa 179 COPYING ae eera irea a R a a eT 181 Loading Paper for Copying c 1sencesisieticonnininnirintan nkan o reer ree rennt ennienni 182 Preparing a Documentiinncacnwieinios ees one nee 183 Making Copies From the Document Glass ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteetteeeeeeees 184 Making Copies From the Automatic Document Feeder ADF 186 Customizing Copy Opuons lt scc cysesdeces 5 006 ns cotati det een teats 187 Number of CopieS ceo orale ies tlre cate heed coetasey ier iocwtndentsartevels 188 Pap r S126 oy atinciainccceaigiei ie aha E eels A O 189 Collated Sec scare ce Feist cen nk eden e cent Ge Gernsecesesi e 191 Reduce Enlarge sxckiuneh ie Re 192 Do ment
25. Nn oO oO fF OO N Select Additional Drivers and select the operating systems of all network clients using your printer e Click OK Click Apply and then click OK 104 Printer Connection and Software Installation e For Windows Server 2008 and Windows Server 2008 64 bit Edition 1 Click Start Control Panel Hardware and Sound gt Printers 2 Right click the printer icon and select Sharing 3 Select the Share this printer check box and then enter a name in the Share name text box 4 Click Additional Drivers and select the operating systems of all network clients using your printer 5 Click OK 6 Click Apply and then click OK e For Windows 7 Windows 7 64 bit Edition and Windows Server 2008 R2 1 Click Start Devices and Printers Right click the printer icon and select Printer properties On the Sharing tab select the Share this printer check box and then enter a name in the Share name text box 4 Click Additional Drivers and select the operating systems of all network clients using your printer 5 Click OK 6 Click Apply and then click OK To check that the printer is shared e Ensure that the printer object in the Printers Printers and Faxes or Devices and Printers folder is shared The share icon is shown under the printer icon Browse Network or My Network Places Find the host name of the server and look for the shared name you assigned to the printer Printer Connection and So
26. Normal Works well with standard typewritten or printed documents Darkenl Makes the copy darker than the source document Works well with Darken2 light print or faint pencil markings Factory default menu setting e Sharpness Purpose To specify the default sharpness level Values Sharpest Makes the copy sharper than the source document Sharper Normal Does not make the copy sharper or softer than the original Softer Makes the copy softer than the source document Softest Factory default menu setting e Auto Exposure Purpose To suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the copy Values Off Does not suppress the background On Suppresses the background of the original to enhance text on the copy Factory default menu setting e Gray Balance Purpose To specify the default gray balance level within the range of 2 to 2 The factory default menu setting is 0 Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad 319 e 2 Sided Purpose To specify whether to print on either sides of paper Values 1 gt 1 Sided Makes regular single sided copies Flip on Long Edge Makes duplex 2 sided copies ready to be bound on the long edge Flip on Short Edge Makes duplex 2 sided copies ready to be bound on the short edge Factory default menu setting e N Up Purpose To print two original pages to fit onto one sheet of paper Va
27. available specify the location where the driver is available 7 Select Yes if you want your printer to be set as the default printer and then click Next 8 Click Finish Printer Connection and Software Installation 109 For Windows Vista and Windows Vista 64 bit Edition 1 Click Start gt Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Printers 2 Click Add a printer to launch the Add Printer wizard 3 Select Add a network wireless or Bluetooth printer If the printer is listed select the printer and click Next or select The printer that want isn t listed and enter the path to the printer in the Select a shared printer by name text box and click Next E Add Printer Find a printer by name or TCP IP address Browse for a printer Select a shared printer by name server printer La e yumpa p muane ur http computername printe s printername printer Add a printer using a TCP IP acf iress or hostname an For example lt server host name gt lt shared printer name gt The server host name is the name of the server computer that identifies it on the network The shared printer name is the name assigned during the server installation process If this is a new printer you may be prompted to install a print driver If no system driver is available specify the location where the driver is available 4 Confirm the printer name and then select whether to use your printer as the
28. e Manual Duplex Printing PCL Print Driver Only on page 162 Automatic Duplex Printing The following procedure uses the PCL 6 driver as an example 1 Click start Printers and Faxes for Windows XP Click Start gt Printers and Faxes for Windows Server 2003 Click Start Devices and Printers for Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 Click Start gt Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Printers for Windows Vista Click Start Control Panel Printers for Windows Server 2008 A list of available printers appears 2 Right click the icon for your printer and select Printing preferences The Paper Output tab appears 3 From Duplex select Flip on Long Edge or Flip on Short Edge 4 Click OK Printing Basics 161 Manual Duplex Printing PCL Print Driver Only When you have a problem with automatic duplex printing you may want to try manual duplex printing Starting manual duplex printing displays a window containing the instructions that you can follow Note that the window cannot be reopened once it is closed Do not close the window until duplex printing is complete NOTE When printing on curled paper straighten the paper before inserting the paper e Operations on Your Computer The following procedure uses Windows 7 WordPad as an example NOTE The way to display the Printer Properties Printing Preferences dialog box depends on the application software Refer to the manual of your
29. it may cause short circuit and eventually a fire accident See also Loading Print Media in the Paper Tray on page 144 Loading Print Media in the Priority Sheet Inserter PSI on page 152 Loading Envelopes in the Paper Tray on page 148 e Loading Envelopes in the Priority Sheet Inserter PSI on page 155 e Printing on Custom Size Paper on page 173 132 Printing Basics E Automatic Document Feeder ADF Guidelines The ADF can accommodate the paper of the following sizes e Width 148 215 9 mm 5 83 8 50 inches e Length 210 355 6 mm 8 27 14 00 inches The supported paper weight ranges from 60 to 105 gsm Follow the guidelines below when loading source documents into the ADF e Load documents face up so that the top of the document enters the printer first e Place only loose sheets of paper in the ADF e Adjust the document guides so that they fit against the documents Insert paper in the document feeder tray only when the ink on the paper is completely dry Do not load documents above the MAX fill line You can load up to 50 sheets of 64 gsm documents NOTE You cannot load the following documents on the ADF Be sure to place them on the document glass H Curled documents Pre punched paper Lightweight documents y Folded creased or torn documents S Cut and paste documents Carbon paper Printing Basics 133 E Print Media That Can Damage Your Printer Your printer i
30. or select the correct time Confirm the time on the LCD panel is correct and then press the ox button Press the Back button several times until the LCD panel shows Select Function Faxing 247 E Changing the Clock Mode You can set the current time in either the 12 hour or 24 hour format Nn oO oa A WO DN 248 Press the Til System button Select Admin Menu and then press the 0X button Select System Settings and then press the button Select Clock Settings and then press the ox button Select Time Format and then press the 0X button Select the desired format and then press the ox button Press the Back button several times until the LCD panel shows Select Function Faxing Sending a Fax You can fax data from your printer This section includes e Loading a Source Document on the Automatic Document Feeder ADF on page 249 e Loading a Source Document on the Document Glass on page 250 e Resolution on page 251 Document Type on page 251 Lighten Darken on page 252 Inserting a Pause on page 252 Sending a Fax from Memory on page 253 e Sending a Fax Manually on page 254 Confirming Transmissions on page 254 Automatic Redialing on page 255 E Loading a Source Document on the Automatic Document Feeder ADF IMPORTANT Do not load more than 50 sheets on the ADF or allow more than 50 sheets to be fed to the document output tray The document output tray sh
31. registering your details on our web site at http www fujixerox com support docuprint Fuji Xerox Online Support Assistant provides instructions and troubleshooting guides to resolve your printer problems It is an easy to use searchable online Help To find out more please visit our online support at http Awww fujixerox com support docuprint Contacting Fuji Xerox 417 418 Contacting Fuji Xerox Index Symbols button 42 Numerics 2 Sided 199 286 291 320 327 2 Sided Print 276 302 2 Sided Report 309 A Address Book 284 Address Book button 42 Address Book Editor 56 ADF cover 41 342 ADF glass 41 395 Adjust Altitude 313 Adjust BTR 310 Adjust Fusing Unit 311 Admin Menu 284 Alert Tone 308 Ans Select 275 298 Ans FAX Mode 275 Applicable lines 38 Auto Ans Ans FAX 275 298 Auto Ans TEL FAX 275 298 Auto Answer Fax 275 298 Auto Exposure 198 319 324 Auto Reset 306 AutoFit 328 Automatic Document Feeder ADF 40 41 Automatic duplex printing 161 Automatic redialing 255 Avoiding jams 341 B Back button 42 Basic printer problems 357 Cc C Clear button 42 CA Clear All button 42 Canceling a print job 160 From computer 160 From operator panel 160 Center output tray 40 342 353 CentreWare Internet Services 51 296 Managing printer 407 Online help for 407 Starting 407 Clean Developer 311 Clearing jams 340 Clearing paper jams From Automatic Document Feeder ADF 343 From center output tray 35
32. 0 inch default menu setting displays depends on the value selected for mm inch under the System Settings menu See mm inch on page 309 for more information Factory default menu setting e Paper Error Purpose To specify whether to display an error when the specified output paper size does not match the loaded paper IMPORTANT e Printing repeatedly on the paper smaller than the specified output paper size may make the interior of your printer dirty which may result in poor print quality or breakdown in your printer Values off Does not display an error when the specified output paper size does not match the loaded paper On Displays an error when the specified output paper size does not match the loaded paper Factory default menu setting Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad 321 Scan Defaults Use the Scan Defaults menus to configure a variety of scan features e Scan to Network Purpose To store the scanned image on a network server or on a computer Values Computer Network Stores the scanned image on a computer using the Server Message Block SMB protocol Server FTP Stores the scanned image on a server using the FTP protocol Factory default menu setting e File Format Purpose To specify the file format to save the scanned image Values PDF MultiPageTIFF TIFF JPEG Factory default menu setting e Color Purpos
33. 00 by 29 70 cm Fa Orientation Te 1 39 TextEdit g _ Print header and footer Cancel Print 3 Specify the fax settings NOTE The settings done here are only applied to a single fax job 260 Faxing 4 Click Print The Set Check Fax Transmission dialog box appears QOQ Set Check Fax Transmission Name Recipient List Name Phone Number Phone Number Edit lt lt My Address Book file Default dma C Look Up Address Book Delete Add to Address Book Authorization Delayed Send _ Delayed Send Password Time 2012 01 28 17 07 Stop Sending GStart Sending 5 Specify the destination for the recipient in one of the following ways e Specify a recipient directly a Enter a name and phone number directly b Click Add OR e Select a recipient from the Address Book saved on your computer a Click Look Up Address Book The Refer To Address Book dialog box appears b Select a recipient and then click Add c Click OK NOTE e When the Fax service is locked with a password enter the password in the Password box under Authorization 6 Click Start Sending Faxing 261 Receiving a Fax This section includes e About Receiving Modes on page 262 e Loading Paper for Receiving Faxes on page 262 e Receiving a Fax Automatically in the FAX Mode on page 263 Receiving a Fax Manually in the TEL Mode on page 263 Receiving a Fax Automatically in the TE
34. 216 Specifying a Destination to Store Scanned Documents 218 Configuring the Printer 0 2 260 c 4c cicccceedeceeedeenseeneedeeeeendesceenctee 228 Sending the Scanned File to the Network eeeeeeeteeeeeee 233 Scanning to a USB Storage DeVICE eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeea 234 Sending an E Mail With the Scanned IMage ee eeecceeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeee 235 Adding an Entry to the Address Book sssecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 235 Sending an E mail With the Scanned File eeeeeceeeeeee 237 Customizing Scan Options 20 5 cvs d2 ade ces seen ide dca deeeane tape seeveneiusendeeteedeeeds 238 Changing the Default Scan Settings ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 238 Changing the Scan Settings for an Individual Job 05 241 FAXING ee en th ass aden Mae eet AUS ae a elles ise AALS 243 Connecting the Telephone Line 2222222 c cceeneeeneceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeessceeeenes 244 Configuring Fax Initial Settings 2c 1 2 esse0c ceceeeeeeeeeedeeeeeeasaseeeenececeeees 246 Setting Your Regionsxciciwnene ide 246 Setting the Printer ID mr evil e a aaa 246 Setting the Time and Date cc eeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeee 247 Changing the Clock Mode eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 248 Sendinga FAK vs 2 35 oee a ae aea ea EAE dhe hed Gh en allan il td aes 249 Loading a Source Document on
35. B Copy button LED Moves to the top level of the Copy menu 3 Scan button LED Moves to the top level of the Scan menu 4 A Y buttons Moves a cursor or highlight up or down 5 lt P buttons Moves a cursor or highlight left or right 6 Job Status button LED Moves to the top level of the Job Status menu 7 Yi System button LED Moves to the top level of the System menu 8 Numeric keypad Enters characters and numbers 9 u Redial Pause button e Re dials a telephone number Inserts a pause during dialing 10 Speed Dial button Calls up a stored telephone number 11 CA Clear All button Resets the current setting and returns to the top level of each service menu 12 Energy Saver button LED Lights up in the Sleep mode Press this button to exit the Sleep mode 13 Print button LED Moves to the top level of the Print menu 14 Fax button LED Moves to the top level of the Fax menu 15 LCD Panel Displays various settings instructions and error messages 16 gt Back button Returns to the previous screen 17 x button Confirms the entry of values 18 i Address Book button Pressing this button at the Fax menu moves to the top level of the Phone Book menu 19 button Enters characters space amp 20 C Clear button Deletes characters and numbers 21 gt Data LED Lights up for incoming outgoing or pending jobs 22 Error LED Lights up when the printer has an error 23 Q Start
36. Basis rrearen e e a e 131 Abo tPriint Mediasie coreean ere aa aee ee eea 132 Print Media Usage Guidelines cccccceee cece eeeeeeeeeeententtaeeeeeees 132 Automatic Document Feeder ADF Guidelines ee 133 Print Media That Can Damage Your Printer eeeeeeeees 134 Print Media Storage Guidelines 2 c cecesecceeeeceeenecceceeeeeeens 135 Supported Print Medid a eenen renet e aeeie eeta Eeee Eit 136 Usable Print Media lt i eenen 137 Standard Paper and Tested Papet ccccccceccccceeeeeeeeseeeeeees 139 Loading Print Med taesccj 6c do dcsins des ceeceeteses ce bicaniaebiaeadedeeseetece castes tcueaeee 143 Capacity nenen ete bi essen Se Betas hand eats 143 Print Media DiMe nSiOns 2 2 c cecccceescieeenteseeeeend eee ceneneceteeceeeeerees 143 Loading Print Media in the Paper Tray eseeeeeeeeeeetteeeeees 144 Loading Print Media in the Priority Sheet Inserter PSI 152 Using the Output Tray Extension cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeetttteeeeeeees 157 Setting Paper Sizes and Types accra Aad eee eee 158 Setting Paper Sizes nnneeeeeeeeeee eree eeeeesesssssrrrrrrrrrrrrnrrrrereeeeeeee 158 Setting Paper TYPSS ecicesriivee c etches 158 PANUNG cist fet aeaee eee eea eese eee e a a E Ee e eea 159 Printing from the Computel ccccccccccceceeceseeeeeeceeeeeeeceeaneneceeeeeeees 159 Canceling a Print JOD ss causecoreceexet neadi 160
37. CGOmega ArialBdIt NwCentSchlbkIt CGOmegaBd TimesNew NwCentSchlbkBdIt CGOmegalIt TimesNewBd Times CGOmegaBdIt TimesNewlt TimesBd Coronet TimesNewBdlt TimesIt ClarendonCd Helvetica TimesBdlIt UniversMd HelveticaBd ZapfChanceryMdIt UniversBd HelveticaOb Symbol UniversMdIt HelveticaBdOb SymbolPs UniversBdIt HelveticaNr Wingdings UniversMdCcd HelveticaNrBd ZapfDingbats UniversBdCd HelveticaNrOb CourierBd UniversMdCdIt HelveticaNrBdOb CourierIt UniversBdCdIt PalatinoRmn CourierBdIt AntiqueOlv PalatinoBd LetterGothic AntiqueOlvBd PalatinoIt LetterGothicBd AntiqueOlvIt PalatinoBdIt LetterGothicIt GarmondAntiqua TTCAvantGardBk CourierPS GarmondHlb ITCAvantGardDb CourierPSBd Garmondkrsv ITCAvantGardBkOb CourierPSOb GarmondkKrsvHlb ITCAvantGardDbOb CourierPSBdOb Marigold ITCBookmanLt Factory default menu setting Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad 287 e Symbol Set Purpose To specify a symbol set for the specified font Values PC 8 PS MATH WINGDINGS PC 8 DN PI FONT DNGBTSMS PC 850 LEGAL ISO L6 PC 852 ISO 4 PC 1004 PC 8 TK ISO 6 PC 775 WIN L1 ISO 11 WINBALT WIN L2 ISO 15 UCS 2 WIN L5 ISO 17 ROMAN 8 DESKTOP ISO 21 ROMANEXT MC TEXT ISO 60 ISO L1 PS TEXT ISO 69 ISO L2 MS PUB WIN 3 0 ISO L5 MATH 8 SYMBOL Factory default menu setting e Font Size Purpose To specify the font size for scalable typographic fonts within a range from 4 00 to 50 0
38. Discovered Network Printer b Click Continue Enter the name of the printer in Name in the Add Printer dialog box and then click Continue You can optionally specify the location and description of the printer as additional information If you want to share the printer select the Share This Printer check box For a USB printer connected to a computer running the Ubuntu 10 x86 a Select FUJI XEROX DocuPrint M255 X FUJI XEROX DocuPrint M255 X from the Local Printers menu and then click Continue b Enter the name of the printer in Name in the Add Printer dialog box and then click Continue You can optionally specify the location and description of the printer as additional information If you want to share the printer select the Share This Printer check box Select FX from the Make menu and then click Continue Select FX DocuPrint M255 XXX from the Model menu and then click Add Printer The setup is complete You can optionally specify the default options settings of the printer Printer Connection and Software Installation E Specifying the Default Queue e For Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 Desktop x86 1 Select Applications gt System Tools Terminal 2 Enter the following command in the terminal window su Enter the administrator password lpadmin d Enter the queue name e For SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 11 x86 Select Computer gt More Applications and then select YaST on the Ap
39. G tting Helpar e neat ennai uate e a 389 LCD Panel Messages 2 5 c i Se ee 389 SimpleMonitor AlCTIS olad sscvsscancesessceceseonina ad ann Cerna awl anie tac nnen nenene 389 Obtaining the Product Information 0 0 0 0 cececcceeteeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeee 390 Enabling Non Genuine Mode ce ceeccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeanaaeeeeeees 391 Using the Operator Panel s25 c2225 cecal ashton ce eee eienn 391 Using the Printer Setting Utility Windows Onlly eee 392 WEIMGN AINCC ease dcecaa ERE a EEE e 393 Cleaning the Printer 22 00 eo cee eather ee eee GR eed 394 Cleaning the Scanner i 2 ccccecse cccenehendeastcge dee hencacseepebenens veenee boven 395 Cleaning the ADF Feed Roller c ccc ceeeccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeees 397 Replacing the Toner Cartridge 2 ccccccccceceseeeeeeteeeeeeeteseeeseceecneeteeeeees 398 When to Replace the Toner Cartridge ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 399 Removing the Toner Cartridge cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneettttaeeeeeees 400 Installing a Toner Cartridge s 2 20ncaadautosi ea toa neds 402 Ordering SUPDIICS scree olen ads st sastacestaetacdsneelieteeataceiuidetacte eee ees dae 404 Consumables nsii iaa ie Rated eel 404 When to Order a Toner Cartridge 2 0 ccccccececeeeeteeseteeeseeeneceees 404 Recycling SUpplicS snsc einen lactate 405 Storing Consumables ieoi tat e te aea eane ehes 406 Managing the Printers asc tccedecsetienstedete
40. Graphics Inc JPEG Our printer software uses some of the codes defined by the Independent JPEG Group About License 11 Types of Manuals Safety Guide Describes the information you need to know before using the printer and to operate the printer safely Setup Guide Provides step by step instructions on how to set up your printer Also describes how to setup wireless network The wireless LAN feature is available only on the DocuPrint M255 z model User Guide HTML files Describes how to get ready to print and set various features It also this guide covers the operator panel menus troubleshooting tips and maintenance information This guide is on the Software Pack CD ROM PostScript Level3 Compatible Describes how to set up your printer as a PostScript Level3 Compatible User Guide printer and the features that can be configured on your print driver This guide is on the Software Pack CD ROM 12 Types of Manuals Using This Guide This section includes e Organization on page 13 e Conventions on page 14 E Organization This guide is organized into the following chapters The summary of each chapter is as follows 1 Specifications Describes the printer specifications 2 Basic Operation Describes the main components of the printer power saver modes and how to turn on the printer 3 Printer Management Software Describes the software available for the printer
41. Ib Plain Business 4200 Letter Plain FX P B5 64 gsm Recycled Medium thickness paper FX P A5 Recycled for in house documents and general office use FX FR A4 Recycled Environmentally conscious paper 50 of pulp sourced from plantation grown trees 50 of recycled pulp V Paper A4 Recycled Oji Recycle 100 B5 66 gsm Recycled Oji Recycle 100 A4 Recycled V paper MG A4 67 gsm Recycled FX G70 A4 Recycled Recycled copy printer paper compounded 70 of recycled pulp FX G100 A4 Recycled Printing Basics 139 Paper Name Size Weight Paper Type Notes Supported FX C2 A5 70 gsm Recycled Paper for general office Paper use with minimum see Con d through FX C2R A4 Recycled 70 recycled pulp paper XC Premier 80 A5 80 gsm Plain XC Business 80 A4 Plain Data Copy A4 Plain Steinbeis Recycling A4 Plain Copy Yes Bronze A4 Plain Berga Focus A4 Plain XC Premier 90 A4 90 gsm Plain Conqueror Laid laser A4 Plain Paper FX JD B5 98 gsm Plain Double sided paper FX JD A4 Plain suitable for a variety of uses including brochures and booklet Multicopy Nymolla A4 100 gsm Plain Special FX Label No Cut A4 Label Labels Paper FX Label 20 Cut A4 Labels Xerox Label No Cut A4 Labels Xerox Label 24 Cut A4 Labels Avery Labels 5165 Letter Labels No Cut Avery Labels 5160 Letter Labels 30 Cut Columbia C0125 Com 10 Envelope Envelope Print Master Monarch Envelope River Series DL Env
42. In the hot humid dusty or poorly ventilated environment e In the place receiving direct sunlight e Near cookers or humidifiers Locate this product on a level and sturdy surface that can withstand a weight of 12 0 Kg Otherwise if tilted the product may fall over and cause injuries 18 Safety Notes Locate this product in a well ventilated area Do not obstruct ventilation openings of the product Keep the minimum clearance as follows for ventilation and an access to the power plug Unplug the product if an abnormal condition is noted 300mm 117mm 398mm 134mm 100 mm sy T 795 5 mm 420 mm 1049 mm 719 mm 619 mm a a a 300mm 201 5mm 313 5mm 134mm 100 mm Safety Notes 19 Q Do not incline the product at more than 1 degree angle Otherwise it may fall over and cause injuries To bundle wires and cables always use the cable ties and spiral tubes that Fuji Xerox supplies Otherwise it may cause some defects Others environment e Temperature 10 32 C Humidity 10 85 When the product is left in a chilly room and the room is rapidly warmed up by heater dew condensation may form inside the product and cause a partial deletion on printing D To keep this product in a good performance and condition always use it in the following 20 Safety Notes E Operational
43. Internet Services appears on your browser Cc Ww e eaaa SAE FUJI XEROX DocuPrint M255 z tate O General EBFUJI XEROX DocuPrint M255 z P General E E Printer Status Paper Tray Output Tray Cover Consumables Fault Status Fault Status Name DocuPrint M255 z Machine IP Address Pn Product Name FUJI XEROX DocuPrint M255 z Location Contact Person Status Ready to print Refresh FUJI Xerox Change the wireless network settings for the printer on the CentreWare Internet Services Reboot the printer Restore the wireless network settings on your computer NOTE e Ifthe operating system on your computer provides a wireless configuration software use it to change the wireless network settings Or you can change the wireless network settings using the tool provided with the operating system See the instructions below For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 Select Network Connections from Control Panel Right click Wireless Network Connection and select Properties Select the Wireless Networks tab a o ow Ensure that the check box for Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings is selected Click Advanced You can either set the printer to the ad hoc mode or the infrastructure mode p For Ad hoc mode Select Computer to computer ad hoc networks only and close the dialog box For Infrastructure mode Select Access point Infrastructure networ
44. Navi Macromedia Flash Player 8 bala ie Easy Install Navi gt Language Welcome English Px Px SER eta Easy Setup Advanced Setup 172 43 e Advanced Tools 4 Start Setup More Information Press this button when you setthe printer first User Guide A series of movies help you to set the printer easily The setting procedure includes the following Trouble Shooting Guide Setting the Printer Device Installing Drivers and Software e Product Features L 2 Click Start Setup Click Configure Printer 4 Select Wireless Connection and then click Next The setting method selection screen appears 84 Printer Connection and Software Installation 5 Select Advanced Easy Install Navi DDDDDDIIMNIEETI Configure Wireless Settings Select a method to configure wireless settings and then click Next Ethernet Cable You can configure wireless settings using an Ethernet cable After completing wireless configuration unplug the Ethernet cable Wizard Advanced w Ethernet Cable O WPS PIN WPS PBC Operator Panel CentreWare Internet Services Printer Connection and Software Installation 85 e Select a connection method from the following Ethernet Cable on page 86 WPS PIN on page 91 WPS PBC on page 92 Operator Panel on page 93 CentreWare Internet Services on page 94 Ethernet Cable 86 Select Ethernet Cable a
45. Notification Items Set the content of the notices to send via e mail Port Status StatusMessenger Select Enabled Protocol Settings gt SMTP Server Settings Select appropriate settings for sending and E mail Machine s E mail receiving e mails Address SMTP Server Address SMTP Server Port Number Send Authentication e E Mail Send Authentication e Login Name Password e Re enter Password POP3 Server Settings e POP3 Server Address POP3 Server Port Number e Login Name Password e Re enter Password Maintenance 409 Conserving Supplies You can change several settings of your print driver to conserve toner and paper Supply Setting Function Toner cartridge Toner Saving Mode in the Graphics tab of the print driver This check box allows the users to select a print mode that uses less toner When this feature is used the image quality will be lower than when it is not used Print media Multiple Up in the Layout tab of the print driver The printer prints two or more pages on one side of a sheet The available numbers that each print driver can print on one sheet of paper are as follows Windows Print Driver 2 4 8 or 16 pages e Mac OS X Print Driver 2 4 6 9 or 16 pages Combined with the Duplex 2 sided print setting Multiple Up allows you to print up to 32 pages on one sheet of paper 16 images on the front and 16 on the back 410 Maintenance Checking
46. OPC Drum Levers Priority Sheet Inserter PSI Front Cover Paper Tray ADF Cover oN OD on AJOJ ni 342 Troubleshooting E Clearing Paper Jams From the Automatic Document Feeder ADF When a document is jammed while it passes through the ADF follow the steps below to remove it NOTE To resolve the error displayed on the LCD panel you must clear all print media from the print media path 1 Open the ADF cover 2 Remove the jammed document by carefully pulling it in the direction of the arrow shown in the following illustration 3 If you find it difficult to pull the document open the document feeder tray Troubleshooting 343 4 Remove the jammed document from the document output tray NOTE e Be sure to adjust the document guides before printing a Legal size document 344 Troubleshooting 7 If you cannot remove the jammed document from the document output tray or cannot find any jammed document there open the document cover 8 Remove the document from the ADF feed roller or the feed area by carefully pulling the document in the direction of the arrow shown in the following illustration Troubleshooting 345 Clearing Paper Jams From the Front of the Printer This section includes e Clearing Paper Jams From the Paper Tray on page 346 e Clearing Paper Jams From the Priority Sheet Inserter PSI on page 349 Clearing Paper Jams From the Paper Tray
47. Page Counts You can print the System Settings page to check the total number of printed pages The total number of printed pages is shown in the Print Volume section classified by paper sizes Single side print including Multiple Up print is counted as one job and 2 sided print including Multiple Up print is counted as two During duplex 2 sided printing if an error occurs after one side is printed properly it is counted as one During duplex 2 sided printing a blank page may be inserted automatically depending on the settings of the application In this case the blank page is counted as one page If a blank page is inserted during duplex 2 sided printing for odd number pages and the rear of the last odd number page is left blank however this page is excluded from page counting NOTE e Refer to Printing the System Settings Page on page 175 for details on how to print the System Settings page Maintenance 411 Moving the Printer 1 Turn off the printer 2 Disconnect the power cord interface cable and any other cables 3 Remove all paper from the document output tray Maintenance 412 4 Lift the scanner unit remove all paper from the center output tray and then retract the output tray extension if extended 6 Lift the printer and move it gently NOTE e If you move the printer over a long distance be sure to remove the toner cartridge and pack the printer inside a box to avoid spill
48. Ringer volume 273 Safety Electrical 16 Operational 21 Scan button LED 42 Scan settings Color mode 239 Document size 240 Scan resolution 239 Scanned image file type 238 Suppress background color 240 Scan to e mail 36 Scan to Network 322 Scan to PC 36 Scanner driver printer utility problems 377 Scanning Limiting access 333 Scanning halftone 36 Scanning problems 375 Scanning resolution 32 36 37 Secure Receive 315 Secure Settings 314 Send document size 37 Send Header 276 301 Sending a fax 249 Sending a fax from memory 253 Sending a fax manually 254 Service Lock 314 Setting the printer ID 246 Setting the time and date 247 Setting your region 246 Sharpness 197 319 324 SimpleMonitor alerts 389 SNMP 296 Software Download 315 Software installation 61 Space requirement 33 Speaker volume 273 Specifications 31 Speed Dial 284 Speed Dial button 42 Standard paper and tested paper 139 Start button 42 StatusMessenger 296 409 Configuring 409 Stop button 42 Storing consumables 406 Supplies Recycling 405 Your Fax Number 301 When to order 404 Symbol Set 288 System button LED 42 System Settings 283 306 T TCP IP 295 TEL Mode 275 TEL FAX Mode 275 TIFF File Format 325 Toner access cover 40 Toner cartridge 40 399 Conserving 410 Install 402 Remove 400 When to order 404 When to replace 399 Toner Refresh 312 Tool Without An Interesting Name TWAIN 210 Total page counts 411 Transfer roller 41 Transmission mode 37 Tran
49. SSID XXXXX As the factory default menu setting wireless_device is specified in advance Encryption Type No Security A wireless network is configured with no security WEP A wireless network is configured with the WEP encryption WPA PSK TKIP A wireless network is configured with the WPA PSK TKIP encryption WPA2 PSK AES A wireless network is configured with the WPA2 PSK AES encryption Mixed Mode PSK A wireless network is configured with the Mixed Mode PSK encryption NOTE e This menu item appears only when the printer is connected to a wireless network Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad 293 e Wireless Setup DocuPrint M255 z only Purpose To configure wireless network settings Values Manual Enter Network Enter a name of up to 32 alphanumeric characters to identify the Setup SSID wireless network As the factory default menu setting wireless_device is specified in advance Infrastructure Configures a wireless network with access points No Configures a wireless network without security Security encryption Mixed Mode Configures a wireless network with the WPA PSK PSK TKIP WPA PSK AES and WPA2 PSK AES encryptions PassPhrase Enter a passphrase of 8 to 63 Entry alphanumeric characters WPA PSK Configures a wireless network with the WPA PSK TKIP TKIP encryption PassPhrase Enter a passphrase of 8 to 63 Entry alphanumeric characters WPA2 PSK Configures a
50. Select Admin Menu and then press the on button Select System Settings and then press the 0x button Select Power Saver Timer and then press the 0x button Select Low Power Timer or Sleep Timer and then press the ox button Press the A or w button or enter the desired value using the numeric keypad and then press the 0x button You can select from 1 30 minutes for Low Power Timer or 6 11 minutes for Sleep Timer Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad Resetting to Factory Defaults Enabling the Initialize NVM feature and rebooting the printer will reset all the printer settings and the Phone Book fax and Address Book scan data to their factory default menu settings NOTE The following procedure does not initialize the network settings To initialize the wired network settings see Initialize NVM on page 297 To initialize the wireless network settings on the DocuPrint M255 z model see Reset Wireless DocuPrint M255 z only on page 295 Press the i System button Select Admin Menu and then press the 0x button Select Maintenance and then press the 0x button Select Initialize NVM and then press the 0X button a fF WO N Select System Section to initialize the printer settings and then press the on button Select User Fax Section to initialize the Phone Book data for fax Select User Scan Section to initialize the Address Book data for scan 6 Select ves and then
51. Show hidden files and folders Hide extensions for known file types Hide protected operating system files Recommended E Launch folder windows in a separate process E Remember each folder s view settings O Restore previous folder windows at logon O Show Control Panel in My Computer M M Show encrypted or compressed NTFS files in color Show pop up description for folder and desktop items Use simple file sharing Recommended vi 4 Click OK and then close the window 5 Right click the folder and then select Properties 6 Select the Sharing tab and then select Share this folder 220 Scanning 7 Enter a shared name in the Share name box NOTE e Write down this shared name because you will use this name in the next setting procedure MyShare Properties General Sharing Security Customize You can share this folder with other users on your network To enable sharing for this folder click Share this folder Do not share this folder Share name MyShare Comment User limit Maximum allowed O Allow this number of users To set permissions for users who access this folder over the network click Permissions To configure settings for offline access click Caching Windows Firewall is configured to allow this folder to be shared with other computers on the network View your Windows Firewall settings 8 Click Perm
52. The Setup Disk Settings window appears 8 Setup Disk Settings a ies Model name FX DocuPrint PEDDI PEL E Comment Printer name FX DocuPrint PEDDI PEL amp Port Please dick here to make your selection V Set as default printer Gaetan Goa Cemaeieeoa J 7 Enter a description of your printer settings in the Comment field and select an output port from the Port list box NOTE Alternatively you can click Add Port to create your desired port e Select the Set as default printer check box as needed 8 Click Create Setup Disk The Specifying Setup Disk Directory window appears E Specifying Setup Disk Directory S Specify the directory of the folder for creating the setup disk and dick OK Click Cancel to return to the previous screen without creating the disk Destination folder 9 Enter the path to the destination folder directly into the Destination folder box or click Browse to select the folder 10 Click OK Printer Management Software 59 DocuWorks Windows Only When installing the DocuWorks run the appropriate EXE file in the DocuWorks document handling software Windows supports the DocuWorks and the DocuWorks Viewer Light The DocuWorks is available only for Windows NOTE For details on the DocuWorks refer to the readme file on the DocuWorks document handling software 60 Printer Management Software
53. To specify the prefix dial number of up to five digits This number will be dialed before any automatic dialing number is started It is useful for accessing the Private Automatic Branch Exchange PABX Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad 303 e Discard Size Purpose To specify whether to discard text or images at the bottom of a fax page when the entire page does not fit onto the output paper Values Off Prints any excess at the bottom of a fax page without discarding it On Discards any excess at the bottom of a fax page Auto Reduction Automatically reduces a fax page to fit it onto the output paper Factory default menu setting e ECM Purpose To specify whether to enable the Error Correction Mode ECM To use the ECM the remote fax machines must also support the ECM Values Off Disables the ECM On Enables the ECM Factory default menu setting e Extel Hook Thresh Purpose To specify the external telephone hook detection threshold for the condition in which a telephone line is not being used Values Lower Sets the external telephone hook detection threshold to Lower Normal Sets the external telephone hook detection threshold to Normal Higher Sets the external telephone hook detection threshold to Higher Factory default menu setting e Modem Speed Purpose To specify the fax modem speed when a fax transmission or reception error occurs Values
54. To use a wireless connection DocuPrint M255 z only also configure wireless network settings on the operator panel 6 Print the System Settings page to verify the new settings NOTE The reports and lists are all printed in English If the Software Pack CD ROM is not available you can download the latest driver from our web site http www fujixeroxprinters com See also Printing the System Settings Page on page 175 62 Printer Connection and Software Installation Connecting Your Printer The interface cables of your printer must meet the following requirements Connection Type Connection Specifications Ethernet 10 Base T 100 Base TX compatible USB USB 2 0 compatible Wireless DocuPrint M255 z only IEEE 802 11b 802 11g Wall Jack Connector RJ11 Phone Connector RJ11WaAIl 1 Ethernet Port a 2 USB Port fet 3 Wall Jack Connector LINE 4 Phone Connector PHONE Printer Connection and Software Installation 63 E Connecting Printer to a Computer or a Network Connect your printer via a USB Ethernet or wireless DocuPrint M255 z only connection Hardware and cabling requirements vary for the different connection methods Ethernet cables and hardware are not supplied with your printer and must be purchased separately The available features for each connection type are shown in the following table Connection Type Available Features USB When connected via
55. Turn off the computer modem s fax receive feature Do not use the computer modem while your printer is sending or receiving a fax Follow the instructions provided with your computer modem and fax application to fax via the computer modem 272 Faxing Setting Sounds This section includes e Speaker Volume on page 273 Ringer Volume on page 273 E Speaker Volume O a A QQ N Press the Ti System button Select Admin Menu and then press the 0x button Select Fax Settings and then press the 0 button Select Line Monitor and then press the 08 button Select the desired volume and then press the ox button Reboot the printer by turning the power switch off and then on E Ringer Volume O a fF QQ N Press the Yi System button Select Admin Menu and then press the ox button Select Fax Settings and then press the 0 button Select Ring Tone Volume and then press the ox button Select the desired volume and then press the on button Reboot the printer by turning the power switch off and then on Faxing 273 Specifying the Fax Settings This section includes e Customizing Fax Options on page 274 e Available Fax Options on page 275 E Customizing Fax Options Your printer is provided with a variety of options that you can use to configure the fax feature For details on the available menu items see Available Fax Options on page 275 Press the Ti System butto
56. a document s face up on the Automatic Document Feeder ADF with the top edge going in first or place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover See also e Making Copies From the Automatic Document Feeder ADF on page 186 e Making Copies From the Document Glass on page 184 Press the amp Copy button Select Margin Top Bottom and then press the ox button Press the A or button or enter the desired value using the numeric keypad and then press the 0x button 4 mm 0 2 inch Specify the value in increments of 1 mm 0 1 inch Which factory 0 50 mm 0 0 2 0 inch default menu setting displays depends on the value selected for mm inch under the System Settings menu See mm inch on page 309 for more information Factory default menu setting If necessary customize other copy options including the number of copies copy size and image quality See also e Customizing Copy Options on page 187 Press the lt gt Start button to begin copying Copying E Margin Left Right You can specify the left and right margins of the copy 1 Load a document s face up on the Automatic Document Feeder ADF with the top edge going in first or place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover See also e Making Copies From the Automatic Document Feeder ADF on page 186 e Making Copies From the Document Glass on page 184 Pre
57. add some bending to the flap of the envelopes as shown in the following illustration The amount of the bending shall be 5 mm 0 20 inches or less IMPORTANT Never use envelopes with a window or coated linings as it causes paper jams that may result in damage to the printer Printing Basics 155 e Loading Com 10 DL Yougata 4 or Younaga 3 Envelopes Load envelopes with the print surface facing up Ensure that the flapped edge is pointing toward the right of the printer and each flap is folded under the envelope e Loading C5 Nagagata 3 or Kakugata 3 Envelopes Load envelopes with the print surface facing up Ensure that the flapped edge is pointing toward the front of the printer and the flaps are left unfolded 156 Printing Basics E Using the Output Tray Extension The output tray extension is designed to prevent print media from falling from the printer after the print job is complete Before printing a long length document be sure to pull out the output tray extension NOTE To pull out envelopes or small print media from the center output tray lift up the scanner unit Printing Basics 157 Setting Paper Sizes and Types When loading print media set the paper size and type on the operator panel before printing This section describes how to set the paper size and type on the operator panel See also Understanding the Operator Panel Menus on page 282 This section includes e Sett
58. and security To share this folder with both network users and other users of this computer select the first check box below and type a share name Share this folder on the network Share name Mm yS hard i C Allow network users to change my files Lear more about sharing and security Windows Firewall will be configured to allow this folder to be shared with other computers on the network View your Windows Firewall settings 218 Scanning NOTE When the following screen appears click If you understand the security risks but want to share files without running the wizard click here then select Just enable file sharing and then click OK MyShare Properties General Sharing Customize Local sharing and security To share this fold of this computer h only drag it to the folder To make this folder and its subfolders private so that only you have access select the following check box Make this folder private Network sharing and security As a security measure Windows has disabled remote access to this computer However you can enable remote access and safely share files by running the Network Setup Wizard If you understand the security risks but want to share files without running the wizard click here Lear more about sharing and security Enable File Sharing If you enable sharing on this computer without using the Network Setup Wizard the computer could be vulnerab
59. at the higher speeds for which it is designed Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances 5 6 1 3 This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111 Emergency Service 5 5 5 4 If a charge for local calls is unacceptable the Dial button should NOT be used for local calls Only the 7 digits of the local number should be dialled from your telephone DO NOT dial the area code digit or the 0 prefix Faxing 8 1 7 b This equipment shall not be set up to make automatic calls to the Telecom 111 Emergency Service 8 2 1 b Call answering When this equipment is set up call answering not within 3 30 sec the telephone or answering machine shall answer incoming call with 3 30 sec NOTE Do not connect your printer directly to a DSL digital subscriber line This may damage the printer To use a DSL you will need to use an appropriate DSL filter Contact your service provider for the DSL filter 1 Plug one end of a telephone line cord to the wall jack connector and the other end to an active wall jack Wall jack connector To the wall jack _ NOTE The supplied telephone cord has four contact plugs It is recommended you use a telephone cord with four contact plugs and a wall jack with four contacts for a telephone line connection 2 Toconnecta telephone and or answering machine to your printer plug the telephone or an
60. button Select Admin Menu and then press the 0 button Enter the password specified for Panel Lock and then press the ox button NOTE The factory default panel password is 0000 Select Secure Settings and then press the ox button Select Secure Receive and then press the 0X button Select Secure Receive Set and then press the 0x button Select Enable and then press the 0x button Press the Back button several times until the LCD panel shows Select Function While in the secure receiving mode your printer stores received faxes in the memory and displays Secure Receive inthe Job Status screen to indicate it has faxes stored in the memory NOTE If you change the panel password while Secure Receive Set is set to Enable perform steps 1 through 5 above select Change Password and then press the OK button Enter a new password and then press the OK button To print stored faxes 270 Press the Job Status button Select Secure Receive and then press the 0X button Enter the password and then press the on button The faxes stored in memory are printed Faxing To turn off the secure receiving mode 1 Follow steps 1 through 6 in To turn on the secure receiving mode to access the Secure Receive Set menu 2 Select Disable and then press the ox button 3 Press the amp Back button several times until the LCD panel shows Select Function E Us
61. button Starts a job 24 Stop button Cancels the current processing or pending job 42 Basic Operation NOTE Selecting a different menu or returning to the previous screen cancels the current entry or setting Be sure to press the button to save the current entry or setting For details on how to use the numeric keypad to enter alphanumeric characters see Using the Numeric Keypad on page 337 Basic Operation 43 Turning On the Printer IMPORTANT Do not use extension cords or power strips Do not connect the printer to an uninterruptible power supply UPS system 1 Connect one end of the power cord to the power connector on the rear of the printer see Rear View on page 41 2 Connect the other end to a power source 3 Turn on the printer NOTE e When you turn on the printer for the first time follow the on screen instructions on the LCD panel to configure the initial settings of your printer See also e Setting Initial Settings on the Operator Panel on page 45 44 Basic Operation Setting Initial Settings on the Operator Panel You need to set the printer language and the clock date and time when you turn on the printer for the first time When you turn on the printer a wizard appears on the LCD panel Follow the steps below to configure the initial settings NOTE Nn Oo on FP W N o0 If you do not start configuring the initial settings Select Function appears on t
62. cause electric shock Plug the power cord directly into a grounded electrical outlet To prevent overheat and a fire accident do not use an extension cord a multi plug adaptor or a multiple connector Consult your local Fuji Xerox representative to check if an outlet is grounded Connect this product to a branch circuit or an outlet that has larger capacity than the rated ampere and voltage of this product See the data plate on the rear panel of this product for its rated ampere and voltage Never touch the power cord with wet hands It may cause electric shock Do not put an object on the power cord Always keep the plug connection free of dust The dusty and damp environment may bring about minute electric current in a connector It may generate heat and eventually cause a fire accident K A To avoid the risk of electric shock and a fire accident only use the power cord supplied with this product or the ones designated by Fuji Xerox The power cord is exclusive use for this product Do not use it for any other product Do not damage or alter the power cord Damage and alteration may generate heat and eventually cause electric shock or a fire accident If the power cord is damaged or insulated wires are exposed contact your local Fuji Xerox representative for its replacement Do not use a damaged or uninsulated cord to avoid the risk of electric shock and a fire accident A CAUTION 16 When cleani
63. check printer status and configure settings using a web browser on a network computer You can also use the CentreWare Internet Services to check the remaining volume of consumables and the paper loaded in this printer NOTE When using the printer as a local printer you cannot use the CentreWare Internet Services For details on checking the status of a local printer refer to Checking Printer Status with the SimpleMonitor Windows Only on page 408 Starting the CentreWare Internet Services Use the following procedure to start the CentreWare Internet Services 1 Launch your web browser 2 Enter the IP address of the printer in the address bar and then press the Enter key The CentreWare Internet Services appears on your browser e Using Online Help For details regarding the items that you can set on the CentreWare Internet Services click the Help button to display the online Help Maintenance 407 E Checking Printer Status with the SimpleMonitor Windows Only The SimpleMonitor is a tool that is installed along with your print driver It automatically checks the printer status when you send a print job The SimpleMonitor can also check the status of the paper tray and remaining amount of toner in the toner cartridge Starting the SimpleMonitor Double click the SimpleMonitor icon on the taskbar or right click the icon and select Printer Selection If the SimpleMonitor icon is not displayed on the taskbar open the Simp
64. ea A R VEE AA 31 CODY FUNCOM 2 esc ce tea nnce cock eieaa ee Ene Ea resce enc tee ERa ESEE ES EA TEE tact 32 Priv FUNCUOM acto EE E EA E A ed Sth cee le eh ei 34 SCAN FUNGUON 222 22 xe e EEEE a ny see nd ee me eee cee 36 Pre FUNCOM hii to a reat serie od asset cee We ee te een eee Lut etek Ave ees 37 Direct Fax Function cien a ae a ee 38 2 Basic Opel atl Ole veet e e e E e S 39 Main COmponentS eee a a a a a 40 FONE VO t a e e aer e e raa ar 40 Rear VIGW costes ee eeetetn ne a lata ie a R ieee 41 Automatic Document Feeder ADF eseeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 41 Operator Panel ee ek ra tances pr e Eee A E Te aan hee SAE ie ueiederets 42 Turning On the Printer garment meee eee eee ee eet Bert Ann DR ERE Ree eee her ninenin 44 Setting Initial Settings on the Operator Panel cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 45 Printing the Panel Settings Page c cccccecceceeeeseeeeeeseeeceecaececneeceeeeteeeeerees 46 The Operator PANS eee a ee aer Sawa Gh eases aes 46 The Printer Setting Utility Windows Only eeeeeeeeeeesseesssseeeereen 46 Power Saver WOUG 232i hisc sce tet tend ca tesla aed ee cue teehee 47 Exiting the Power Saver Mode ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenenttaeeeeenees 47 2 Contents Printer Management Software ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 49 Printand Scan Divers sisese erete te a tra eridar eireta ee eein EER kS 50 CentreWare Internet Services c2 ccc
65. even though you have taken suggested actions described above contact our local representative office or authorized dealer E Bead Carry Out BCO Problem Action Bead Carry Out BCO is If the printer is installed in a high altitude location set the altitude of happening the location 1 Launch the Printer Setting Utility and click Adjust Altitude on the Printer Maintenance tab 2 Select the value close to the altitude of the location where the printer is installed 3 Click the Apply New Settings button NOTE Ifthe problem continues even though you have taken suggested actions described above contact our local representative office or authorized dealer Troubleshooting 367 E Auger Mark Nie N HOMO DEF N Problem Action The printed result has auger mark The toner cartridge may be low or need to be replaced Confirm the amount of toner in the toner cartridge 1 Check the toner level on the Consumables tab of the Printer Status window of the SimpleMonitor 2 Replace the toner cartridge as needed Start Clean Developer 1 Launch the Printer Setting Utility and click Clean Developer on the Diagnosis tab 2 Click the Start button NOTE Ifthe problem continues even though you have taken suggested actions described above contact our local representative office or authorized dealer 368 Troubleshooting E Wrinkled Stained Paper Problem Action T
66. fax tone This option is not available in regions where a serial phone system is employed DRPD Mode To use this option you need to subscribe the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection DRPD service from your telephone company that assigns multiple telephone numbers to a single telephone line and distinguishes each line with a distinctive ring pattern Once this service is activated then you can configure your printer to monitor the line for the distinctive ring pattern Auto Answer Fax Specify a period of time for which the printer waits before entering the FAX Mode upon reception of an incoming call Auto Ans Specify a period of time for which the printer waits before entering the FAX Mode TEL FAX when the external telephone receives an incoming call Auto Ans Specify a period of time for which the printer waits before entering the FAX Mode Ans FAX when the answering machine receives an incoming call Line Monitor Select a volume level of the sound that the printer emits from the internal speaker while establishing a connection for fax transmission m Ring Tone Select a volume level of the ring tone that the printer emits from the internal speaker Volume to indicate an incoming telephone call while in the TEL FAX Mode Line Type Select the line type Dialing Type Select the dialing type NOTE DP 10pps is not displayed when Australia is set for Region Interval Timer Specify a
67. in the Priority Sheet Inserter PSI or the paper tray Check if the LCD panel shows Memory Full The printer does not send faxes Check the other fax machine you are sending to to see if it can receive your fax The incoming fax has blank spaces or is received in poor quality The fax machine sending you the fax may be faulty Ask the sender to sort out the problem and resend the fax A noisy phone line can cause line errors Ask the sender to resend the fax Check your printer by making a copy The toner cartridge may be empty Replace the toner cartridge See also e Replacing the Toner Cartridge on page 398 Some of the words on an incoming fax are stretched The fax machine sending you the fax had a temporary document jam Ask the sender to clear the document jam and resend the fax There are lines on the documents you send Check your ADF glass for marks and clean it See also e Cleaning the Scanner on page 395 The printer dials a number but the connection with another fax machine fails The other fax machine may be turned off out of paper or cannot answer incoming calls Ask the sender to sort out the problem and retry Documents are not stored in the memory There may not be enough memory to store the document If the LCD panel shows Memory Full delete any documents you no longer need from the memory and then restore the document or wait for the job in pr
68. is given precedence over the media in the paper tray Using the PSI you can print on print media of another type or size preferentially over the regular media in the paper tray For more information see Loading Print Media in the Priority Sheet Inserter PSI on page 152 USB Direct Print a QO C Ei You can print directly from your USB storage device without starting your computer and an application For more information see Direct Printing Using a USB Storage Device on page 166 28 Product Features Multiple Up Print With the Multiple Up print feature of the printer you can print multiple pages on a single sheet of paper to save paper consumption For more information see the print driver s help Wireless Print DocuPrint M255 z only With the wireless LAN feature of the printer you can place your printer at any location and print from a computer without cabling For more information see Configuring Wireless Network Settings DocuPrint M255 z only on page 77 2 in 1 Copy You can copy two original pages on one side of a single sheet of paper to save paper consumption For more information see N Up on page 320 ID Card Copy a You can copy both sides of an ID card on one side of a single sheet of paper in its original size by selecting ID Card Copy on the operator panel For more information see Copy
69. load longer paper media extend it to the full length Printing Basics 145 3 4 5 146 Slide the paper width guides and the length guide to the maximum positions Before loading the print media flex the sheets back and forth and then fan them Straighten the edges of the stack on a level surface Load the print media into the paper tray with the recommended print surface facing up NOTE Do not load paper media above the fill line on the paper width guides of the paper tray as it may cause paper jams Printing Basics 6 Slide the paper width guides and then the length guide inward until they rest lightly against the edges of the print media stack 7 Replace the paper tray cover onto the paper tray 9 Select the paper type on the print driver if the loaded print media is not standard plain paper If a user specified print media is loaded in the paper tray you must specify the paper size on the print driver NOTE For details on specifying the paper size and type on the print driver refer to the Help provided for the print driver Printing Basics 147 Loading Envelopes in the Paper Tray Follow the guidelines below to load envelopes in the paper tray NOTE When you print on envelopes be sure to specify the envelope on the print driver If not specified the print image will be rotated 180 degrees If you do not load envelopes in the paper tray right after the
70. more pages to send select Yes replace the page with a new one and select Continue repeat the actions for the remaining pages and press the 0x button Otherwise select No and press the 0x button The printer dials the fax number stored as the speed dial number and send the fax when the remote fax machine answers NOTE Using an asterisk in the digit of the speed dial number you can send a document to multiple locations For example if you enter 0 you can send a document to the destinations registered to the speed dial numbers 01 through 09 E Group Dialing If you frequently send the same document to several destinations you can group the fax numbers for these destinations together to create a group dialing number This enables you to send a fax to multiple destinations by specifying a single group dialing number You can create up to six group dial numbers NOTE You cannot include a group dial number within another group dial number 266 Faxing E Creating Group Dial Numbers on O A A WO N 10 11 12 13 Press the Yi System button Select Admin Menu and then press the 0X button Select Phone Book and then press the 0x button Select Group Dial and then press the 0X button Select a group dial number between 01 and 06 and then press the ox button Select Name and then press the 0X button Enter your desired name and then press the 08 button Select Speed Dial No and then pr
71. panel displays a prompt for another page If you have more pages to send select Yes replace the page with a new one and select Continue repeat the actions for the remaining pages and then press the OK button Otherwise select No and press the 0x button The printer dials the fax number and send the fax when the remote fax machine answers NOTE e You can cancel your fax job at any time by pressing the Stop button while the transmission is in progress Faxing 253 1 nN O on A Sending a Fax Manually Load a document s face up on the Automatic Document Feeder ADF with the top edge going in first or place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover See also e Loading a Source Document on the Automatic Document Feeder ADF on page 249 Loading a Source Document on the Document Glass on page 250 Press the E Fax button Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs See also e Resolution on page 251 Lighten Darken on page 252 Select OnHook and then press the 0x button Select On and then press the 0X button Enter the fax number of the remote fax machine using the numeric keypad Start the fax transmission e Ifthe document is loaded on the ADF press the O Start button If the document is loaded on the document glass press the O Start button select the desired setting and then press the ox button NOTE You can cancel your
72. port Enable Enables the LPD port Port 9100 Disable Disables the Port 9100 port Enable Enables the Port 9100 port WSD Disable Disables the Web Services on Devices port Enable Enables the Web Services on Devices port SNMP Disable Disables the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP UDP port Enable Enables the SNMP UDP port StatusMessenger Disable Disables the StatusMessenger feature Enable Enables the StatusMessenger feature CentreWare IS Disable Disables an access to the CentreWare Internet Services embedded in the printer Enable Enables an access to the CentreWare Internet Services embedded in the printer Bonjour mDNS Disable Disables the Bonjour mDNS Enable Enables the Bonjour mDNS Factory default menu setting WSD stands for Web Services on Devices e IP Filter NOTE The IP Filter feature is supported for IPv4 addresses and available only when Protocol is set to LPD or Port 9100 Purpose To block data received from certain IP addresses through the network You can set up to five IP addresses To make any changes effective turn off the printer and then turn it back on Values No n Address nis 1 5 Sets the IP address for Filter n No n Mask nis 1 5 Sets the address mask for Filter n Disables the IP Filter feature for Filter n Accepts an access from the specified IP address No n Mode off nis 1 5 Accept Reject Rejects an access from t
73. remote fax machine see Sending a Fax from Memory on page 253 5 Press the lt j Start button 264 Faxing Automatic Dialing This section includes e Speed Dialing on page 265 Storing a Fax Number for Speed Dialing on page 265 Sending a Fax Using Speed Dialing on page 266 Group Dialing on page 266 Creating Group Dial Numbers on page 267 Editing Group Dial Numbers on page 268 Sending a Fax Using Group Dialing Multi address Transmission on page 269 Printing the Address Book List on page 269 E Speed Dialing You can store up to 99 frequently dialed numbers in fax speed dial locations 01 99 When a delayed fax job or a redial job for a speed dial number exists you cannot change the speed dial number using the operator panel or the CentreWare Internet Services E Storing a Fax Number for Speed Dialing 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Press the Til System button Select Admin Menu and then press the ox button Select Phone Book and then press the 0x button Select Speed Dial and then press the 0x button Select the desired speed dial number between 01 and 99 and then press the ox button Select Name and then press the 0X button Enter the name using the numeric keypad and then press the 0x button Select Phone Number and then press the 0x button Enter the number you want to store using the numeric keypad and then press the 0x button To insert a pau
74. select Page Setup Select your printer from Format For From Paper Size select Manage Custom Sizes kh OO N In the Custom Paper Sizes window click A newly created setting Untitled is displayed in the list Double click Untitled and enter a name for the setting Enter the size of the document to be printed in the Width and Height boxes of Paper Size Specify Non Printable Area if necessary Click OK Make sure that the newly created paper size is chosen in Paper Size and then click OK From the File menu select Print o O A N OO wo Click Print to start printing Printing Basics 173 E Checking Status of a Print Job This section includes e Checking Status Windows Only on page 174 e Checking Status on the CentreWare Internet Services Windows amp Mac OS X on page 174 Checking Status Windows Only You can check the printer status with the SimpleMonitor Double click the SimpleMonitor printer icon on the taskbar at the bottom right of the screen The Printer Selection window appears and displays the printer name the printer connection port printer status and the model name Check the column Status for the current status of your printer Settings button Displays the Settings window and allows you to modify the SimpleMonitor settings Click the name of the desired printer listed on the Printer Selection window The Printer Status window appears You can check the printer status and print job status
75. settings Panel Settings Purpose To print a detailed list of all the settings on the operator panel menus Job History Purpose To print a detailed list of the jobs that have been processed This list contains the last 50 jobs Error History Purpose To print a detailed list of paper jams and fatal errors Demo Page Purpose To print a test page PCL Fonts List Purpose To print a sample of available PCL fonts PS Fonts List Purpose To print a sample of available PostScript Level3 Compatible and PDF fonts Protocol Monitor Purpose To print a detailed list of monitored protocols Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad 283 Address Book Purpose To print the list of all addresses stored as Address Book information Fax Activity Purpose To print the report of faxes you recently received or sent E Meter Readings Use Meter Readings to check the total number of printed pages E Admin Menu Use the Admin Menu to configure a variety of printer features NOTE e A password is required to use the Admin Menu when Panel Lock Set is set to Enable In this case enter the password you specified and press the ox button Phone Book Use the Phone Book menu to configure the speed dial and group dial settings e Speed Dial Purpose To store up to 99 frequently dialed numbers in speed dial locations NOTE The first eight entries are assigned to the one touch buttons on the ope
76. tab If a user name and password entry is prompted enter the correct user name and password NOTE The default User ID and password are 11111 and x admin respectively CentreWare z Internet Services DocuPrint M255 z Status O General SFUM XEROX DocuPrint M255 z o General H E gt Printer Status C Paper Tray Output Tray Cover Consumables E Fault Status Fault Status Name DocuPrint M255 z Machine IP Address IP42 Product Name FUJI XEROX DocuPrint M255 z Location Contact Person Status Ready to print Refresh FUJI Xerox 4 Under Network Scan Comp Serv click Computer Server Address Book 228 Scanning 5 Select any unused number and click Add CentreWare Internet Services FUJI XEROX DocuPrint M255 z Status Network Scan Comp Serv j FUJI XEROX DocuPrint M2552 Computer Server Address Book Far E mail z P Personal Address No Name Displayed on Printer Host Address IP Address or DNS Name L Fax Group 01 Not in Use Add E E Mail Group B Edit E mail Message 02 Notin Use ddj EH Network Scan Comp Serv 03 Not in Use Add F Computer Server Address Boo ce 04 QNot in Use Add 05 Not in Use Add 06 Notin Use Add 07 Not in Use Add A FUJI Xerox amp ae The Add Network Scan Address page appears No 01 1 Nam
77. the Copy menu disable Auto Exposure For information on turning Auto Exposure on page 198 Exposure on and off see Auto Image is too light or dark Use the Lighten Darken option on the Copy menu For information on making the image lighter or darker see Lighten Darken on page 196 NOTE lt Ifthe problem continues even though you have taken suggested actions described above contact our local representative office or authorized dealer 372 Troubleshooting Fax Problems Problem Action The printer is not working there is no display and the buttons are not working Unplug the power cord and plug it in again Ensure that there is power to the electrical receptacle No dial tone sounds Check that the phone line is connected properly See also e Connecting the Telephone Line on page 244 Check that the phone socket in the wall is working by plugging in another phone The numbers stored in the memory do not dial correctly Ensure that the numbers are stored in the memory correctly Print the Address Book List The document does not feed into the printer Ensure that the document is not wrinkled and you are putting it in correctly Check that the document is of the right size not too thick or thin Ensure that the ADF cover is firmly closed Faxes are not received automatically Select FAX Mode forAns Select Ensure that there is paper
78. the file size of scanned images An image scanned in color will have a larger file size than the same image scanned in black and white Press the i System button Select Defaults Settings and then press the 0x button Select Scan Defaults and then press the ox button Select Color and then press the 0x button a fF WO N Select one of the following options and then press the ox button Black amp White Scans in black and white This option is available only when File Format is set to PDF Grayscale Scans in grayscale Color Scans in color factory default setting Color Photo Scans in color This option is suitable for photographic images Setting the Scan Resolution You may want to change the scan resolution depending on the way you plan to use the scanned image Scan resolution affects both the size and image quality of the scanned image file The higher the scan resolution is the larger the file size becomes To select the scan resolution Press the fi System button Select Defaults Settings and then press the 0x button Select Scan Defaults and then press the 0X button Select Resolution and then press the 0x button a fF OO N Select one of the following options and then press the ox button 200 x 200dpi Produces the lowest resolution and smallest file size factory default setting e 300 x 300dpi Produces a medium resolution and a medium file size e 400 x 400dp
79. the operator panel or use the CentreWare Internet Services to turn on off the DHCP protocol NOTE You can print a report that includes the printer s IP address On the operator panel press the ar System button select Report List press the x button select System Settings and then press the x button The IP address is listed on the System Settings page Using the Operator Panel To turn on off either the DHCP or the AutolP protocol On the operator panel press the i System button Select Admin Menu and then press the button Select Network and then press the button Select TCP IP and then press the button Select IPv4 and then press the button Select Get IP Address and then press the button Nn oO on FB W N Select DHCP AutoIP or DHCP and then press the button Using the CentreWare Internet Services To turn on off the DHCP protocol 1 Launch your web browser 2 Enter the IP address of the printer in the address bar and then press the Enter key The CentreWare Internet Services appear on your browser Select Properties Select TCP IP from the Protocol Settings folder on the left navigation panel In the IP Address Mode field select the DHCP AutolIP option ao a Aa Q Click the Apply button 68 Printer Connection and Software Installation Assigning an IP Address for IPv4 Mode NOTE When you assign an IP address manually in IPv6 mode use the CentreWare In
80. the same as the one to load standard size paper e Loading Print Media in the Paper Tray on page 144 e Loading Print Media in the Priority Sheet Inserter PSI on page 152 Setting Paper Sizes and Types on page 158 Defining a Custom Paper Size Before printing define a custom size on the print driver NOTE When defining a paper size on the print driver or the operator panel be sure to specify the same size as the actual print media used Specifying a wrong size for printing can cause a printer failure This is especially true if you specify a bigger size when using a narrow width paper e Using the Windows Print Driver On the Windows print driver define a custom size in the Custom Paper Size dialog box This section explains the procedure using Windows 7 as an example On Windows XP or later only users with administrator rights can use the administrator s password to change the settings Users without the rights of administrator can only view the contents Click Start Devices and Printers Right click the icon for your printer and then select Printer properties Select the Configuration tab Click Custom Paper Size Select the custom setup you want to define from Details ao a fF WwW N Specify the length of the short edge and long edge under Change Setting For You can specify the values either by entering them directly or using the up arrow and down arrow buttons The length of the short edge cannot be long
81. the underside of the white document cover and film until they are clean and dry 5 Close the document cover Maintenance 396 E Cleaning the ADF Feed Roller To ensure the best possible copies clean the ADF feed roller at regular intervals to keep it clean 1 Open the ADF cover 2 Wipe the ADF feed roller with a dry soft lint free cloth or paper towel until it is clean The ADF feed roller soiled with ink stains may dirty the paper that goes through the Automatic Document Feeder ADF In such a case slightly dampen a soft lint free cloth or paper towel with neutral detergent or water and wipe the ADF feed roller until it is clean and dry Maintenance 397 Replacing the Toner Cartridge Genuine toner cartridges are available only through Fuji Xerox It is recommended that you use a genuine toner cartridge for your printer Fuji Xerox does not provide warranty coverage for problems caused by using non genuine consumables A WARNING e Use a broom or a wet cloth to wipe off spilled toner Never use a vacuum cleaner for the spills It may catch fire by electric sparks inside the vacuum cleaner and cause explosion If you spill a large volume of toner contact your local Fuji Xerox representative e Never throw a toner cartridge into an open flame Remaining toner in the cartridge may catch fire and cause burn injuries or explosion If you have a used toner cartridge no longer needed contact your local Fuj
82. the web page of the wireless access point See the access point manual for the details On the operator panel press the i System button Select Admin Menu and then press the button Select Network and then press the button Select WPS Setup and then press the button Select PIN Code and then press the button Take a note of PIN code displayed on the operator panel Select Start Configuration and then press the button If SSID selection screen appears select the SSID and then press the button Enter the PIN code of the printer at the web page of the wireless access point Wait a few minutes until the printer restarts to establish the wireless network Print a System Settings page from the operator panel a Press the i System button b Select Report List and then press the button c Select System Settings and then press the button The System Settings page is printed Confirm that Link Quality is shown as Good Acceptable or Low on the report NOTE e When Link Quality is No Reception check if the wireless settings are correctly configured e If the wireless setting does not work contact your system administrator or Fuji Xerox Customer Support Center Printer Connection and Software Installation 119 Installing Print Drivers on Computers Running Linux CUPS This section provides information on installing and setting up print drivers wit
83. then press the Enter key 4 Reply from the IP address denotes printer is active on the network See also e Printing and Checking the System Settings Page on page 71 E Printing and Checking the System Settings Page Print the System Settings page and check your printer s IP address This section includes e Using the Operator Panel on page 71 e Using the Printer Setting Utility Windows Only on page 72 Using the Operator Panel NOTE The reports and lists are all printed in English 1 Press the Yi System button 2 Select Report List and then press the button 3 Select System Settings and then press the button The System Settings page is printed 4 Confirm the IP address next to IP Address under Wired Network DocuPrint M255 df or Wired Network Wireless Network DocuPrint M255 z on the System Settings page If the IP address is 0 0 0 0 wait for a few minutes to resolve the IP address automatically and then print the System Settings page again If the IP address is not resolved automatically see Assigning an IP Address for Pv4 Mode on page 69 Printer Connection and Software Installation 71 Using the Printer Setting Utility Windows Only The following procedure uses Windows 7 as an example NOTE The reports and lists are all printed in English 1 Click Start All Programs Fuji Xerox Fuji Xerox Printer Software for Asia Pacific gt your printer Printer Setting Uti
84. toner evenly NOTE Handle the toner cartridge carefully to avoid spilling of the toner 2 Insert the toner cartridge into the cartridge holder and then turn it clockwise to align to the lock mark IMPORTANT Be sure to secure the toner cartridge firmly before printing Otherwise it may cause some defects 402 Maintenance Close the toner access cover Make sure that the cover clicks into place Pack the removed toner cartridge in the box in which the installed toner cartridge was packed up Taking care not to touch any spilled toner dispose of the sheets of paper you used for toner cartridge replacement Maintenance 403 Ordering Supplies The toner cartridge needs to be ordered occasionally The toner cartridge includes installation instructions on the box This section includes e Consumables on page 404 e When to Order a Toner Cartridge on page 404 e Recycling Supplies on page 405 E Consumables IMPORTANT Use only consumables we recommend Use of any consumables other than recommended can impair machine quality and performance Product Name Product Code Description Toner Cartridge CT201918 Available for DocuPrint M255 z and capable of printing approximately 2 500 pages Toner Cartridge CT201919 2 in 1 package of CT201918 Toner Cartridge CT201920 Available for DocuPrint M255 df and capable of printing approximately 2 500 pages Toner Cartridge CT201921 2 in 1 p
85. your computer for wireless connectivity NOTE You can also change the wireless network settings using the wireless application that may be installed on your computer For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 a Select Network Connections from Control Panel b Right click Wireless Network Connection and select Properties c Select the Wireless Networks tab d Ensure that the check box for Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings is selected NOTE Make note of the wireless network settings on the Advanced dialog box step f and the Wireless network properties dialog box step h You may require these settings later e Click the Advanced button f Select Computer to computer ad hoc networks only and close the Advanced dialog box g Click the Add button to display Wireless network properties Printer Connection and Software Installation 95 h On the Association tab enter the following information and click OK Network name SSID xxxxxxxx Xxxxxxxx indicates a wireless device s SSID which you use Network Authentication Open Data encryption Disabled Wireless network properties Association Authentication Connection Network name SSID C Connect even if this network is not broadcasting Wireless network key This network requires a key for the following Network Authentication Open Data encryption Disabled i Click the Move up button to mo
86. z only on page 77 Setting Up the Printer for Shared Printing on page 104 Using the XML Paper Specification Print Driver on page 113 e Printer Connection and Software Installation 73 E Identifying Print Driver Pre install Status for Network Connection Setup Before installing print drivers on your computer print the System Settings page to check the IP address of your printer This section includes e Using the Operator Panel on page 74 e Using the Printer Setting Utility on page 74 e Disabling the Firewall Before Installing Printer Drivers on page 75 Using the Operator Panel NOTE The reports and lists are all printed in English 1 Press the Yi System button 2 Select Report List and then press the button 3 Select System Settings and then press the button The System Settings page is printed 4 Find the IP address under Wired Network DocuPrint M255 df or Wired Network Wireless Network DocuPrint M255 z on the System Settings page If the IP address is 0 0 0 0 wait for a few minutes to resolve the IP address automatically and then print the System Settings page again If the IP address is not resolved automatically see Assigning an IP Address for IPv4 Mode on page 69 Using the Printer Setting Utility The following procedure uses Windows 7 as an example NOTE The reports and lists are all printed in English 1 Click Start All Programs gt Fuji Xerox Fuji Xerox
87. 0 3 3 Factory default menu setting e Density Adjustment Purpose To adjust the print density level within the range of 3 to 3 The factory default menu setting is 0 e Clean Developer Purpose To rotate the developer motor and stir the toner in the toner cartridge Values Yes Stirs the toner in a new toner cartridge No Does not stir the toner in a new toner cartridge Factory default menu setting Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad 311 e Toner Refresh Purpose To use up a toner cartridge when you need to replace it before the end of its life or to stir the toner in a new toner cartridge Values Black Yes Cleans the toner in the toner cartridge No Does not clean the toner in the toner cartridge Factory default menu setting e Machine life Purpose To specify whether to continue print operations when the printer comes to the end of its service life Values Stop Print Stops print operations at the end of service life Continue Print Continues print operations after the end of service life Factory default menu setting NOTE When the printer no longer operates showing the error code 191 310 on the LCD panel press the Back button and the w button at the same time and change the Machine life setting to Continue Print Then you can keep using the printer Although you can keep using the printer after the end of its service life by changing the se
88. 0 The default is 12 00 Font size refers to the height of the characters in the font One point equals approximately 1 72 of an inch NOTE e The Font Size menu item only appears for typographic fonts e Font Pitch Purpose To specify the font pitch for scalable mono spaced fonts within a range from 6 00 to 24 00 The default is 10 00 Font pitch refers to the number of fixed space characters in a horizontal inch of type For nonscheduled mono spaced fonts the pitch is displayed but cannot be changed NOTE The Font Pitch menu item only appears for fixed or mono spaced font 288 Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad e Form Line Purpose To set the number of lines in a page Values 64 Select the value in increments of 1 5 128 Factory default menu setting NOTE e The printer sets the amount of space between each line vertical line spacing based on the Form Line and Orientation settings Make sure that the Form Line and Orientation settings are correct before changing the Form Line setting e Quantity Purpose To set the default print quantity within a range from 1 to 999 The default is 1 Set the number of copies required for a specific job on the print driver Values selected on the print driver always override values selected on the operator panel e Image Enhance Purpose To specify whether to enable the Image Enhance feature which makes the boundary line between black and wh
89. 0000 9999 Sets or changes the password required to access Admin Password Menu and Report List Factory default menu setting Not displayed when Panel Lock Set is set to Disable kk e Service Lock Purpose To specify whether to enable each of the printer services or to require a password to use the services and to set or change the password See also Limiting Access to Copy Fax Scan and USB Direct Print Operations on page 333 NOTE e You can access to the items under Service Lock only when Panel Lock Set is set to Enable Values Copy Unlocked Enables the Copy function Locked Disables the Copy function Password Enables the Copy function but requires a password Locked FAX Unlocked Enables the Fax function Locked Disables the Fax function the printer will not send or receive faxes Password Enables the Fax function but requires a password to send Locked faxes does not require a password to receive incoming faxes 314 Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad Scan Unlocked Enables the Scan function Locked Disables the Scan function Password Enables the Scan function but requires a password Locked Print from USB Unlocked Enables the Print from USB Memory feature Locked Disables the Print from USB Memory feature Password Enables the Print from USB Memory feature but requires a Locked password Change 0000 9999 Sets or changes the passw
90. 10 7 1 Click System Preferences Accounts 2 Select your account 3 Select Change Password 4 Enter a password for your user login account in New Password New password for Mac OS X 10 6 5 Re enter the password in Verify 6 Click Change Password After you confirmed a login user name and password go to Specifying a Destination to Store Scanned Documents on page 218 When Using the FTP The Scan to Server Scan to Computer feature requires a user name and a password For your user name and password contact your system administrator Scanning 217 E Specifying a Destination to Store Scanned Documents When Using the SMB Set up a shared folder to store the scanned document using the following procedure For Windows XP Home Edition 1 Create a folder in the desired directory on your computer Example of folder name MyShare 2 Right click the folder and then select Properties 3 Click the Sharing tab and then select Share this folder on the network 4 Enter a shared name in the Share name box NOTE e Write down this shared name because you will use this name in the next setting procedure MyShare Properties General Sharing Customize Local sharing and security To share this folder with other users of this computer only drag it to the Shared Documents folder To make this folder and its subfolders private so that only you have access select the following check box Network sharing
91. 2 4 Kbps 4 8 Kbps 9 6 Kbps 14 4 Kbps 33 6 Kbps Factory default menu setting 304 Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad e Fax Activity Purpose To specify whether to automatically print the Fax Activity Report after every 50 incoming and outgoing fax communications Values Auto Print Automatically prints the Fax Activity Report after every 50 incoming and outgoing fax communications No Auto Print Does not automatically print the Fax Activity Report Factory default menu setting e Fax Transmit Purpose To specify whether to print a transmission report after every fax transmission or only when an error occurs Values Print Always Prints a transmission report after every fax transmission Print On Error Prints a transmission report only when an error occurs Print Disable Does not print a transmission report after a fax transmission Factory default menu setting e Fax Broadcast Purpose To specify whether to print a transmission report after every fax transmission to multiple destinations or only when an error occurs Values Print Always Prints a transmission report after every fax transmission to multiple destinations Print On Error Prints a transmission report only when an error occurs Print Disable Does not print a transmission report after a fax transmission to multiple destinations Factory default menu setting e Region Pur
92. 2008 R2 Graphics tab Windows 7 or Windows 7 x 64bit Image Quality Toner Saving Mode Image Enhancement Screen Image Settings Apply to All Elements Apply to Selected Element Brightness Contrast Tone Balance Restore Defaults Layout tab Image Orientation Multiple Up Image Order Image Border Booklet Poster Mixed Document Output Size Reduce Enlarge Margin Shift Margin Restore Defaults Printing Basics Operating System Driver Tab Printing Options Windows XP Watermarks Forms tab Windows XP x 64bit Windows Server 2003 Windows Server 2003 x 64bit Windows Vista Windows Vista x 64bit Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 x 64bit Windows Server 2008 R2 Watermarks New Text New Bitmap Edit Delete First Page Only Forms Off Create Register Forms Image Overlay Header Footer Options Restore Defaults Windows 7 or Windows 7 x 64bit Advanced tab Items Change All Colors to Black Resolution Show Paper Size Type Error Font Settings Restore Defaults Printing Basics 169 Selecting Options for an Individual Job Mac OS X To select print settings for a particular job change the driver settings before sending the job to the printer 1 4 Click Print to print the job With the document open in your application click File and then click Print Select your printer from Pr
93. 29 9 6 7 2kbps V 27ter 4 8 2 4kbps No of Fax Lines RJ 11 1 line PSTN PBX Leased line 3 4KHz 2 wire Specifications 37 Direct Fax Function Document Size A4 Letter Folio Legal Transmission Speed Same as the Fax function Transmission Resolution Same as the Fax function Applicable Lines Same as the Fax function Operating System Microsoft Windows XP Microsoft Windows Vista Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Microsoft Windows 7 Microsoft Windows XP x64 Microsoft Windows Server 2003 x64 Microsoft Windows Server 2008 x64 Microsoft Windows Vista x64 Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 x64 Microsoft Windows 7 x64 Mac OS X 10 4 11 10 5 8 10 6 10 7 IMPORTANT For the latest information about the supported operating systems refer to the Fuji Xerox Web Site 38 Specifications Basic Operation This chapter includes Main Components on page 40 Turning On the Printer on page 44 Setting Initial Settings on the Operator Panel on page 45 Printing the Panel Settings Page on page 46 Power Saver Mode on page 47 Basic Operation 39 Main Components This section provides an overview of your printer This section includes e Front View on page 40 e Rear View on page 41 e Automatic Document Feeder ADF on page 41 e Operator Panel on
94. 3 From front of printer 346 From paper tray 346 From Priority Sheet Inserter PSI 349 From rear of printer 351 Clock mode 248 Clock Settings 307 Coding method 37 Collated 191 317 Color 322 Company Name 276 301 Connecting printer 63 Connection specifications 63 Connection type 63 Connectivity 35 36 Conserving supplies 410 Consumables 404 Contacting service 388 Continuous copy 33 Continuous copy speed 33 Continuous print speed 34 Copy ID card 205 Limiting access 333 Copy button LED 42 Copy problem 371 Copy quality Problems 372 Custom paper 172 With Mac OS X driver 173 With Windows print driver 173 Customizing copy options 187 D Data LED 42 Delayed Start 327 Demo Page 283 Density Adjustment 311 Dialing Type 275 299 Dimensions 33 Index 419 Direct Fax 257 Discard Size 276 304 Display problems 358 Document cover 41 Document feeder tray 40 41 Document glass 41 395 Document guides 41 Document output tray 40 Document Size 194 318 323 Document size 38 Document stopper 40 Document Type 195 251 318 326 Draft Mode 289 DRPD Mode 275 DRPD Pattern 276 302 Duplex printing 28 161 E ECM 276 304 Edit From Field 316 Electrical safety 16 Energy Saver button LED 42 Envelope 310 311 Error and warning messages 389 Error History 283 Error LED 42 Ethernet 292 Ethernet port 41 63 Express Scan Manager 57 Extel Hook Thresh 276 304 F F W Version 310 Fault Time Out 307 Fax
95. 4 Source A5 100 122 141 B5 81 100 115 A4 70 86 100 The methods to load print media vary depending on the size and orientation of the print media For more information refer to Loading Print Media in the Paper Tray on page 144 or Loading Print Media in the Priority Sheet Inserter PSI on page 152 For print media that can be loaded refer to Usable Print Media on page 137 5 If necessary customize other copy options including the number of copies and image quality See also e Customizing Copy Options on page 187 6 Press the amp Start button to begin copying Copying 193 E Document Size You can specify the default document size 1 Load a document s face up on the Automatic Document Feeder ADF with the top edge going in first or place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover See also e Making Copies From the Automatic Document Feeder ADF on page 186 e Making Copies From the Document Glass on page 184 Press the amp Copy button Select Document Size and then press the ox button Select the desired setting and then press the ox button A4 210x297mm A5 148x210mm B5 182x257mm Letter 8 5x11 Folio 8 5x13 Legal 8 5x14 Executive Factory default menu setting If necessary customize other copy options including the number of copies and image quality See also e
96. 5 z Location Contact Person Status Ready to print Refresh FUJI Xerox 6 Configure wireless network settings for the printer on the CentreWare Internet Services 7 Reboot the printer 8 Restore the wireless network settings on your computer NOTE e Ifthe operating system on your computer provides a wireless configuration software use it to change the wireless network settings See the instructions below For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 Select Network Connections from Control Panel Right click Wireless Network Connection and select Properties Select the Wireless Networks tab a0 7 Ensure that the check box for Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings is selected Click Advanced You can either set the printer to the ad hoc mode or the infrastructure mode p For Ad hoc mode Select Computer to computer ad hoc networks only and close the dialog box For Infrastructure mode Select Access point Infrastructure networks only and close the dialog box g Click Add to display Wireless network properties h Enter the setting that you will send to the printer and click OK i Click Move up to move the setting to the top of the list j Click OK to close the Wireless Network Connection Properties dialog box 98 Printer Connection and Software Installation For Windows Vista gt ono2lno0 3 Display Control Panel Select Network and Internet Select Network and Sha
97. 87 6 Press the lt gt Start button to begin copying Copying 191 E Reduce Enlarge You can reduce or enlarge the size of a copied image from 25 to 400 NOTE e When you make a reduced copy black lines may appear at the bottom of your copy This item is 1 Loadad available only when N Up is set to Of f or Manual ocument s face up on the Automatic Document Feeder ADF with the top edge going in first or place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover See also e Making Copies From the Automatic Document Feeder ADF on page 186 e Making Copies From the Document Glass on page 184 2 Press the 3 Copy button Select Reduce Enlarge and then press the 0x button 4 Select the desired settings and then press the ox button e mm system 200 A5 gt A4 141 A5 gt B5 122 100 B5 gt A5 813 A4 gt A5 70 50 Factory default menu setting e inch system 200 Stmt gt Lgl 1543 Stmt gt Ltr 129 100 Lgl gt Ltr 78 dgr gt Ltr 64 50 Factory default menu setting 192 Copying NOTE You can also use the numeric keypad to input the desired zoom ratio from 25 to 400 or press the or the lt 4 button to enlarge or reduce the zoom ratio by1 See the following table for specific zoom ratios Copy A5 B5 A
98. Action The printed result has ghosting The print media surface may be uneven Try changing the Paper Type setting in the print driver For example change Plain to Lightweight Cardstock 1 On the Paper Output tab for Printing Preferences of the print driver change the Paper Type setting Adjust the transfer bias 1 Launch the Printer Setting Utility click Adjust BTR on the Printer Maintenance tab 2 Adjust the setting for the type of print media being used 3 Click the Apply New Settings button Adjust the temperature of the fusing unit 1 Launch the Printer Setting Utility and click Adjust Fusing Unit on the Printer Maintenance tab 2 Adjust the fixing temperature by turning up the value for your printing media 3 Click the Apply New Settings button If you use non recommended print media use the print media recommended for the printer NOTE Ifthe problem continues even though you have taken suggested actions described above contact our local representative office or authorized dealer 366 Troubleshooting E Fog ABC DEF Problem Action The printed result is foggy When the whole is printed light contact our local representative office or authorized dealer When the printed page is partly light start Clean Developer 1 Launch the Printer Setting Utility and click Clean Developer on the Diagnosis tab 2 Click the Start button NOTE Ifthe problem continues
99. Add The Add New Printer Configuration dialog box appears b Click Connection Wizard The Connection Wizard dialog box appears c Select Line Printer Daemon LPD Protocol from Access Network Printer or Printserver Box via d Enter the IP address of the printer in IP Address or Host Name e Select Fuji Xerox in Select the printer manufacturer f Click OK The Add New Printer Configuration dialog box appears g Select FX DocuPrint M255 x vx x FujiXerox FX DocuPrint M255 x ppd gz from the Assign Driver list NOTE e You can specify the printer name in Set Name For a USB printer connected to a computer running the SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 11 a Click Add The Add New Printer Configuration dialog box appears The printer name is displayed in the Determine Connection list b Select FX DocuPrint M255 x vx x FujiXerox FX DocuPrint M255 x ppd gz from the Assign Driver list NOTE You can specify the printer name in Set Name 5 Confirm the settings and then click OK Printer Connection and Software Installation 123 e For Ubuntu 10 x86 a OO N 124 Open the URL http localhost 631 using a web browser Click Administration Click Add Printer Enter the User Name and the Password and then click OK Select either of the following according to the type of your printer connection For a network printer a Select FUJI XEROX DocuPrint M255 X XX XX XX Fuji Xerox FUJI XEROX DocuPrint M255 X from
100. D Pattern on page 302 To receive faxes in the DRPD Mode you need to place the printer in the DRPD Mode and select a DRPD pattern For details on placing the computer in the DRPD Mode see Ans Select on page 298 To set up DRPD you will need another telephone line at your location or have someone dial your fax number from outside To select a DRPD pattern Press the Til System button Select Admin Menu and then press the on button Select Fax Settings and then press the or button Select DRPD Pattern and then press the ox button Select an appropriate DRPD pattern and then press the 0x button O a fF QQ N Reboot the printer by turning the power switch off and then on E Receiving Faxes in the Memory Since your printer is a multi tasking device it can receive faxes while you are making copies or printing When the printer receives a fax while you are copying printing or run out of paper or toner it stores incoming faxes in the memory Then as soon as you finish copying printing or replace the toner cartridge the printer automatically prints the faxes E Polling Receive You can poll and receive faxes from a remote fax machine anytime 1 Press the E Fax button 2 Select Polling Receive and then press the ox button 3 Select on and then press the 0X button 4 Enter the fax number of the remote fax machine and then press the ox button NOTE e For details on how to enter the fax number of the
101. Darken on page 252 Select a fax number in one of the following ways e Select Fax to and then press the ox button Select Keypad and then press the ox button Enter the fax number of the remote fax machine using the numeric keypad and then press the 0x button e Press the one touch button and then press the 0x button e Press the Ol Address Book button select All Entries Group Dial or Search using the w button and then press the OK button All Entries Displays a list of registered fax numbers Press the gt button to select the recipients and then press the 9 button Group Dial Press the button to select the recipients and then press the 0x button Search Enter the text you want to search a fax number in the Address Book and then press the or button Press the P gt button to select the recipients and then press the OK button Press the 1 Redial Pause button to redial and then press the 0X button e Press the Speed Dial button Enter the speed dial number between 01 and 99 using the numeric keypad and then press the OK button NOTE Before you use the one touch button you need to register a number for any speed dial from 01 to 08 For details on how to store the number see Storing a Fax Number for Speed Dialing on page 265 Press the O Start button to scan and store the document in the memory When you are using the document glass the LCD
102. DocuPrint M255 df M255 z User Guide FUJI Xerox Contents PYOTACC sis tee leds cio atmecansesis ee aie een E ata asad 9 Trademarks and Document Disclaimer ces ccseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteneeeeeees 10 PADOUL EICCMSC ras tie aac a a a sna eth on a tiers ddan a a elas hab 11 EYPES Ol Manuals Scientia nse ete a a ie e mi dee ates E eh ad ms oe eg 12 Using THiS GUIDG sass eects et sk acct eats ces eee eked eed de ete etc ces ee ees 13 Organizations enei neo oie eine eel ere 13 01AT A LiLo AKEPA AETA ELE E E A E EAS 14 Safety INOLSS ses ted ca assacecteee eta a e aad ale was es e aE R EA 15 Electrical StU niedi a aoc ee eee cle bdo ae 16 Machine Installationietarc2 nha heal the elle leh ables A 18 Operational Salely stot cel ee od ee nd ee et incall ne ee tees 21 Consumable tihs reeter a Ee E sense pena E Ea E EE ee 23 Warning and Caution Labels ccccceeceee eneee eeeeeeeenceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeees 24 ALKOT OLID E D E E E A ASEE E EE E E A E E ee 25 Regulat M ee eara des ce aea a a ia oe ed a at ae cl a aeaa EE elle eee 26 Radio Frequency Emissions Class B ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteteaeeeeeeees 26 Product Safety Certification UL CB ccceeceeceeee cette eee eeeeeenttntetttnaeeeeeees 26 Illegal Copies and Printouts 2 226 sosaccec ents eee ine hte de ae cei Ade ie 27 Product FO AUN Ss inaano a dhe de nc dine Dee ieee ace seta a 28 1 SPECIICAIONS aww e tance naan
103. EF JO Ju 1 2 GHI JKL MNO 4 5 6 PORS TUV WXYZ E Entering Characters When prompted to enter a letter press the appropriate button until the correct letter appears on the LCD panel For example to enter the letter O press 6 e Each time you press 6 the display shows a different letter m n o M N O and finally 6 To enter additional letters repeat the first step e Press the 0x button when you are finished Key Assigned numbers letters or characters 1 _ space amp 5 27 lt gt abcABC2 defDEF 3 ghiGHI4 jkILJKL5 mnoMNO6 pqrsPQRS 7 tuvTUV8 wxyzWwxYZg 0 space amp OO oo N OD a BR WwW MYM gt FE E Changing Numbers or Names If an incorrect number or name is entered press the C Clear button to clear the number or character Then enter the correct number or character Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad 337 338 Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad Troubleshooting This chapter includes e e e Clearing Jams on page 340 Basic Printer Problems on page 357 Display Problems on page 358 Printing Problems on page 359 Print Quality Problems on page 361 Copy Problem on page 371 Copy Quality Problems on page 372 Fax Problems on page 373 Scanning Problems on page 375 Scan Driver Printer Utility Problems on page 377 Other Problems on page 378 Under
104. FAX Mode 263 Receiving a Fax Manually Using an External Telephone 263 Receiving Faxes in the DRPD Mode eeeeeeeeeeeteteeeeeees 264 Receiving Faxes in the Memory ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeennettaeeeeeees 264 Polling Rece enini a al nal iets DEE 264 Automatic Dialing y ccsccscccstects tac ob ace te cans ech cceideceteatdstadentedudassaetieesus teanagebienene 265 Speed DialinG acces ccs ceeethiniele eset occa heel ede eld 265 Storing a Fax Number for Speed Dialing eeeeeeeeeeeeee 265 Sending a Fax Using Speed Dialing cccceceeeeeeee ere 266 Group Dialing octe eneee er lt eecenetentem el cet eGo ies E EE E se 266 Creating Group Dial Numbers eeeeeeeeeessesssssrerrrrrrrrrrrrrreeenee 267 Editing Group Dial NUMBGIS23 22 nea en eee elk need 268 Sending a Fax Using Group Dialing Multi address Transmission ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 269 Printing the Address Book List 2 eseeeseeeeeteeeeeecceeneeeeeeeeeees 269 Other Ways to Rak ocean iiinn ted eas ce ca eee ee Sah 2 270 Using the Secure Receiving Mode eeeeeeeeeeeetetttteeeeeees 270 Using an Answering Machine ccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenetteaeeeeeees 271 Using a Computer Modem 2 cccccccccccecctseseseseescecceeeceneccneceeeeeeees 272 Setting OOUM OS aces 225 e oae scat cane dee et Eede e 273 speaker Vol UMe s cc2ssceectdt ced Rd a e a e aae 273 Ringer VolUMe n
105. Fine 203dpi mode is effective only when the remote tax machine supports the super fine resolution See the notes below SuperFine 406dpi Suitable for documents containing photographic images Factory default menu setting NOTE e Faxes scanned in the SuperFine 203dpi mode are received at the highest resolution of the remote machine e Document Type Purpose To specify the default document type Values Text Suitable for documents with text Photo Suitable for documents with photos Factory default menu setting e Lighten Darken Purpose To specify the default fax density level Values Lighten2 Makes the fax lighter than the source document Works well with dark Lightenl print Normal Works well with standard typewritten or printed documents Darkenl Makes the fax darker than the source document Works well with light Darken2 print or faint pencil markings Factory default menu setting 326 Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad e Delayed Start Purpose This feature enables you to set a specific time for the fax transmission to start Once Delayed Start mode is activated your printer stores all of the documents to be faxed into its memory and sends them at the specified time After faxing in the Delayed Start mode is complete the data in the memory is cleared Values 21 00 PM 9 00 Specify the fax transmission start time when sending a fax at a 0 00 23 59
106. I on page 152 e Loading Envelopes in the Paper Tray on page 148 Loading Envelopes in the Priority Sheet Inserter PSI on page 155 Printing on print media that differs from the paper size or paper type selected on the print driver may lead to paper jams To ensure that printing is correctly done select the correct paper size and paper type 138 Printing Basics E Standard Paper and Tested Paper The following paper and media are standard or usable for the printer When you print a generally used paper which called general paper please use a paper that suits the standard To print clearly we recommend the standard paper shown in the following table For information about the other paper and media contact Fuji Xerox Customer Support Center Paper Name Size Weight Paper Type Notes Standard FXP A4 64 gsm Recycled Medium thickness paper Paper for in house documents and general office use XC Premier 80 A4 80 gsm Plain Colotech 90 A4 90 gsm Plain Business 4200 Letter 20 Ib Plain Supported Business 4200 Legal 20 Ib Plain Paper Cascade X 9000 Folio Plain Cascade X 9000 Letter Plain Hammermill Tidal MP Letter Plain Hammermill Fore MP Legal 24 Ib Plain Business 4200 Letter Plain Hammermill Laser Letter Plain Print Color Xpressions Letter Plain Select GP Laser1000 Executive Plain Color Xpressions Elite Letter 28
107. IMPORTANT To prevent electric shock always turn off the printer and disconnect the power cord from the grounded outlet before performing maintenance To avoid burns do not clear paper jams immediately after printing The fusing unit becomes extremely hot during use NOTE To resolve the error displayed on the LCD panel you must clear all print media from the print media path 1 Push the rear cover handle and open the rear cover 346 Troubleshooting Pull the paper tray out of the printer carefully Hold the tray with both hands lift the front slightly and remove it from the printer Troubleshooting 347 7 Close the rear cover 348 Troubleshooting Clearing Paper Jams From the Priority Sheet Inserter PSI IMPORTANT Do not put excessive force on the front cover when removing the jammed paper Doing so could damage the cover To prevent electric shock always turn off the printer and disconnect the power cord from the grounded outlet before performing maintenance e To avoid burns do not clear paper jams immediately after printing The fusing unit becomes extremely hot during use NOTE To resolve the error displayed on the LCD panel you must clear all print media from the print media path 1 Push the rear cover handle and open the rear cover Troubleshooting 349 3 Pull the jammed paper out carefully to avoid tearing it A 4 Lower the levers to the
108. IMaQeS ceeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeentetetaeeeeeees 364 The Entire Output Is Blank cccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeseeesseeeeeeeeeeees 364 Streaks Appear on the Output cccccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesneeeeees 365 Motte aei att a Ceeuee a dent cacvesadececoedt ester Faces 365 Ghosting ccm iiiGnnandaae eee nee 366 PO etait a sy ah a hee te shot lent len at asses 367 Bead Carry Out BCO oo ceccccceeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeteteeeeeeeeaaaaaaeeeeeees 367 Auger Mark sot no occ lie eai ea eda ee eai aae 368 Wrinkled Stained Paper sic sis 2cciesdarivecnsacvetteati cident etbnctseascesesavess 369 The Top Margin Is Incorrect cseeceneeeeeeee rere teneeenenecceeecee 370 Protrudent Bumpy Paper scavecasasarssenassenccceastnsteses AG diavasasanalehachasenesd 370 COPY Problema nee ach ue de techs za e ck tah Sade Ses steer a e E Maat Sud a 371 Copy Quality Problems 2 20s2 2Ascsatadin teed nine bas 372 Fax ProDlenis 26 ces a See fe cece s cent decechs cebicastaahsac aAa Aaa e EA DESEE Sted etek 373 Contents 7 11 12 SCANMING PRODIGIMS naina dirs wentas Sng a a vale int laced nae ded aes aoe 375 Scan Driver Printer Utility Problems cece ceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeea 377 Other ProplemSs cs cseus tine eit Re ieee a ace ee 378 Understanding Printer Messages cccccccccceeceseeeeeeesseeeseeesseeeeeeeeeeeeees 379 Contacting SGIVICE seson ee reenter cin e e E aad 388
109. KKK XK Enter a password of up to 32 alphanumeric characters for printing KERR ERK secure PDF files E Tray Settings Use the Tray Settings option to set the paper size and type of paper loaded in the paper tray Paper Tray Purpose To specify the paper loaded in the paper tray 328 Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad Values Paper Size A4 210x297mm A5 148x210mm B5 182x257mm Letter 8 5x11 Folio 8 5x13 Legal 8 5x14 Executive Statement 10Env 4 125x9 5 onarch Env onarch Env L DL Env 110x220mm DL Env L C5 Env 162x229mm Postcard JPN 148x100mm W Postcard JPN 148x200mm Env Yougata 2 Env Yougata 2L Env Yougata Env Yougata Env Yougata 2 3 Env Yougata 4 6 3 Env Younaga Env Nagagata 3 Env Nagagata 4 Env Kakugata 3 New Custom Portrait Y Size 297mm 11 7 inch 127mm 355mm 5 0in ch 14 0inch Specifies the length of the custom size paper Which factory default menu setting displays depends on the value selected formm inch under the System Settings menu See mm inch on page 309 for more information Landscape X 210mm 8 3i nch 77mm 215mm 3 0in Chi 8 5inch Specifies the width of the custom size paper Which factory default menu setting displays depends on the value selected for mm inch und
110. L FAX Mode or Ans FAX Mode on page 263 Receiving a Fax Manually Using an External Telephone on page 263 Receiving Faxes in the DRPD Mode on page 264 Receiving Faxes in the Memory on page 264 e Polling Receive on page 264 E About Receiving Modes There are five receiving modes FAX Mode TEL Mode TEL FAX Mode Ans FAX Mode and DRPD Mode NOTE To use TEL FAX Mode or Ans FAX Mode connect an external telephone or answering machine to the phone connector Y on the rear of your printer When the memory is full you cannot receive a fax Delete any documents you no longer need from the memory See also e Receiving a Fax Automatically in the FAX Mode on page 263 e Receiving a Fax Manually in the TEL Mode on page 263 e Receiving a Fax Automatically in the TEL FAX Mode or Ans FAX Mode on page 263 e Using an Answering Machine on page 271 e Receiving Faxes in the DRPD Mode on page 264 E Loading Paper for Receiving Faxes The instructions for loading paper in the paper tray or the Priority Sheet Inserter PSI are the same whether you are printing faxing or copying except that faxes can only be printed on Letter sized A4 sized or Legal sized paper See also e Loading Print Media in the Paper Tray on page 144 e Loading Print Media in the Priority Sheet Inserter PSI on page 152 Setting Paper Sizes and Types on page 158 262 Faxing E Receiving a Fax Automatically in the FAX Mode Yo
111. Limiting access 333 Fax Activity 276 284 305 Fax Broadcast 276 305 Fax button LED 42 Fax Cover Page 276 301 Fax Fwd E Mail 276 303 Fax Fwd Number 276 303 FAX Mode 275 Fax Number 276 Fax problems 373 Fax Transmit 276 File Format 322 Film 395 First copy output time 32 Font 287 Font Pitch 288 Font Size 288 Form Line 289 420 Index Forward Settings 276 303 Front cover 40 342 G Getting help 389 SimpleMonitor alerts 389 Gray Balance 319 Group Dial 284 Group dialing 266 Halftone 32 HDD 32 l Image Compression 325 Image Enhance 289 Initialize NVM 297 312 Installing print driver Linux 120 Mac OS X 114 Windows 73 Interval Timer 275 300 IP Filter 296 J Job History 283 Job Status button LED 42 Job Time Out 307 Junk Fax Filter 275 300 L Labels 310 311 Launcher 54 Layout 292 327 LCD panel 42 LCD panel messages 389 Levers 41 License 11 Light Card 310 311 Lighten Darken 196 252 319 323 326 Line Monitor 275 299 Line Termination 290 Line Type 275 299 Loading envelopes Paper tray 148 Priority Sheet Inserter PSI 155 Loading print media 143 Paper tray 144 Priority Sheet Inserter PSI 152 Low Toner Alert Msg 309 LPD 296 M Machine installation 18 Machine life 312 Machine weight 33 Main components 40 Maintenance 310 Manual duplex printing 162 Manuals 12 Margin Left Right 203 320 324 Margin Middle 204 321 325 Margin Top Bottom 202 320 324 Max E Mail Size 325 Memory 32 Me
112. Load Paper If any error is displayed on the operator panel click the following link H Configure Printer Trouble Shooting Guide 6 D Return Previous 2 Start Installation L d Confirm there are no errors displayed on the LCD panel and then click Start Installation If you see any errors click Trouble Shooting Guide and follow the instruction If you agree to the terms of the License Agreement click accept the terms of the license agreement to continue the installation process and then click Next Check if the printer to be installed is listed in the Select Printer screen and then click Next NOTE Ifthe printer to be installed is not listed in the Select Printer screen try either of the following steps Click Refresh to update the information Click Add Printer and then enter the details of the printer manually Configure the required items on the Enter Printer Settings screen and then click Next Select the software to be installed and then click Install Click Finish to exit this tool The wireless configuration is complete When the CentreWare Internet Services operation is successful and the printer is rebooted wireless LAN 94 connection is completed Printer Connection and Software Installation Setting Up a New Wireless Network Environment for Your Computer When You Need to Set Up Your Wireless Connectivity With Your Computer e For DHCP Networks 1 Setting up
113. Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc in the United States and or other countries PCL is a trademark of Hewlett Packard Corporation in the United States and or other countries Microsoft Windows Vista Windows and Windows Server are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds Novell is a registered trademark and SUSE is a trademark of Novell Inc in the United States and other countries Red Hat and Red Hat Enterprise Linux are registered trademarks of Red Hat Inc in the U S and other countries RSA BSAFE are either registered trademarks or trademarks of EMC Corporation in the United States and or other countries Mozilla is a registered trademark of the Mozilla Foundation All product brand names are trademarks or registered trademarks of the respective holders In this manual safety instructions are preceded by the symbol A Always read and follow the instructions before performing the required procedures Fuji Xerox is not responsible for any breakdown of machines due to infection of computer virus or computer hacking WARNING This equipment will be inoperable when mains power fails IMPORTANT 1 This manual is copyrighted with all rights reserved Under the copyright laws this manual may not be copied or modified in whole or part without the written consent of the publisher 2 Parts of this manual are subject to change
114. N connection is completed Printer Connection and Software Installation 91 e WPS PBC NOTE WPS PBC Wi Fi Protected Setup Push Button Configuration is a method to authenticate and register devices required for wireless configuration by pressing the button provided on the access point via wireless routers and then performing WPS PBC setting on the operator panel This setting is available only when the access point supports WPS 1 Select WPS PBC and then click Next 2 Follow the on screen instructions until the Check Setup screen appears Macromedia Flash Player 8 bala e Easy Install Navi gt A D 1 Remove packaging material You have completed preparing the printer s hardware Set Toner Cartridge Press the Start Installation button on the lower right A to go to the software installation procedure 3 Connect and Power ON 4 Load Paper If any error is displayed on the operator panel click the following link H Configure Printer Trouble Shooting Guide 6 ais Return KA Previous Start Installation L d Confirm there are no errors displayed on the LCD panel and then click Start Installation If you see any errors click Trouble Shooting Guide and follow the instruction If you agree to the terms of the License Agreement click accept the terms of the license agreement to continue the installation process and then click Next Check if the printer to be installed is list
115. NT e Be sure to use one of the supported encryption methods to protect your network traffic Enter the WEP key and then press the button Use the numeric keypad to enter the desired value and press the lt or gt button to move a cursor Select a transmit key from WEP Key 1 WEP Key 2 WEP Key 3 and WEP Key 4 Wait a few minutes until the printer restarts to establish the wireless network Print a System Settings page from the operator panel a Press the i System button b Select Report List and then press the button c Select System Settings and then press the button The System Settings page is printed Confirm that Link Quality is shown as Good Acceptable or Low on the report NOTE e When Link Quality is No Reception check if the wireless settings are correctly configured If the wireless setting does not work contact your system administrator or Fuji Xerox Customer Support Center Printer Connection and Software Installation 117 Auto Setup With the Access Point If the access point such as a wireless router supports the WPS security settings can be made automatically e WPS PBC NOTE WPS PBC is a method to authenticate and register devices required for wireless configuration by pressing the button provided on the access point via wireless routers and then performing WPS PBC setting on the operator panel This setting is available only when the access point supports W
116. Network Path Not Shared Advanced Sharing Set custom pemissions create multiple shares and set other advanced sharing options Advanced Sharing Password Protection People must have a user account and password for this computer to access shared folders To change this setting use the Network and Sharing Center OK Cancel Apply 4 Select the Share this folder check box Enter a shared name in the Share name box NOTE Note down the shared name as you need to use this name in the next setting procedure E nl Advanced Sharing x V Share this folder Settings Share name MyShare Add Remove Limit the number of simultaneous users to 20 mn Comments Permissions Caching oc cancel Apel Scanning 225 11 12 226 Click Permissions to give write permission for this folder Click Add Search user login name by clicking Advanced or enter the user login name in the Enter the object names to select box and click Check Names to confirm Example of user login name MySelf NOTE Do not use Everyone as the user login name Ee 4 Select Users or Groups EN ia ex Select this object type Users Groups or Builtin security principals Object Types From this location wist Locations Enter the object names to select examples Click OK Click the user login
117. PS On the operator panel press the i System button Select Admin Menu and then press the button Select Network and then press the button Select WPS Setup and then press the button Select Push Button Control and then press the button Select yes and then press the button Press and hold the WPS button on the access point Wait a few minutes until the printer restarts to establish the wireless network O ON OO a FPF WO N Print a System Settings page from the operator panel a Press the Yi System button b Select Report List and then press the button c Select System Settings and then press the button The System Settings page is printed 10 Confirm that Link Quality is shown as Good Acceptable or Low on the report NOTE e When Link Quality is No Reception check if the wireless settings are correctly configured e If the wireless setting does not work contact your system administrator or Fuji Xerox Customer Support Center 118 Printer Connection and Software Installation e WPS PIN NOTE o oOo N Oo a FPF WS N _ 12 WPS PIN is a method to authenticate and register devices required for wireless configuration by entering PIN code to a printer and computer This setting performed through access point is available only when the access points of your wireless router supports WPS Before WPS PIN starts you will need to enter your PIN code at
118. PS Push Button Configuration PBC Personal Identification Number PIN WPS2 0 supported You can select a method to configure wireless network settings from the following Wizard Setup Through USB Connection Advanced Setup Through Ethernet connection Operator Panel CentreWare Internet Services WPS PIN WPS PBC 2 1 WPS PIN Wi Fi Protected Setup Personal Identification Number is a method to authenticate and register devices required for wireless configuration by entering PIN code in the printer and computer This setting performed through access point is available only when the access points of your wireless router supports WPS 2 WPS PBC Wi Fi Protected Setup Push Button Configuration is a method to authenticate and register devices required for wireless configuration by pressing the button provided on the access point via wireless routers and then performing WPS PBC setting on the operator panel This setting is available only when the access point supports WPS This section includes e Using Wizard Setup to Configure Wireless Network Settings on page 78 e Using Advanced Setup to Configure Wireless Network Settings on page 84 e Setting Up a New Wireless Network Environment for Your Computer When You Need to Set Up Your Wireless Connectivity With Your Computer on page 95 Printer Connection and Software Installation 77 Using Wizard Setup to Configure Wireless Network Settings
119. Printer Software for Asia Pacific gt your printer Printer Setting Utility NOTE e The window to select a printer appears in this step when multiple print drivers are installed on your computer In this case click the name of the desired printer listed in Printer Name The Printer Setting Utility starts 2 Click the Printer Settings Report tab 3 Select TCP IP Settings from the list on the left side of the page The TCP IP Settings page is displayed If the IP address shows 0 0 0 0 the factory default or 169 254 xx xx an IP address has not been assigned To assign one for your printer see Assigning an IP Address for IPv4 Mode on page 69 74 Printer Connection and Software Installation Disabling the Firewall Before Installing Printer Drivers If you are running one of the following operating systems you must disable the firewall before installing print drivers e Windows 7 lt Windows Vista lt Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows Server 2008 e Windows XP The following procedure uses Windows 7 as an example 1 Click Start Help and Support NOTE For Windows Vista Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7 operating systems if you use Online Help switch to Offline Help on Windows Help and Support window 2 In the Search Help box enter firewall and then press the Enter key In the list click Turn Windows Firewall on or off and then follow the instructions on the screen Enable t
120. SIZG Lacan ane Aen a Raa 194 Document Type snccescccucececsacectcac cect tecueetiel aiccasieel tect eee 195 Lighten Darken 5 2525 5c noe pote lee ease eaec aplasia rererere 196 Sharpe SS en cscs esses rede eee le aie E ieee Stes 197 Contents Auto EXDOSUDG aii tile atoaeiibh dete a ae 198 DASIOOG lt i t Set Shee the ae Sete Rd ts Aa Se tence cael A dae dae ee 199 MEU Bisset atthe bia aye Poor antes nie eae oO a eid 200 Margin TOI BOWO caei couse devon eee tse ec eed darkened 202 Margin Lett RIOR oresar eneee ies 203 Margin Middle siscscsciec feb ieetca Accept eee eae ce sae ete 204 Copying an ID Card cscs pecs ie acorlar edn Baivewk beats ecdiuewenteoda tau ccegsises esto ses eaten buted 205 Changing the Default Copy Settings 2 c cccceeeneceeeeeeeeeeeeeseseesseceeeees 206 SS COIAIING eh Macc Ce oe ices ANA tS facta alia 207 SCANNING QVCIVIOW dat cel hth ad or taal ed eid Sede eee ke a Eae 208 Scanning to a USB Connected Computer ceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeneeeeees 209 Using the Operator Panel cceccccdeceeeeeeeedeeeeeneeceeccecueecneeenenenee 209 Using the TWAIN DIVER isien aieeaii riendanta iran 210 Using the WIA Driver 22 2 cccccccsecteeseteseeesnensceccecccceccenenecseeeetene 212 Using a Scanner on the Network ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 213 OV SI VICW asc he eel acs aia tele Marder or eae hci eet 214 Confirming the Login name and the Password 0e
121. Safety A WARNING The operator s product maintenance procedures are described in the customer documentation supplied with this product Do not carry out any other maintenance procedures not described in the documentation This product features safety design not to allow operators access to hazard areas The hazard areas are isolated from operators by covers or protectors which require a tool to remove To prevent electric shock and injuries never remove those covers and protectors S To avoid the risk of electric shock and a fire accident switch off and unplug the product promptly in the following conditions then contact your local Fuji Xerox representative The product emits smoke or its surface is unusually hot The product emits unusual noise or odor The power cord is cracked or worn down A circuit breaker fuse or any other safety device becomes activated e Any liquid is spilled into the product e The product is soaked in water Any part of the product is damaged Do not insert any object into slots or openings of this product Do not put any of the followings on the product e Liquid container such as flower vases or coffee cups e Metal parts such as staples or clips e Heavy objects If liquid is spilled over or metal parts are slipped into the product it may cause electric shock or a fire accident Do not use conductive paper such as origami paper carbonic paper or conducti
122. Saving Mode check box is not selected Ifthe problem continues even though you have taken suggested actions described above contact our local representative office or authorized dealer 362 Troubleshooting E Toner Smears or Print Comes Off Stain on Back Side ABC DEF Problem Action Toner smears or print comes off The output has stain on the back side The print media surface may be uneven Try changing the Paper Type setting in the print driver For example change Plain to Lightweight Cardstock 1 On the Paper Output tab for Printing Preferences of the print driver change the Paper Type setting Verify that the correct print media is being used If not use the print media recommended for the printer See also e Usable Print Media on page 137 Adjust the temperature of the fusing unit 1 Launch the Printer Setting Utility and click Adjust Fusing Unit on the Printer Maintenance tab 2 Adjust the fixing temperature by turning up the value for your printing media 3 Click the Apply New Settings button NOTE Ifthe problem continues even though you have taken suggested actions described above contact our local representative office or authorized dealer Troubleshooting 363 E Random Spots Blurred Images ABC DEF e Problem Action The printed result has random Ensure that the toner cartridge is installed correctly spot
123. Sets the current time Date Format yy mm dd Sets the date format mm dd yy dd mm yy Time Format 12H Sets the time format 24H Time Zone Sets the time zone Factory default menu setting Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad 307 e Alert Tone Purpose To configure settings for tones emitted by the printer during operation or when a warning message appears Values Panel Select off Does not emit a tone when the operator panel input is correct pone Min Emits a tone at the specified volume when the operator panel Middle input is correct Max Panel Alert GEES Does not emit a tone when the operator panel input is Tone incorrect in Emits a tone at the specified volume when the operator panel iddle input is incorrect ax Auto Clear off Does not emit a tone before the printer performs auto clear Alert in Emits a tone at the specified volume five seconds before the iddle printer performs auto clear ax Job Tone off Does not emit a tone when a job is complete in Emits a tone at the specified volume when a job is complete iddle ax Alert Tone Off Does not emit a tone when a problem occurs in Emits a tone at the specified volume when a problem occurs iddle ax Out of Paper Off Does not emit a tone when the printer runs out of paper in Emits a tone at the specified volume when the printer runs out iddle of paper ax All T
124. Status Window Properties To change the pop up settings for the Printer Status window 1 Right click the SimpleMonitor printer icon on the taskbar at the bottom right of the screen 2 Select Printer Status Window Properties The Printer Status Window Properties window appears 3 Select the type of the pop up and then click OK You can also check the toner level of your printer when a genuine toner cartridge is installed and the job information on the Printer Status window The SimpleMonitor is installed along with print drivers Printer Management Software 53 Launcher Windows Only Using the Launcher Btype window you can open the Status Window Printer Setting Utility Troubleshooting Address Book Editor and Express Scan Manager To use the Launcher select to install the Launcher when you install print drivers The following procedure uses Windows 7 as an example To start the Launcher 1 Click Start All Programs gt Fuji Xerox Fuji Xerox Printer Software for Asia Pacific gt your printer Launcher The Launcher Btype window appears s 5 Launcher Btype FX DocuPrint M255 df z lt an mm Status Window Printer Setting Utility Troubleshooting Settings Address Book Editor Express Scan Manager Settings d 2 The Launcher Btype window provides several buttons Status Window Printer Setting Utility Troubleshooting Address Book Editor and Expre
125. The following procedure uses Microsoft Windows 7 as an example NOTE The reports and lists are all printed in English 1 Click Start gt All Programs Fuji Xerox Fuji Xerox Printer Software for Asia Pacific gt your printer Printer Setting Utility NOTE The window to select a printer appears in this step when multiple print drivers are installed on your computer In this case click the name of the desired printer listed in Printer Name The Printer Setting Utility starts 2 Click the Prifnter Settings Report tab 3 Select Reports from the list at the left side of the page The Reports page is displayed 4 Click the Panel Settings button The Panel Settings page is printed 46 Basic Operation Power Saver Mode The printer has a power saving feature that reduces power consumption during periods of inactivity and operates in two modes Low Power and Sleep In Low Power mode only the LCD panel goes blank In Sleep mode all LEDs except for the Energy Saver LED on the operator panel go out and the LCD panel goes blank When the printer is in Sleep mode it consumes less power than in Low Power mode By default the printer enters Low Power mode in one minute of inactivity after completion of the last job and then enters Sleep mode in another six minutes of inactivity You can change these default settings in the following ranges Low Power mode 1 to 30 minutes Sleep mode 6 to 11 minutes See a
126. To enable WIA 1 Click Start Administrative Tools Services 2 Right click Windows Image Acquisition WIA and then click Properties to ensure that Startup type is set to Manual or Automatic 3 Click OK 4 Right click Windows Image Acquisition WIA and then click Start Cannot scan using TWAIN or WIA on a Windows Server 2008 or Windows Server 2008 R2 computer Install the Desktop Experience feature on the computer To install Desktop Experience 1 Click Start gt Administrative Tools gt Server Manager 2 Under Features Summary click Add Features 3 Select the Desktop Experience check box 4 If a window appears follow the on screen instructions 5 Click Next and then click Install 6 Restart the computer Troubleshooting Scan Driver Printer Utility Problems Problem Action Unable to retrieve the Address Book data from the printer on the Address Book Editor Ensure that your computer and the printer is properly connected with the USB cable or Ethernet cable Ensure that the printer is turned on Ensure that the print driver is installed on your computer The Address Book Editor retrieves the Address Book data via the print driver The TWAIN driver cannot connect to the printer Ensure that your computer and the printer is properly connected with the USB cable Check whether the printer is turned on If the printer is turned on reboot it by turning the power swi
127. USB connection you can Instruct print jobs from a computer e Scan and print an image into an application e Scan and print an image to a folder on the computer e Use the Address Book Editor to manage Address Book entries Ethernet When connected via Ethernet connection you can e Instruct print jobs from a computer on the network Scan and print an image to a computer on the network Scan and print an image to an FTP server e Scan to e mail e Use the CentreWare Internet Services to manage Address Book entries 64 Wireless DocuPrint M255 z only When connected via wireless connection you can Instruct print jobs from a computer on the network Scan and print an image to a computer on the network Scan and print an image to an FTP server e Scan to e mail e Use the CentreWare Internet Services to manage Address Book entries Printer Connection and Software Installation USB Connection If your printer is connected to a network instead of your computer skip this section and go to Network Connection on page 66 To connect the printer to a computer 1 Connect the smaller end of the supplied USB cable to the USB port on the rear of the printer and the other end to a USB port on the computer NOTE Do not connect the printer USB cable to the USB connector available on the keyboard Printer Connection and Software Installation 65 Network Connection To connect the printer to an Ether
128. Windows 7 64 bit Edition and Windows Server 2008 R2 nN O on A 112 Click Start Devices and Printers Click Add a printer to launch the Add Printer wizard Select Add a network wireless or Bluetooth printer If the printer is listed select the printer and click Next or select The printer that want isn t listed Click Select a shared printer by name and enter the path to the printer in the text box and then click Next r E Add Printer Find a printer by name or TCP IP address Browse for a printer Select a shared printer by name server printer Browse Example computern ne printername or http computername printers printername printer Add a printer using a TCP IP address or hostname Net Cancel i A For example lt server host name gt lt shared printer name gt The server host name is the name of the server computer that identifies it to the network The shared printer name is the name assigned during the server installation process If this is a new printer you may be prompted to install a print driver If no system driver is available you need to specify the path to the available drivers Confirm the printer name and then click Next Select whether to use your printer as the default printer If you want to verify installation click Print a test page Click Finish When a test page is printed successfully installation is complete Printer Conne
129. able For thin paper use the one that is 60 gsm or more For the envelope ensure that it is properly loaded in the paper tray as instructed in Loading Envelopes in the Paper Tray on page 148 If the envelope is deformed correct it or use another envelope If performing manual duplex 2 sided printing ensure that the print media is not curled Fan the print media If the print media is damp turn over the print media If the problem continues use print media that is not damp NOTE lt Ifthe problem continues even though you have taken suggested actions described above contact our local representative office or authorized dealer Multi feed Jam Problem Action Print media multiple feeds occur Remove the paper from the Priority Sheet Inserter PSI and then ensure that the paper is properly loaded in the paper tray If the print media is damp use print media that is not damp Fan the print media A document jam occurs in the ADF if scanning of multiple sheet document is cancelled while scanning is in progress Clear the jam See also e Clearing Paper Jams From the Automatic Document Feeder ADF on page 343 NOTE Ifthe problem continues even though you have taken suggested actions described above contact our local representative office or authorized dealer 356 Troubleshooting Basic Printer Problems Some printer problems can be easy to res
130. ace got Clean up the fusing unit protrudent bumpy 1 Load one sheet of paper in the paper tray and then print a solid image all over paper 2 Load the printed sheet with the print surface facing down and then print a blank sheet of paper NOTE If the problem continues even though you have taken suggested actions described above contact our local representative office or authorized dealer 370 Troubleshooting Copy Problem Problem Action A document loaded in the ADF Ensure that the ADF cover is firmly closed cannot be copied Troubleshooting 371 Copy Quality Problems Problem Action There are lines or streaks in copies made from the ADF There is debris on the ADF glass When scanning the paper from the ADF passes over the debris creating lines or streaks Clean the ADF glass with a lint free cloth See also e Cleaning the Scanner on page 395 There are spots in copies taken from the document glass There is debris on the document glass When scanning the debris creates a spot on the image Clean the document glass with a lint free cloth See also e Cleaning the Scanner on page 395 The reverse side of the original is showing on the copy On the Copy menu enable Auto Exposure For information on turning Auto Exposure on page 198 Exposure on and off see Auto Light colors are washed out or white on the copy On
131. ackage of CT201920 IMPORTANT The number of printable pages are applicable when A4 plain paper SEF D is used and printing is done continuously in the print ratio of 5 in image density Also it satisfies the public values on the basis of JIS X6931 ISO IEC 19752 These values are estimates and vary depending on conditions such as the content being printed paper size paper type the printer s operating environment initializing process done when you turn on or off the printer and adjustments to maintain print quality NOTE The printable number of pages for the starter toner cartridge shipped with the printer is approximately 1 000 pages on DocuPrint M255 z and 2 500 pages on DocuPrint M255 df Each toner cartridge includes installation instructions on the box E When to Order a Toner Cartridge The LCD panel displays a warning when the toner cartridge nears its replacement time Verify that you have a replacement at hand It is important to order a toner cartridge when the message first appears to avoid interruptions to your printing The LCD panel displays an error message when the toner cartridge must be replaced To order a toner cartridge contact our local representative office or authorized dealer IMPORTANT This printer is designed to provide the most stable performance and print quality when used with the recommended toner cartridge Not using the toner cartridge recommended for this printer degrades the perform
132. after the retry for the specified number of times it will be cancelled Retry sending the fax 034 718 Press the x button to clear the message If the error continues to appear after the retry 034 719 for the specified number of times it will be cancelled When retrying sending the fax lower Modem Speed 034 720 Press the x button to clear the message If the error continues to appear after the retry for the specified number of times it will be cancelled When retrying sending the fax try the following eLower Modem Speed eEnable ECM 034 721 Press the x button to clear the message If the error continues to appear after the retry 034 722 for the specified number of times it will be cancelled When retrying sending the fax lower Modem Speed 034 723 034 724 034 725 034 726 034 727 Press the x button to clear the message Check if the destination number is available If the error continues to appear after the retry for the specified number of times it will be cancelled Troubleshooting 383 384 Error Code What You Can Do 034 750 Press the x button to clear the message Check if the phone line is connected properly See also Connecting the Telephone Line on page 244 034 751 Press the x button to clear the message Check if the destination machine blocks your fax as the junk fax If it does ask the receiver to disable the setting 034 752 Press the bu
133. ager handles scan jobs sent from the printer to your computer via USB When scan jobs are sent from the printer to the computer the Express Scan Manager automatically manages the scan jobs Before scanning to your computer start the Express Scan Manager and specify the location to send scanned image files Click Open the image file to display scanned files saved in the specified destination after scanning The Express Scan Manager is installed along with your print driver It is available for Windows and Mac OS X NOTE When you separately install the Express Scan Manager from the Software Pack CD ROM you also need to install the scan driver from the Software Pack CD ROM See also Using the Operator Panel on page 209 Printer Management Software 57 User Setup Disk Creating Tool Windows Only You can use the User Setup Disk Creating Tool program in the MakeDisk folder within the Utilities folder and drivers in the respective folders of the Software Pack CD ROM to create a driver installation package A driver installation package can contain a group of print driver settings and other data for things such as e Print orientation and Multiple Up print document settings e Watermarks If you want to install the print driver with the same settings on multiple computers running on the same operating system create a setup disk in a floppy disk or in a server on the network Using the setup disk that you have created will reduc
134. akes the copy softer than the source document Softest Factory default menu setting If necessary customize other copy options including the number of copies copy size and image quality See also e Customizing Copy Options on page 187 Press the lt j Start button to begin copying Copying 197 E Auto Exposure You can suppress the background of the source document to enhance text on the copy 1 a fF WO N 198 Load a document s face up on the Automatic Document Feeder ADF with the top edge going in first or place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover See also e Making Copies From the Automatic Document Feeder ADF on page 186 e Making Copies From the Document Glass on page 184 Press the amp Copy button Select Auto Exposure and then press the 0x button Select On and then press the 0X button If necessary customize other copy options including the number of copies copy size and image quality See also e Customizing Copy Options on page 187 Press the lt j Start button to begin copying Copying E 2 Sided You can make duplex 2 sided copies with the specified binding position 1 Load a document s face up on the Automatic Document Feeder ADF with the top edge going in first or place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover See also e Making Copies From the Automatic Doc
135. all Navi gt A D Remove packaging material You have completed preparing the printers 1 hardware E set Toner cartridge Press the Start Installation button on the lower right to go to the software installation procedure E connect ang Power ON E Load Paper If any error is displayed on the operator panel click the following link H configure Printer Trouble Shooting Guide 6 check Setup 4B Retum Previous Start installation L d Confirm there are no errors displayed on the LCD panel and then click Start Installation If you see any errors click Trouble Shooting Guide and follow the instruction If you agree to the terms of the License Agreement click accept the terms of the license agreement to continue the installation process and then click Next Check if the printer to be installed is listed in the Select Printer screen and then click Next NOTE Ifthe printer to be installed is not listed in the Select Printer screen try either of the following steps Click Refresh to update the information Click Add Printer and then enter the details of the printer manually Configure the required items on the Enter Printer Settings screen and then click Next Select the software to be installed and then click Install Click Finish to exit this tool The wireless configuration is complete When the WPS PIN operation is successful and the printer is rebooted wireless LA
136. ance and printing quality of the printer You could also incur charges if the printer breaks down To receive customer support and achieve the optimum performance of the printer be sure to use the recommended toner cartridge 404 Maintenance E Recycling Supplies e For environmental protection and efficient use of resources Fuji Xerox reuses returned toner cartridges and drums photoreceptors to make recycle parts recycle materials or energy recovery e Proper disposal is required for toner cartridges no longer needed Do not open toner cartridges Return them to your local Fuji Xerox representative Maintenance 405 Storing Consumables Store consumables in their original packaging until you need to use them Do not store consumables in Temperatures greater than 40 C 140 F An environment with extreme changes in humidity or temperature e Direct sunlight e Dusty places Acar for a long period of time An environment where corrosive gases are present An environment with salty air 406 Maintenance Managing the Printer This section includes e Checking or Managing the Printer with the CentreWare Internet Services on page 407 e Checking Printer Status with the SimpleMonitor Windows Only on page 408 e Checking Printer Status Through E mail on page 409 E Checking or Managing the Printer with the CentreWare Internet Services When the printer is installed in a TCP IP environment you can
137. application software 1 From the file menu select Print 2 Select the printer from the Select Printer list box and then click Preferences The Paper Output tab of the Printing Preferences dialog box appears 3 From Duplex select either Flip on Short Edge Manual or Flip on Long Edge Manual to define the way 2 sided print pages are bound amp Printing Preferences Paper Output Graphics Layout Watermarks Foms Advanced Favorites Copies A lt Change gt Standard Collated _Seve _ maEtcoms Paper Summary 3 Duplex A4 Plain T Flip on Short Edge Manual K Paper Size 4 Paper Type Plain X 5 RB Envelope Paper Setup Navigator __ Printer Status Restore Defaults ees iJ L d From Paper Size select the size of the document to be printed From Paper Type select the paper type to be used Click OK to close the Printing Preferences dialog box Nn OOA A Click Print in the Print dialog box to start printing 162 Printing Basics e Loading Print Media in the Paper Tray 1 First print the even pages rear sides For a six page document rear sides are printed in the order of page 6 page 4 then page 2 When printing of the even pages is complete the Data LED lights and the LCD panel shows the following OIS O2iL WkWresineeie IMSSe GOULD UE mS OmeluGchy Press OK Button to Continue Printi
138. as an example NOTE The reports and lists are all printed in English 1 Click Start All Programs gt Fuji Xerox Fuji Xerox Printer Software for Asia Pacific gt your printer Printer Setting Utility NOTE The window to select a printer appears in this step when multiple print drivers are installed on your computer In this case click the name of the desired printer listed in Printer Name The Printer Setting Utility starts 2 Click the Printer Settings Report tab 3 Select Reports from the list at the left side of the page The Reports page is displayed 4 Click the System Settings button The System Settings page is printed Printing Basics 175 E Printer Settings You can change the printer settings using either the operator panel or the Printer Setting Utility Changing the Printer Settings e Using the Operator Panel NOTE Factory defaults may vary for different regions Once one value is selected it will be active until a new value is applied or the default value is restored Driver settings may have precedence over the changes previously made and you may have to change the printer settings 1 Press the Ti System button 2 Select the desired menu and then press the button 3 Select the desired menu or menu item and then press the button e Ifthe selection is a menu the menu opens and the list of menu items appears e Ifthe selection is a menu item the default menu setti
139. at can be changed An On or Off setting Select the desired value and then click the Apply New Settings or Restart printer to apply new settings button Printing Basics 177 Printing with the Web Services on Devices This section provides information for network printing with the Web Services on Devices available on Windows Vista Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7 protocol of Microsoft This section includes e Adding Roles of Print Services on page 178 e Printer Setup on page 179 E Adding Roles of Print Services When you use Windows Server 2008 or Windows Server 2008 R2 you need to add the roles of print services to the Windows Server 2008 or Windows Server 2008 R2 client e For Windows Server 2008 1 Click Start Administrative Tools Server Manager 2 From the Action menu select Add Roles 3 Select the Print Services check box on the Server Roles window in the Add Roles Wizard and then click Next 4 Click Next Select the Print Server check box and then click Next 6 Click Install e For Windows Server 2008 R2 1 Click Start Administrative Tools Server Manager 2 From the Action menu select Add Roles 3 Select the Print and Document Services check box on the Server Roles window in the Add Roles Wizard and then click Next 4 Click Next Select the Print Server check box and then click Next 6 Click Install 178 Printing Basics E Printer Setup You can ins
140. ax or wait for a while until sending a fax is completed 034 700 Press the x button to clear the message If the error continues to appear after the 034 701 redial for the specified number of times try the following 034 702 eCheck if the phone line is connected properly eCheck if the destination number is correct Set Number of Redial to the largest value Set Interval Timer or Redial Delay longer See also Connecting the Telephone Line on page 244 034 703 Press the x button to clear the message If the error continues to appear after the 034 704 redial for the specified number of times try the following 034 705 eCheck if the phone line is connected properly eCheck if the destination number is available and correct 034 706 Set Number of Redial to the largest value Set Interval Timer or Redial Delay longer See also Connecting the Telephone Line on page 244 034 707 Press the x button to clear the message If the error continues to appear after the redial for the specified number of times try the following Set Number of Redial to the largest value Set Interval Timer or Redial Delay longer eLower Modem Speed Troubleshooting Error Code What You Can Do 034 708 Press the x button to clear the message If the error continues to appear after the redial for the specified number of times try the following Set Number of Redial to the largest value Set Interval Time
141. be sure to restart the printer Values Toner Off Does not use a toner cartridge of another manufacturer On Uses a toner cartridge of another manufacturer Factory default menu setting e Adjust Altitude Purpose To specify the altitude of the location where the printer is installed The discharge phenomenon for charging the photo conductor varies with barometric pressure You can specify the altitude of the printer location for adjustment NOTE An incorrect altitude adjustment leads to poor printing quality and an incorrect indication of remaining toner Values Om Select the altitude of the location where the printer is installed 1000m 2000m 3000m Factory default menu setting Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad 313 Secure Settings Use the Secure Settings menu to set a password to limit access to the operator panel menus This prevents the printer settings from being changed accidentally e Panel Lock Purpose To restrict access to Admin Menu and Report List with a password See also e Panel Lock Feature on page 331 NOTE e You can select Disable for Panel Lock Set when all items under Service Lock are set to Unlocked and Secure Receive Set is set to Disable Values Panel Lock Set Disable Does not restrict access to Admin Menu and Report List with a password Enable Restricts access to Admin Menu and Report List witha password Change
142. box of the print driver e Loading C5 Nagagata 3 4 or Kakugata 3 Envelopes Load envelopes with the print surface facing up Ensure that the flapped edge is pointing toward the rear of the printer and each flap is folded under the envelope Printing Basics 149 Loading Postcards in the Paper Tray NOTE When you print on postcards be sure to specify the postcard on the print driver for the optimum print result Before loading postcards smooth them out but bend the leading edge as shown in the following illustration Bend them about 5 mm 0 20 inches e Loading Postcards Load postcards with the print surface facing up and the top edge first 150 Printing Basics e Loading W Postcards Load W postcards with the print surface facing up and the left edge first NOTE To confirm the correct orientation of each print media such as postcards see the instructions on the Envelope Paper Setup Navigator dialog box of the print driver Printing Basics 151 E Loading Print Media in the Priority Sheet Inserter PSI NOTE Before you use the Priority Sheet Inserter PSI make sure that the printer has the paper tray inserted Use only laser print media Do not use ink jet paper on your printer e For manually loading print media for duplex 2 sided printing see Manual Duplex Printing PCL Print Driver Only on page 162 1 Open the front cover Before loading the print media f
143. cable e When using the printer as a network printer you can also scan document s via a network instead of using the USB cable The following procedure to scan an image uses the Microsoft Clip Organizer on Windows 7 as an example 1 Load a document s face up on the Automatic Document Feeder ADF with the top edge going in first or place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover See also e Making Copies From the Automatic Document Feeder ADF on page 186 e Making Copies From the Document Glass on page 184 2 Click Start gt All Programs Microsoft Office Microsoft Office 2010 Tools gt Microsoft Clip Organizer Click File Add Clips to Organizer From Scanner or Camera 4 Inthe Insert Picture from Scanner or Camera dialog box under Device select your TWAIN device 5 Click Custom Insert 210 Scanning 6 Select your scanning preferences and click Preview to display the preview image NOTE e Preview is grayed out and disabled when you select Document Feeder Tray from Scan From r FUJI XEROX DocuPrint M255 df z TWAIN Driver USB Basic Scanning image Quaity image Options ee EIR q Scan From 1 i B Document Glass i f Image Type t p 24 bit Full Color F 2 i o i Scan Size o Letter 8 5 x 11 r a i o 1 Resolution o t ON 300 dpi kA H o i o f i 3 i a
144. cate and double click the host name of the server computer Right click the shared printer name and then click Connect Click Install driver Click Continue in the User Account Control dialog box Wait until the driver is copied from the server to the client computer and a new printer object is added to the Printers folder It may take some time depending on the amount of network traffic Print a test page to verify installation a Click Start Control Panel Hardware and Sound b Select Printers c Right click the printer you just created and select Properties d On the General tab click Print Test Page When a test page is printed successfully installation is complete For Windows Server 2008 and Windows Server 2008 64 bit Edition a OO N Click Start gt Network Locate the host name of the server computer and then double click the host name Right click the shared printer name and then click Connect Click Install driver Wait until the driver is copied from the server to the client computer and a new printer object will be added to the Printers folder It may take some time depending on the amount of network traffic Print a test page to verify installation a Click Start Control Panel b Select Hardware and Sound c Select Printers d Right click the printer you just created and select Properties e On the General tab click Print Test Page When a test page is printed successfully installation is complet
145. ck the Apply New Settings button 392 Troubleshooting Maintenance This chapter includes e Cleaning the Printer on page 394 e Replacing the Toner Cartridge on page 398 e Ordering Supplies on page 404 Storing Consumables on page 406 Managing the Printer on page 407 e Conserving Supplies on page 410 Checking Page Counts on page 411 Moving the Printer on page 412 Maintenance 393 Cleaning the Printer This section describes how to clean the printer in order to maintain it in good condition and print clean printouts all the time A WARNING When cleaning this product use the designated cleaning materials exclusive to it Other cleaning materials may result in poor performance of the product Never use aerosol cleaners to avoid catching fire and explosion CAUTION When cleaning this product always switch off and unplug it Access to a live machine interior may cause electric shock This section includes e Cleaning the Scanner on page 395 e Cleaning the ADF Feed Roller on page 397 394 Maintenance E Cleaning the Scanner To ensure the best possible copies clean the scanner at the start of each day and during the day as needed to keep it clean 1 Slightly dampen a soft lint free cloth or paper towel with water 2 Open the document cover Film White Document Cover Document Glass ADF Glass lw N Maintenance 395 4 Wipe
146. connected e Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help Changes and modifications to this product not specifically approved by Fuji Xerox may void the user s authority to operate this product E Product Safety Certification UL CB This product is certified by the following agency using the safety standards listed Standard IEC60950 1 ed 2 26 Regulation Illegal Copies and Printouts Copying or printing certain documents may be illegal in your country Penalties of fines or imprisonment may be imposed on those found guilty The following are examples of items that may be illegal to copy or print in your country e Currency e Banknotes and checks Bank and government bonds and securities e Passports and identification cards Copyright material or trademarks without the consent of the owner e Postage stamps and other negotiable instruments This list is not inclusive and no liability is assumed for either its completeness or accuracy In case of doubt contact your legal counsel Illegal Copies and Printouts 27 Product Features This section describes the product features and indicates their links Duplex Print When you have multiple pages to print you can use the duplex feature of the computer to print on either side of paper to save paper consumption For more information see Duplex Printing on page 161 Priority Sheet Inserter PSI Print media loaded in the PSI
147. cscceeneceneeeneeeeeeeeteseesteseeeeecenes 51 Creating an Administrative PASSWOM cccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 51 Printer Setting Utility Windows Onlly cc ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetaaaaaeeeeeeees 52 SimpleMonitor Windows Only 220s eesti avn aie needa 53 Launcher Windows Only sactescdesscecucceodiat eke cee teetaesancbirerevsecueseesteeeeeeee 54 Address Book Edilorincn ceecesnitie sh eee eee a 56 Express Sca an Manageri nepen eel dee sah Salsa dada aed ced achat ve ee 57 User Setup Disk Creating Tool Windows Only eeeeeeeeeesseeesssesesreerennn 58 DocuWorks Windows Only sseesesssseseneneeerereerrrrrrrrrssssssssrtrrerrrrrrrrrrrrrren 60 Printer Connection and Software Installation eee 61 Overview of Network Setup and Configuration ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 62 Connecting Your Printens t5 2ccettoct nhs tials tue leat dee eietaead 63 Connecting Printer to a Computer or a Network 00eee 64 Setting the IP AUGreSS scsi ccc e352 axes ecee ee a dss vent aaea aea entreat aeeie 67 TCP IP and IP Addresses 0 0 6 4c2tcicie eerten nenea 67 Automatically Setting the Printer s IP Address cceeeeeeeeeeeeees 67 Dynamic Methods of Setting the Printer s IP Address 68 Assigning an IP Address for IPv4 Mode 69 Verifying the IP Settings fsccsdansaverenccutrceccee tt iati ev ceendaeesoeeaee 71 Printing and Checking the System Settings Page
148. ction and Software Installation E Using the XML Paper Specification Print Driver To use the XML Paper Specification print driver you may need to install an additional Microsoft package depending on your operating system Windows Vista VC 2008 Redistribution Package Windows Server 2008 Net Framework 3 5 SP1 Windows Server 2008 R2 Net Framework 3 5 1 Use the Server Manager interface to manually install it For further information on the XML Paper Specification print driver visit Microsoft s web site Printer Connection and Software Installation 113 Installing Print Drivers on Computers Running Mac OS X For information on how to install print drivers refer to the PostScript Level3 Compatible User Guide This section includes e Configuring Wireless Settings on the Operator Panel DocuPrint M255 z only on page 115 114 Printer Connection and Software Installation E Configuring Wireless Settings on the Operator Panel DocuPrint M255 z only You can configure wireless settings on the operator panel IMPORTANT The Wireless LAN feature is not available in all locations Please check with your local Fuji Xerox representative for availability of wireless in your location e Ifyou are using a method other than WPS to configure your wireless setting be sure to get the SSID and security information from a system administrator before starting the setup procedure Ensure that the Ethernet cable has been di
149. d then press the 0x button Turn over the ID card and press the lt gt Start button to begin copying the other side Copying 205 Changing the Default Copy Settings You can customize the default copy settings using the menu items that you use most frequently a fF WO N ez 206 Press the i System button Select Defaults Settings and then press the 0X button Select Copy Defaults and then press the ox button Select the desired menu item and then press the on button Select the desired setting or enter the value using the numeric keypad and then press the ox button Repeat steps 4 and 5 as needed To quit changing the default settings keep pressing the gt Back button until the LCD panel shows Select Function Copying Scanning NOTE e Ifthe Service Lock setting for Scan is setto Password Locked you need to enter the four digit password to use the scan function If the Service Lock setting is set to Locked the scan function is disabled and the menu is not displayed on the LCD panel For more information see Service Lock on page 314 This chapter includes e Scanning Overview on page 208 e Scanning to a USB Connected Computer on page 209 e Using a Scanner on the Network on page 213 Scanning to a USB Storage Device on page 234 e Sending an E Mail With the Scanned Image on page 235 e Customizing Scan Options on page 238 Scanning 207 Scanning Overview You can
150. date can scan your computer Add the print driver to your computer in advance If prompted install the print driver on your computer If you are prompted for an administrator password or confirmation type the password or provide confirmation Complete the additional steps in the wizard and then click Finish Print a test page to verify print installation a Click Start Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Printers Start Devices and Printers for Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7 b Right click the printer you just created and then click Properties Printer properties for Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7 c On the General tab click Print Test Page When a test page is printed successfully installation is complete Printing Basics 179 180 Printing Basics Copying NOTE e Ifthe Service Lock setting for Copy is setto Password Locked you need to enter the four digit password to use the copy function If the Service Lock setting is set to Locked the copy function is disabled and the menu is not displayed on the LCD panel For more information see Service Lock on page 314 This chapter includes Loading Paper for Copying on page 182 Preparing a Document on page 183 Making Copies From the Document Glass on page 184 Making Copies From the Automatic Document Feeder ADF on page 186 Customizing Copy Options on page 187 Copying an ID Card on page 205 Changing the Default Copy Setting
151. default printer and click Next 5 If you want to verify installation click Print a test page 6 Click Finish When a test page is printed successfully installation is complete 110 Printer Connection and Software Installation For Windows Server 2008 and Windows Server 2008 64 bit Edition 1 Click Start Control Panel Hardware and Sound Printers 2 Click Add a printer to launch the Add Printer wizard 3 Select Add a network wireless or Bluetooth printer If the printer is listed select the printer and click Next or select The printer that want isn t listed and enter the path to the printer in the Select a shared printer by name text box and click Next For example lt server host name gt lt shared printer name gt The server host name is the name of the server computer that identifies it on the network The shared printer name is the name assigned during the server installation process If this is a new printer you may be prompted to install a print driver If no system driver is available specify the location where the driver is available 4 Confirm the printer name and then select whether to use your printer as the default printer and click Next 5 Select whether to share your printer or not 6 Ifyou want to verify installation click Print a test page 7 Click Finish When a test page is printed successfully installation is complete Printer Connection and Software Installation 111 For Windows 7
152. dministrative mode you can change the configuration of the printer set up your fax directories and manage your printer settings without leaving your computer NOTE ao oa fF WO N Users who are not given passwords by the administrator can still view the configuration settings in user mode They will not be able to save or apply any changes to the current configuration and settings For details on the menu items of the CentreWare Internet Services refer to the Help on the CentreWare Internet Services Creating an Administrative Password Launch your web browser Enter the IP address of the printer in the address bar and then press the Enter key Click the Properties tab In the left navigation panel scroll down to Security and select Administrator Settings Select Enabled for Administrator Mode In the Administrator Login ID field enter a name for the administrator NOTE The default ID and password are 11111 and x admin respectively In the Administrator Password and Re enter Password fields enter a password for the administrator In the Maximum Login Attempts field enter the number of login attempts allowed Click Apply Your new password has been set and anyone with the administrator name and password can log in and change the printer configuration and settings Printer Management Software 51 Printer Setting Utility Windows Only The Printer Setting Utility allows you to view or specify t
153. document or paper in the landscape orientation LJ Short Edge Feed SEF Loading the document or paper in the portrait orientation LEF Orientation SEF Orientation COED Lb ae Paper feed direction Paper feed direction The screen shots and illustrations in this guide are those of the DocuPrint M255 z unless otherwise specified Some of the items in the screen shots and illustrations may not be displayed or available depending on your printer model Some features are not available on some models Using This Guide Safety Notes Before using this product read Safety Notes carefully for safety use This product and recommended supplies have been tested and found to comply with strict safety requirements including safety agency approvals and compliance with environmental standards Follow the following instructions for safety use A WARNING e Any unauthorized alteration including an addition of new functions or connection to external devices may not be covered by the product warranty Contact your local Fuji Xerox representative for more information Follow all warning instructions marked on this product The warning marks stand for the followings Used for item that if not followed strictly can lead death or severe or A DANG E R fatal injuries and the possibility to do it is comparatively high Used for items that if not followed strictly can lead to severe or fatal AWARNING injuries
154. dow rpm e FX DocuPrint M255 The print driver is uninstalled Printer Connection and Software Installation 129 e For Ubuntu 10 x86 130 Select Applications Accessories Terminal Enter the following command in the terminal window to delete the print queue sudo lpadmin x Enter the print queue name Enter the user password Repeat the command above for all queues for the same model Enter the following command in the terminal window gucio coke i ix clocujsrimt im255 Enter the user password if required The print driver is uninstalled Printer Connection and Software Installation Printing Basics This chapter includes e e About Print Media on page 132 Supported Print Media on page 136 Loading Print Media on page 143 Setting Paper Sizes and Types on page 158 Printing on page 159 Printing with the Web Services on Devices on page 178 Printing Basics 131 About Print Media Using paper that is not appropriate for the printer can cause paper jams image quality problems or printer failures To achieve the best performance from your printer we recommend you use only the paper described in this section When using paper other than that recommended contact our local representative office or authorized dealer This section includes e Print Media Usage Guidelines on page 132 e Automatic Document Feeder ADF Guidelines on page 133 e Print Media That Can Damage Y
155. e 0 2 2 cc siceceeigesscesee elec ct eceeneedeeeeeeee ee epeedncedenenatee 336 Using the Operator Panel itis cececdecccdedacts ouredeede sy Ric utente ne 336 Using the Printer Setting Utility Windows Onlly cere 336 Using the Numeric Keypad 222 2 0 scccceccceeseeeeeeenenenetenendecedeceneceneceeneeeees 337 Entering Characters ci cic tected ecto fondest etdees loa dode dd atten 337 Changing Numbers or Names cc ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 337 TOUDISSAGOUNG Seanse a ee EE di 339 Cleaning J msen a a a aa 340 Av idiNg JAMS carea Cesk e eea aE 341 Identifying the Location of Paper JaMS ceececceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 342 Clearing Paper Jams From the Automatic Document Feeder ADF 343 Clearing Paper Jams From the Front of the Printer 346 Clearing Paper Jams From the Rear of the Printer 351 Clearing Paper Jams From the Center Output Tray 0 353 Jam Problems ccna cacccesadiareteceastcsevemucssdete ees tencedsteateetaraset ee aE 356 Basic Printer Problems ti0z cieiescisceted dine bebe eerie iat tee 357 Display Problems r riepa id lee tied a A Heed 358 Printing Problems esoe ea a Ee oconeeewe nd 359 Print Quality Problems sin ntienencuoigont eh nee eh eee 361 Tine Outputs TOO LONT esia adil eevee eiaeia 362 Toner Smears or Print Comes Off Stain on Back Side 363 Random Spots Blurred
156. e Printer Connection and Software Installation 107 For Windows 7 Windows 7 64 bit Edition and Windows Server 2008 R2 1 Click Start Computer gt Network 2 Locate the host name of the server computer and then double click the host name 3 Right click the shared printer name and then click Connect een GU gt Network ADMIN PC Search AD P Organize Network and Sharing Center View remote printers s OH F Favorites E Desktop J Downloads H Recent Places 2A FX DocuPrint M255 z lt Open Connect Create shortcut 1S Libraries Documents a Music Pictures B Videos Properties j a Homegroup jE Computer Gia Network FX DocuPrint M255 z ADMIN PC d 4 Click Install driver Wait until the driver is copied from the server to the client computer and a new printer object will be added to the Devices and Printers folder It may take some time depending on the amount of network traffic 6 Printa test page to verify installation a Click Start Devices and Printers b Right click the printer you just created and select Printer properties c On the General tab click Print Test Page When a test page is printed successfully installation is complete 108 Printer Connection and Software Installation e Using the Peer to Peer Feature With the peer to peer feature you need to specify the shared printer to install a print driver For Windows XP Windo
157. e To set the color mode Values Black amp White Scans in black and white mode This is available only when File Format is set to PDF or TIFF Grayscale Scans in grayscale mode Color Scans in color mode Color Photo Scans in color mode This is suitable for photographic images Factory default menu setting 322 Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad e Resolution Purpose To specify the default scan resolution Values 200 x 200dpi 300 x 300dpi 400 x 400dpi 600 x 600dpi Factory default menu setting e Document Size Purpose To specify the default document size Values A4 210x297mm A5 148x210mm B5 182x257mm Letter 8 5x11 Folio 8 5x13 Legal 8 5x14 Executive Factory default menu setting e Lighten Darken Purpose To specify the default scan density level Values Lighten2 Makes the scanned image lighter than the original Works well with Lightenl dark print Normal Works well with standard typewritten or printed documents Darkenl Makes the scanned image darker than the original Works well with Da Eken light print or faint pencil markings Factory default menu setting Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad 323 e Sharpness Purpose To specify the default sharpness level Values Sharpest Makes the scanned image sharper than the original Sharper Nor
158. e Displayed on Printer 2 Network Type Sever FTP 3 Host Address IP Address or DNS Name 4 Port Number FTP 21 5000 65535 SMB 139 5000 65535 5 Login Name if required by host 6 Login Password 7 Re enter Password 8 Name of Shared Directory e g SMB Share Sharedfolder Q Subdirectory Path optional To fill in the fields enter the information as follows 1 Name Displayed on Enter a friendly name that you want it to appear on the Address Book Printer 2 Network Type Select Server FTP to use a FTP server Select Computer SMB to store scanned documents in a shared folder on your computer Scanning 229 3 Host Address IP Address or DNS Name Enter the name or IP address of the FTP server or your computer The following are examples For Server FTP Server name myhost example com myhost host name example com domain name IP address 192 168 1 100 e For Computer SMB Server name myhost IP address 192 168 1 100 4 Port Number Enter the server port number If you are unsure you can enter the default value of 21 for FTP and 139 for SMB 5 Login Name if required by host Enter the user account name that has access to the shared folder on your computer or the FTP server 6 Login Password Enter the password for the above login name NOTE e You cannot use an empty password for the Scan to Computer feature Ensure that you have a valid password for the us
159. e 57 User Setup Disk Creating Tool Windows Only on page 58 DocuWorks Windows Only on page 60 Printer Management Software 49 Print and Scan Drivers To access all of your printer s features install print and scan drivers from the Software Pack CD ROM A printer driver enables communications between your computer and printer and provides access to your printer features The scan driver enables you to scan images directly to your personal computer and place scanned images directly into an application via USB or the network The network feature is available only on the DocuPrint M255 z The scan driver is installed along with your print driver It is available for Microsoft Windows and Mac OS x See also e Installing Print Drivers on Computers Running Windows on page 73 e Installing Print Drivers on Computers Running Mac OS X on page 114 Installing Print Drivers on Computers Running Linux CUPS on page 120 50 Printer Management Software CentreWare Internet Services This section provides information on the CentreWare Internet Services The CentreWare Internet Services is a hyper text transfer protocol HTTP based web page service that is accessed through your web browser Using the CentreWare Internet Services you can confirm the printer status and change the printer configuration options easily Anyone on your network can access the printer using the CentreWare Internet Services In a
160. e de banth nena ders oh a ete 407 Checking or Managing the Printer with the CentreWare Internet Services 407 Checking Printer Status with the SimpleMonitor Windows Onlly eeeeeee 408 Checking Printer Status Through E mail 0 000000 409 Conserving SUPPNCS occ ircccecrad fadsdartecintorwn cae nea ganeawiepndad hea ednethenbechasducad sanbladets 410 Checking Page COuntS soutien ee eteeiseree eet ele ee 411 Moving Ihe Printer sciccccewstvenicmcmtanecd oes aide E EA 412 Contacting Fuji NOT OX svcd casserole oles oaths ea aly 415 MEChMIGAl SUPPOM stash EM etarccatcnasieisuie Maida eh ets E E a a TE tenuate nan 416 Online Services 2 22 coo cco earned e a cs a e a Eeee edea aa Eeee 417 Contents Preface Thank you for purchasing the DocuPrint M255 df M255 z This guide is intended for users who use the printer for the first time and provides all the necessary operating information about the Copy Print Scan and Fax functions Please read this guide to achieve the best performance from your printer This guide assumes you are familiar with computers and the basics of network operation and configuration After reading this guide keep it safe and handy for future reference DocuPrint M255 df M255 z User Guide Help Copyright 2012 by Fuji Xerox Co Ltd Fuji Xerox Co Ltd July 2012 Edition 2 No ME5830E2 2 Preface 9 Trademarks and Document Disclaimer Apple Bonjour ColorSync Macintosh and
161. e the amount of work required when installing the print driver e Install print drivers for your printer on the computer on which the setup disk is to be created e The setup disk can only be used on the operating system on which the disk was created or computers running the same operating system Create a separate setup disk for each of the operating systems To create a setup disk follow the procedure below The procedure uses Windows 7 as an example 1 Right click the icon for your printer in the Devices and Printers folder and select Printing preferences to open the print driver window 2 Specify the settings that you want to include in a driver installation package for example the Multiple Up setting on the Layout tab 3 Insert the Software Pack CD ROM into the CD DVD drive and open the disc NOTE e Ifthe AutoPlay window appears click Open folder to view files 4 Double click Utilities MakeDisk your desired language Double click makedisk exe The Creating Setup Disk window appears r al Creating Setup Disk ax This tool will create the setup disk for the Fuji Xerox driver The disk is created according to the selected printer settings To change the printer settings dick the Open Printers Folder button and make changes in the folder Select printer FX DocuPrint i Open Printers Folder l Exit 58 Printer Management Software 6 Select your printer and click Create Disk
162. ecifying the Fax Settings on page 274 Changing the Default Fax Settings on page 278 Printing a Report on page 279 Faxing 243 Connecting the Telephone Line IMPORTANT e Warnings in PTC200 244 General warning The grant of a Telepermit for any item of terminal equipment indicates only that Telecom has accepted that the item complies with minimum conditions for connection to its network It indicates no endorsement of the product by Telecom nor does it provide any sort of warranty Above all it provides no assurance that any item will work correctly in all respects with another item of Telepermitted equipment of a different make or model nor does it imply that any product is compatible with all of Telecom s network services Warnings taken from Specification text 2 11 1 Compliance testing 6 amp 7 Functional tests This equipment is not capable under all operating conditions of correct operation at the higher speeds for which it is designed Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances 4 5 1 Off hook line impedance 4 This equipment does not fully meet Telecom s impedance requirements Performance limitations may occur when used in conjunction with some parts of the network Telecom will accept no responsibility should difficulties arise in such circumstances 4 9 3 Non voice equipment This equipment is not capable under all operating conditions of correct
163. ect Printing Using a USB Storage Device The Print from USB Memory feature allows you to print files stored in a USB storage device by operating on the operator panel IMPORTANT To prevent damage to your printer DO NOT connect any device other than the USB storage device to the front USB port of the printer DO NOT remove the USB storage device from the front USB port until the printer is finished with printing NOTE e Ifthe Service Lock setting for Print from USB is set to Password Locked you need to enter the four digit password to use the Print from USB Memory feature If the Service Lock setting for Print from USB is set to Locked the Print from USB Memory feature is disabled and the menu is not displayed on the LCD panel For more information Service Lock on page 314 The front USB port of the printer is designed for USB 2 0 devices You must use only an authorized USB storage device with an A plug type connector Use only a metal shielded USB storage device A plug type i To print a file in a USB storage device 1 Press the 2 Print button 2 Insert a USB storage device to the front USB port of the printer Select Print From Select the desired file and then press the button Select printing options as needed ao oa Aa Q Press the lt gt Start button to begin printing NOTE You can print the files scanned and stored using the Scan to USB Memory feature Other files such as those created b
164. ed in the Select Printer screen and then click Next NOTE Ifthe printer to be installed is not listed in the Select Printer screen try either of the following steps Click Refresh to update the information Click Add Printer and then enter the details of the printer manually Configure the required items on the Enter Printer Settings screen and then click Next Select the software to be installed and then click Install Click Finish to exit this tool The wireless configuration is complete NOTE For the WPS PBC operation on the wireless LAN access point refer to the manual supplied with the wireless LAN access point 92 Printer Connection and Software Installation When the WPS PBC operation is successful and the printer is rebooted wireless LAN connection is completed e Operator Panel 1 Select Operator Panel and then click Next 2 Follow the on screen instructions until the Check Setup screen appears ii Macromedia Flash Player 8 ro Easy Install Navi gt 4 Remove packaging material You have completed preparing the printers hardware Set Toner Cartridge Press the Start Installation button on the lower right 2 to go to the software installation procedure E connect ang Power ON E Load Paper if any error is displayed on the operator panel click the following link E configure Printer Omen Trouble Shooting Guide 4B Retum amp Previous Startinstal
165. el Menus and Keypad This chapter includes e e Understanding the Operator Panel Menus on page 282 Panel Lock Feature on page 331 Limiting Access to Copy Fax Scan and USB Direct Print Operations on page 333 Changing the Power Saver Mode Settings on page 334 Resetting to Factory Defaults on page 335 Changing the Language on page 336 Using the Numeric Keypad on page 337 Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad 281 Understanding the Operator Panel Menus When your printer is connected to a network and available to a number of users access to the Admin Menu may be restricted This prevents unauthorized users from using the operator panel to inadvertently change the default menu settings that have been set by the administrator However you can change settings for individual print jobs using the print driver Print settings selected on the print driver have precedence over the default menu settings on the operator panel 282 Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad E Report List Use Report List to print various types of reports and lists NOTE e A password is required to use the Report List menu when Panel Lock Set is set to Enable In this case enter the password you specified and press the ox button The reports and lists are all printed in English System Settings Purpose To print a list of information such as the printer name the serial number print volume and network
166. elope Autofill 90 gsm DL Envelope River Series C5 Envelope Autofill 90 gsm C5 Envelope Heart Hatsushiba Yougata 2 Envelope Heart Hatsushiba Yougata 3 Envelope Heart Hatsushiba Yougata 4 Envelope Heart Hatsushiba Yougata 6 Envelope Heart Tokushiro 80 Nagagata 3 Envelope Heart Tokushiro 81 Nagagata 4 Envelope Heart Tokushiro 82 Kakugata 3 Envelope Printing Basics Paper Name Size Weight Paper Type Notes Special Official Postcard Japanese Postcard Postcard JPN IMPORTANT Paper Postcard 190 gsm Donotusea special Contd Official Postcard Reply paid Postcard JPN ink jet printer Postcard postcard It can cause the printer failure Esselte Oxford Index 3xS5Sinches Lightweight Card Cardstock Xerox Color Letter 120 gsm Lightweight Xpressions Elite Cardstock OK Prince 127 A4 128 gsm Lightweight Cardstock Shiraoi A4 156 gsm Lightweight Cardstock OK Prince 157 A4 157 gsm Lightweight Cardstock Premier TCF 160 A4 160 gsm Lightweight Cardstock IBG Paper PFX V704 A4 70 gsm Plain FXCL Xplore A4 Plain FXCL Xcellence 70 A4 Plain FXCL Xceed 70 A4 Plain Topgun A4 Plain OAHING PAPER A4 Plain UPM Office A4 Plain Multifunction AG Docupaper Folio Plain FXK A704 A4 75 gsm Plain FXK K704A A4 Plain Printing Basics 141 142
167. er login account See Confirming the Login name and the Password on page 216 for details on how to add a password for your user login account Re enter Password Re enter your password Name of Shared Directory For Computer SMB only Enter the name of the shared folder on your computer where you want to store scanned documents 9 Subdirectory Path optional For Computer SMB To store scanned documents simply in the shared folder specified for Name of Shared Directory leave this box blank To store scanned documents in a subfolder within the shared folder enter the path to the subfolder as shown in the example below Example Shared folder name MyShare Second level folder name MyPic Third level folder name John You should now see MyShare Mypic John in your directory MyShare Shared folder L 7 MyPic L John In this case enter for Subdirectory Path optional as follows MyPic John For Server FTP Enter the path to the FTP server where you want to store scanned documents When you are finished with printer configuration go to Sending the Scanned File to the Network on page 233 230 Scanning Using the Address Book Editor 1 Click Start All Programs gt Fuji Xerox Fuji Xerox Printer Software for Asia Pacific gt your printer Address Book Editor NOTE The window to select a device appears when multiple fax drivers are installed on your computer In
168. er receives an incoming fax the external telephone rings for the period of time specified for Auto Ans TEL FAX and then the printer automatically receives a fax If an incoming call is not a fax the printer beeps from the internal speaker indicating that the call is a telephone call Ans FAX Mode The printer shares the telephone line with an answering machine and monitors the line for a fax tone It will pick up an incoming call if it hears a fax tone This option is not available in regions where a serial phone system is employed DRPD Mode To use this option you need to subscribe the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection DRPD service from your telephone company that assigns multiple telephone numbers to a single telephone line and distinguishes each line with a distinctive ring pattern Once this service is activated then you can configure your printer to monitor the line for the distinctive ring pattern Factory default menu setting Auto Answer Fax Purpose To specify a period of time for which the printer waits before entering the FAX Mode upon reception of an incoming call The interval can be specified within the range of 0 to 255 seconds The default is 0 second e Auto Ans TEL FAX Purpose To specify a period of time for which the printer waits before entering the FAX Mode when the external telephone receives an incoming call The interval can be specified within the range of 0 to 255 seconds The defa
169. er than the long edge even if it is within the specified range The length of the long edge cannot be shorter than the short edge even if it is within the specified range 7 To assign a paper name select the Name the Paper Size check box and then enter the name in Paper Name Up to 14 characters can be used for the paper name If necessary repeat steps 5 to 7 to define another custom size Click OK twice 172 Printing Basics Printing on Custom Size Paper Use the following procedures to print using either the Windows or Mac OS X print driver e Using the Windows Print Driver This section explains the procedure using Windows 7 WordPad as an example NOTE The way to display the Printer Properties Printing Preferences dialog box depends on the application software Refer to the manual of your application software From the file menu select Print Select your printer and click Preferences Select the Paper Output tab Select the size of the document to be printed from Paper Size Select the paper type to be used from Paper Type Click the Layout tab Nn oO oO FB OO N From Output Size select the custom size you defined If you have selected the custom size from Paper Size in step 4 select Same as Paper Size Click OK Click Print in the Print dialog box to start printing e Using the Mac OS X Print Driver This section explains the procedure using Mac OS X 10 6 TextEdit as an example From the File menu
170. er the System Settings menu See mm inch on page 309 for more information Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad 329 Paper Type Plain Light Card Labels Recycled Envelope Postcard Factory default menu setting NOTE e For details on the supported paper sizes see Usable Print Media on page 137 E Panel Language Purpose To specify the language to be used on the operator panel See also e Changing the Language on page 336 Values English English BRR Simplified Chinese See Traditional Chinese Sst 0 Korean Factory default menu setting 330 Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad Panel Lock Feature This feature prevents unauthorized users from changing the settings on the operator panel made by the administrator However you can modify the settings for individual print jobs using the print driver This section includes e Enabling the Panel Lock Feature on page 331 e Disabling the Panel Lock Feature on page 332 E Enabling the Panel Lock Feature Panel Panel Press the fi System button Select Admin Menu and then press the 0x button Select Secure Settings and then press the 0x button Lock and then press the 0X button Lock Set and then press the ox button Select Enable and then press the 0X button If necessary select Change Password and then press the 0x button Enter a new password and
171. ess the or button Select speed dial numbers to include in the group dial number and then press the ox button Select Apply Settings and then press the 0x button Select Yes when Are You Sure is displayed and then press the ox button To create more group dial numbers repeat steps 5 to 11 To quit creating group dial numbers keep pressing the gt Back button until the LCD panel shows Select Function Faxing 267 E Editing Group Dial Numbers You can add delete a speed dial number s to from a group dial number O a fF WwW N 268 Press the Til System button Select Admin Menu and then press the 0x button Select Phone Book and then press the 0x button Select Group Dial and then press the 0x button Select the group dial number that you want to edit and then press the ox button To change the group dial name a Select Name and then press the 0x button b Enter anew name and then press the ox button c Select Apply Settings and then press the ox button d Select Yes when Are You Sure is displayed and then press the ox button To change the speed dial number a Select Speed Dial No and then press the 0x button b Select or deselect a desired speed dial number s and then press the ox button c Select Apply Settings and then press the ox button d Select Yes when Are You Sure is displayed and then press the 0x button NOTE e Deselecting all speed dial numbers
172. f l Default All l Defaults W 2550px H 3300px Size 24 08MB Dio re O S d 7 Select the desired properties from the Image Quality and Image Options tabs 8 Click Scan to start scanning A scanned image file is generated Scanning 211 E Using the WIA Driver Your printer also supports the Windows Image Acquisition WIA driver for scanning images WIA is one of the standard components provided with Windows XP and later operating systems and works with digital cameras and scanners Unlike the TWAIN driver the WIA driver allows you to scan an image and easily manipulate it without using additional software The following procedure uses Windows 7 as an example NOTE Ensure that the printer is connected to the computer using the USB cable 1 Load a document s face up on the Automatic Document Feeder ADF with the top edge going in first or place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover See also e Making Copies From the Automatic Document Feeder ADF on page 186 e Making Copies From the Document Glass on page 184 2 Start the drawing software such as the Paint NOTE e On Windows Vista use the Windows Photo Gallery instead of the Paint 3 Click the Paint button gt From scanner or camera The WIA window appears Scan using FX DP M255 df z WIA What do you wantto scan Chssssssssssssseccnnnsercnnnnnnee rm Paper source f Feed zj Se
173. fax job at any time by pressing the Stop button while the transmission is in progress Confirming Transmissions When the last page of your document has been sent successfully the printer beeps and returns to standby mode If something goes wrong while sending your fax an error message appears on the LCD panel If you receive an error message press the x button to clear the message and try sending the document again You can set your printer to print a confirmation report automatically after each fax transmission See also Printing a Report on page 279 254 Faxing E Automatic Redialing If the number you have dialed is busy or there is no answer when you send a fax the printer will automatically redial the number every minute for the number of times set in the redial settings To change the time interval between redials and the number of redial attempts see Redial Delay on page 300 and Number of Redial on page 300 NOTE If you manually enter a fax number the printer will not automatically redial the number Faxing 255 Sending a Delayed Fax You can use the Delayed Start mode to save scanned documents and transmit them at the specified time to take advantage of lower long distance rates 1 10 256 Load a document s face up on the Automatic Document Feeder ADF with the top edge going in first or place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover See al
174. following procedure uses Windows 7 as an example 1 Launch your web browser 2 Enter the IP address of the printer in the address bar and then press the Enter key The CentreWare Internet Services appears on your browser NOTE e For details on how to check the IP address of the printer see Verifying the IP Settings on page 71 3 Click the Address Book tab If a user name and password entry is prompted enter the correct user name and password NOTE The default User ID and password are 11111 and x admin respectively 4 Under Fax E mail click Personal Address G WwW e eaat SACA FUJI XEROX DocuPrint M255 z Address Boo Fax E mail FUJI XEROX DocuPrint M2557 Personal Address EM Fax E mail B Personal Addres No Name Phone Number Address Lal Fax Group 001 Not in Use Add E Mail Group p Edit E mail Message 002 Notin Use Add EHigrNetwork Scan Comp Serv 003 Not in Use Add Computer Server Address Boo pun 004 Notin Use Add 005 Notin Use Add 006 Notin Use Add 007 Notin Use Add s FUJI Xerox amp Scanning 235 5 Select any unused number and click Add Cc WwW a RATE FUJI XEROX DocuPrint M255 z Fax E mail T FUJI XEROX DocuPrint M255 z Add Personal Address S Fax E mail Personal Address No 001 C Fax Group E Mail Group Name D Edit E mail Message E i Network Scan Comp Serv Phone Number D Computer Serve
175. for PDF files Values A4 210x297mm Letter 8 5x11 Auto Factory default menu setting e Layout Purpose To specify the output layout Values Auto 100 No Zoom 2 Pages Up 4 Pages Up Factory default menu setting Network Use the Network option to change the printer settings affecting jobs sent to the printer through the network e Ethernet Purpose To specify the communication speed and the duplex settings of Ethernet To make any changes effective turn off the printer and then turn it back on Values Auto Detects the Ethernet settings automatically 10BASE T Half Uses 10base T half duplex 10BASE T Full Uses 10base T full duplex 100BASE TX Half Uses 100base TX half duplex 100BASE TX Full Uses 100base TX full duplex Factory default menu setting NOTE This menu item appears only when the printer is connected to a wired network 292 Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad e Wireless Status DocuPrint M255 z only Purpose To display the information on the wireless signal strength No changes can be made on the operator panel to improve the status of the wireless connection Values Connection Good Indicates good signal strength Acceptable Indicates marginal signal strength Low Indicates insufficient signal strength No Reception Indicates that no signal is received
176. for the printer to resume the ready to print state Auto Reset Purpose To specify a time period before the printer restores the default setting for the current menu item and resumes the ready to print state when an attempt to change the setting is left unfinished Values 45sec lmin 2min 3min 4min Factory default menu setting 306 Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad e Fault Time Out Purpose To specify a time period before the printer cancels a job that has halted abnormally Any job will be cancelled when it times out Values Off Disables the fault time out feature On 60sec By default the printer cancels a job in 60 seconds after the job halts abnormally You can change the setting within a range from 3 to 300 seconds 3sec 300sec Factory default menu setting e Job Time Out Purpose To specify a time period that the printer waits to receive data from a computer Any print job will be cancelled when it times out Values Off Disables the job time out feature On 30sec By default the printer waits to receive data from a computer for 30 seconds You can change the setting within a range from 5 to 300 seconds 5sec 300sec Factory default menu setting e Clock Settings Purpose To specify the date and time and regional time zone of the printer Values Set Date Sets the current date Set Time
177. ftware Installation 105 Installing Print Drivers Now that the printer is set for shared printing you need to install print drivers for the shared printer using either of the two Windows features e Using the Point and Print Feature The Point and Print feature is a Windows technology that automatically downloads and installs a print driver necessary for using the shared printer on the network For Windows XP Windows XP 64 bit Edition Windows Server 2003 and Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition 1 On the Windows desktop of the client computer double click My Network Places 2 Locate the host name of the server computer and then double click the host name 3 Right click the shared printer name and then click Connect Wait until the driver is copied from the server to the client computer and a new printer object is added to the Printers and Faxes folder It may take some time depending on the amount of network traffic Close My Network Places 4 Printa test page to verify installation a Click start Start for Windows Server 2003 Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition gt Printers and Faxes b Select the printer you have installed Click File gt Properties On the General tab click Print Test Page When a test page is printed successfully installation is complete 106 Printer Connection and Software Installation For Windows Vista and Windows Vista 64 bit Edition a fF OO N Click Start gt Network Lo
178. h CUPS Common UNIX Printing System on Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 Desktop x86 SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 11 x86 and Ubuntu 10 x86 For the information on the previous versions of the Linux operating systems visit respective web sites This section includes e Installing Print Drivers on page 121 Specifying the Queue on page 122 e Specifying the Default Queue on page 125 e Specifying Printing Options on page 126 Setting the Password for Authority as the Printer Administrator on page 128 Uninstalling Print Drivers on page 129 120 Printer Connection and Software Installation E Installing Print Drivers NOTE e The print driver fx docuprint m255 xx xnoar rpm or fx docuprint m255_X X_all deb is included in the linux folder on the Software Pack CD ROM e For Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 Desktop x86 1 Double click fx docuprint m255 xx xnoar rpm on the Software Pack CD ROM Click Install 3 Enter the administrator s password and then click Authenticate Installation starts When the installation is complete the window automatically closes e For SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 11 x86 1 Double click fx docuprint m255 xx xnoar rpm on the Software Pack CD ROM 2 Click Install 3 Enter the administrator s password and then click Authenticate Installation starts When the installation is complete the window automatically closes e For Ubuntu 10 x86 Double click fx docuprint m255_X X_all deb on
179. he LCD panel in three minutes After that you can configure the following initial settings by selecting Power On Wizard on the operator panel as needed For details on the operator panel see Understanding the Operator Panel Menus on page 282 Select the language you want to use on the operator panel and then press the button Press the button to start setting the region Select your region and then press the button Select the appropriate time zone and then press the button Specify the current date and then press the button Specify the current time and then press the button Press the button for fax setup If you want to skip the fax setup press the Start button Enter your fax number and then press the button Enter a name and then press the button Press the button to complete the initial settings on the operator panel Basic Operation 45 Printing the Panel Settings Page The Panel Settings page shows current settings on the operator panel menus This section includes e The Operator Panel on page 46 e The Printer Setting Utility Windows Only on page 46 E The Operator Panel NOTE The reports and lists are all printed in English 1 Press the i System button 2 Select Report List and then press the button 3 Select Panel Settings and then press the button The Panel Settings page is printed The Printer Setting Utility Windows Only
180. he fax settings if necessary NOTE e If you do not intend to use the fax feature select the don t use FAX functionality check box 10 Click Next The Confirm the settings screen appears 7 Pi Printer Setup Utility Configure Printer Confirm the settings Wireless Network Settin SSID XXXXXXXX Type of wireless network Infrastructure Security Protocol WPA2 PSK AES dex Password P Address Settings IP Mode IPv4 IPv4 Settings Type Use Manual Address 4 J m Pore Confirm Settings Please confirm your settings Select language if you want to change the language of printer s operation panel lt Back Apply cancel 11 Ensure that the wireless network settings are displayed and then click Apply A confirmation window appears Printer Setup Utility Restart printer for new settings to take effect Do you want to restart printer I lt 88 Printer Connection and Software Installation 12 Click Yes 13 Waita few minutes until the printer restarts to establish a wireless network connection and the Configuration Complete screen appears 7 w Printer Setup Utility SES Configure Printer Configuration Complete Utility has finished sending your settings to printer After your printer restarts wait for a few minutes and check the settings using Printer Setting Report Click Nex
181. he firewall after the installation of the printer software is complete E Inserting the Software Pack CD ROM 1 Insert the Software Pack CD ROM into your computer s CD DVD drive When the AutoPlay window appears click Run setup exe to start the Easy Install Navi NOTE Ifthe CD does not automatically start or the AutoPlay window does not appear click Start start for Windows XP Computer D setup exe where D is the drive letter of your CD and then click OK EUSB Connection Setup The following procedure uses Windows 7 as an example Connect your computer and printer with a USB cable Turn on the printer Click Installing Drivers and Software Select Personal Installation and then click Next a fF WO N If you agree to the terms of the License Agreement click accept the terms of the license agreement to continue the installation process and then click Next 6 Select whether to restart your computer and click Finish to exit the wizard e USB Printing A personal printer is a printer connected to your computer or a print server using a USB If your printer is connected to a network and not to your computer see Network Connection Setup on page 76 Printer Connection and Software Installation 75 Network Connection Setup NOTE To use your printer in a Linux environment you need to install print drivers for the Linux operating systems For details on how to install and use the drivers see also Insta
182. he output is wrinkled The output is stained Verify that the correct print media is being used If not use the print media recommended for the printer If excessive wrinkles occur use paper or other media from a new package See also e Usable Print Media on page 137 About Print Media on page 132 If you use the envelope check whether the crease is within 30 mm of the four edges of the envelope If the crease is within 30 mm of the four edges of the envelope this is considered normal Your printer is not at fault If not check if the printer supports your envelope type and then check if you loaded the envelope in the correct orientation For more information see Loading Print Media in the Paper Tray on page 144 or Loading Print Media in the Priority Sheet Inserter PSI on page 152 NOTE lt Ifthe problem continues even though you have taken suggested actions described above contact our local representative office or authorized dealer Troubleshooting 369 The Top Margin Is Incorrect ABC DEF Problem Action The top margin is incorrect Ensure that the margins are set correctly on the application being used NOTE If the problem continues even though you have taken suggested actions described above contact our local representative office or authorized dealer E Protrudent Bumpy Paper ABC DEF Problem Action Printed surf
183. he specified IP address Factory default menu setting 296 Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad e Initialize NVM Purpose To initialize wired network data stored in Non Volatile Memory NVM Enabling this feature and rebooting the printer will reset all the wired network settings to their factory default values Values Yes Initializes the wired network data stored in NVM No Does not initialize the wired network data stored in NVM Factory default menu setting e PS Data Format Purpose To set the PS data communications protocol To make any changes effective turn off the printer and then turn it back on Values Auto Sets the PS data communications protocol automatically Standard Sets the PS data communications protocol to Standard BCP Sets the PS data communications protocol to BCP TBCP Sets the PS data communications protocol to TBCP Factory default menu setting Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad 297 Fax Settings Use the Fax Settings menu to configure the basic fax settings e Ans Select Purpose To specify the default fax receiving mode Values 4 EL Mode The printer does not automatically receive faxes To receive an incoming fax you need to pick up the handset of the connected external telephone press the 2 digit code and press the O Start button FAX Mode The printer automatically receives faxes TEL FAX Mode When the print
184. he system settings You can also diagnose the system settings with the Printer Setting Utility The Printer Setting Utility consists of the Printer Settings Report Printer Maintenance and Diagnosis tabs The Printer Setting Utility is installed along with print drivers NOTE The Password dialog box appears the first time you attempt to change settings on Printer Setting Utility when the Panel Lock feature is enabled on the printer In this case enter the password you specified and click OK to apply the settings 52 Printer Management Software SimpleMonitor Windows Only You can check the printer status with the SimpleMonitor Double click the SimpleMonitor printer icon on the taskbar at the bottom right of the screen The Printer Selection window appears which displays the printer name printer connection port printer status and model name Check the column Status to know the current status of your printer Settings button Displays the Settings window and allows you to modify the SimpleMonitor settings Click the name of the desired printer listed on the Printer Selection window The Printer Status window appears The Printer Status window alerts you when there is a warning or when an error occurs for example when a paper jam occurs or toner is running low By default the Printer Status window appears automatically when an error occurs You can specify the conditions for starting the Printer Status window in Printer
185. i Produces a high resolution and a large file size 600 x 600dpi Produces the highest resolution and largest file size Scanning 239 Setting the Document Size To specify the size of a source document Press the fi System button Select Defaults Settings and then press the 0x button Select Scan Defaults and then press the 0X button Select Document Size and then press the 0X button a A WO N Select a paper size to specify the scan area and then press the ox button The factory default setting is A4 210x297mm Automatically Suppressing Background Variations When scanning documents with a dark background such as newspapers the printer automatically can detect the background and whiten it when outputting the image To turn on off automatic suppression Press the i System button Select Defaults Settings and then press the 0x button Select Scan Defaults and then press the 0X button Select Auto Exposure and then press the ox button a A OO N Select either On or Off and then press the ox button The factory default setting is On 240 Scanning E Changing the Scan Settings for an Individual Job Scanning to a Computer To temporarily change a scan setting when scanning to a computer 1 2 3 4 5 6 Press the amp Scan button Select a destination to store the scanned image and then press the 0x button Select the desired menu item and then press the
186. i Xerox representative for its disposal CAUTION e Keep drum cartridges or drum if not a cartridge type and toner cartridges out of the reach of children If a child accidentally swallows toner spit it out rinse mouth with water drink water and consult a physician immediately e When replacing drum cartridges or drum if not a cartridge type and toner cartridges be careful not to spill the toner In case of any toner spills avoid contact with clothes skin eyes and mouth as well as inhalation e If toner spills onto your skin or clothing wash it off with soap and water If you get toner particles in your eyes wash it out with plenty of water for at least 15 minutes until irritation is gone Consult a physician if necessary If you inhale toner particles move to a fresh air location and rinse your mouth with water If you swallow toner spit it out rinse your mouth with water drink plenty of water and consult a physician immediately IMPORTANT Do not shake the used toner cartridge to avoid spilling of the toner This section includes When to Replace the Toner Cartridge on page 399 e Removing the Toner Cartridge on page 400 e Installing a Toner Cartridge on page 402 398 Maintenance E When to Replace the Toner Cartridge The printer has one toner cartridge black K When a toner cartridge reaches its usable life span the following messages appear on the LCD panel Message Remaini
187. ic keypad NOTE If you make a mistake while entering numbers press the C Clear button to delete the last digit Confirm the number on the LCD panel is correct and then press the ox button Select Company Name and then press the 0 button 246 Faxing 8 Enter your name or company name using the numeric keypad You can enter special symbols by pressing the 1 and buttons as well as alphanumeric characters For details on how to use the numeric keypad to enter alphanumeric characters see Using the Numeric Keypad on page 337 9 Confirm the name on the LCD panel is correct and then press the 0x button 10 Press the gt Back button several times until the LCD panel shows Select Function E Setting the Time and Date NOTE O a A QQ N 10 11 It may be necessary to reset the time and date in case of power loss Press the Til System button Select Admin Menu and then press the ox button Select System Settings and then press the 0x button Select Clock Settings and then press the ox button Select Set Date and then press the 0x button Enter the correct date using the numeric keypad or select the correct date NOTE If you make a mistake while entering numbers press the lt button to re enter the digit Confirm the date on the LCD panel is correct and then press the 0x button Select Set Time and then press the 0x button Enter the correct time using the numeric keypad
188. ied is not used by other users If file or folder that has the same name as the one you specified already exists 031 558 Press the x button to clear the message Check if the access setting to the SMB server is correct by contacting your server administrator 031 571 Press the x button to clear the message Check if the network is properly connected 031 574 Press the x button to clear the message Check if the domain name of the FTP server is correct 031 575 Press the x button to clear the message Check if the host name setting to the FTP server is correct 031 576 Press the x button to clear the message Check if the FTP server encounters any write protection or disk problem 031 578 Press the button to clear the message Check if the network is properly connected and if login name user name and password for the FTP server are correct 031 579 Press the x button to clear the message Check if the working path setting to the FTP server is correct 031 582 Press the button to clear the message Check if the FTP server encounters any write protection or disk problem 031 584 Press the x button to clear the message Check the following lf the file name you specified is not used by other users lf file or folder that has the same name as the one you specified already exists elf the FTP server encounters any write protection or disk problem Troubleshooting 381 382 Error Code What You Can Do
189. iie a a ae E at R ae ahd 273 Specifying the Fax Settings c ce cs sssseccececeneneeeeeneetteeetensenseesseceeeees 274 Customizing Fax OptionS eseeeeeeeeeeeeesesesssssrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrneeneee 274 Available Fax Options ceee eierne eeaeee cave eee bakast rat 275 Changing the Default Fax SettingS cc ccccseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeea 278 P intinga FRED ONL se cusscrdcaresecedesecesegusaece iene cent Eee ae A EE E tester secest 279 Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad 65 281 Understanding the Operator Panel Menus ceeeeeeeeeeeeeetttteeeeeees 282 FREPORES LIS EAE EEE E EEA dns ade cute tulsa E T 283 Meter Readings acca en teed nd alee led pelt eek 284 PRIMI MOT eae ae ens os fea de os beeen toa ce ADESEA Earainn 284 Contents 10 DetaultS Settings ict tees r a ela a edi eat oe ted er eet 317 ENE E E E E 328 Panel Language ses niccnde eee nelle a 330 Paine LOCK Fete EE E it E adoes dissed ov EESE 331 Enabling the Panel Lock Feature ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetetttteeeeees 331 Disabling the Panel Lock Feature cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeetetetteeeeeees 332 Limiting Access to Copy Fax Scan and USB Direct Print Operations 333 Changing the Power Saver Mode SettingS cccccceccceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeee 334 Resetting to Factory Defaults sc gscp2ecacicecacecensenevetecaveensbedzese ces cececenteee eres 335 Changing the Languag
190. immediately after printing The fusing unit becomes extremely hot during use Protect the OPC drum against bright light If the rear cover is left open for more than three minutes print quality may deteriorate NOTE To resolve the error displayed on the LCD panel you must clear all print media from the print media path 1 Push the rear cover handle and open the rear cover fl oe LZ Z KS Troubleshooting 353 4 If no paper is found in the paper path lift and open the scanner unit 354 Troubleshooting Lower the levers to the original position If the error is not resolved there may be a piece of paper remaining inside the printer Use the following procedure to clear the jam Load print media in the paper tray or the Priority Sheet Inserter PSI if there is no print media Press the CA Clear All button on the operator panel for 3 seconds The print media is fed to push out the jammed paper Troubleshooting 355 E Jam Problems This section includes e Misfeed Jam on page 356 e Multi feed Jam on page 356 Misfeed Jam Problem Action Print media misfeeds occur Remove the paper from the Priority Sheet Inserter PSI and then ensure that the paper is properly inserted in the paper tray Depending on the print media you use take any of the following actions For thick paper use the one that is 163 gsm or less For postcard the one up to 190 gsm is avail
191. in the group dial number does not delete the group dial number itself To delete the group dial number press the C Clear button step b above and proceed to step d If you want to edit another group dial number repeat steps 5 to 8 To quit editing group dial numbers keep pressing the Back button until the LCD panel shows Select Function Faxing E Sending a Fax Using Group Dialing Multi address Transmission You can use group dial numbers for broadcasting or delayed transmissions See also 1 a fF WwW N Sending a Delayed Fax on page 256 Load a document s face up on the Automatic Document Feeder ADF with the top edge going in first or place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover See also Loading a Source Document on the Automatic Document Feeder ADF on page 249 e Loading a Source Document on the Document Glass on page 250 Press the Fax button Select Fax to and then press the 0x button Select Group Dial and then press the 0x button Press the A or W button to enter a group dial number between 01 and 06 and then press the gt button to make or clear the selection The corresponding entry s name briefly appears on the LCD panel Press the 0X button Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs See also e Resolution on page 251 e Lighten Darken on page 252 Press the Q Start button to scan and store the document in the
192. ing 031 521 Press the x button to clear the message Check if the access setting to the SMB server is correct by contacting your server administrator 031 526 Press the x button to clear the message Check if the domain name of the SMB server is correct Check DNS connection or check if the name of the forwarding destination server is registered with DNS 031 529 Press the button to clear the message Check if the network is properly connected and if the password for the SMB server is correct 031 530 Press the ox button to clear the message Check if the working path setting to the SMB server is correct 031 533 Press the x button to clear the message Check the following lf the file name you specified is not used by other users lf file or folder that has the same name as the one you specified already exists elf the SMB server encounters any write protection or disk problem 031 534 Press the x button to clear the message Check if the SMB server encounters any 031 535 write protection or disk problem 031 536 031 537 Press the x button to clear the message Check if the storage location has free space 031 555 Press the x button to clear the message Check if the network is properly connected 031 556 Press the x button to clear the message Check if the SMB server encounters any write protection or disk problem 031 557 Press the x button to clear the message Check the following elf the file name you specif
193. ing Copies From the Automatic Document Feeder ADF IMPORTANT Do not load more than 50 sheets on the ADF or allow more than 50 sheets to be fed to the document output tray The document output tray should be emptied before it holds more than 50 sheets or your source documents may be damaged NOTE To ensure the best scan quality especially for color or gray scale images use the document glass instead of the ADF A computer connection is not required for copying You cannot load the following documents on the ADF Be sure to place them on the document glass H Curled documents Pre punched paper f Lightweight documents y Folded creased or torn documents S Cut and paste documents Carbon paper To make a copy from the ADF 1 Load up to 50 sheets of 64 gsm documents face up on the ADF with the top edge going in first Then adjust the document guides to the correct document size NOTE Ensure that you use the document guides before copying a legal size document 2 Press the 3 Copy button 3 Customize the copy settings including the number of copies copy size and image quality See also e Customizing Copy Options on page 187 To clear the settings use the CA Clear All button 4 Press the lt gt Start button to begin copying NOTE Press the Stop button to cancel a copy job at any time while scanning a document 186 Copying Customizing Copy Options You can customize
194. ing Paper Sizes on page 158 Setting Paper Types on page 158 E Setting Paper Sizes Press the i System button Select Tray Settings and then press the button Select Paper Tray and then press the button Select Paper Size and then press the button a fF WO N Select the correct paper size for the print media loaded and then press the button E Setting Paper Types IMPORTANT The paper type must match those of the actual print media loaded in the paper tray Otherwise print quality problems can occur Press the i System button Select Tray Settings and then press the button Select Paper Tray and then press the button Select Paper Type and then press the button a fF OO N Select the correct paper type for the print media loaded and then press the button 158 Printing Basics Printing This section covers how to print documents from your printer and how to cancel a job This section includes e e e Printing from the Computer on page 159 Canceling a Print Job on page 160 Duplex Printing on page 161 Direct Printing Using a USB Storage Device on page 166 Selecting Printing Options on page 167 Printing Custom Size Paper on page 172 Checking Status of a Print Job on page 174 Printing a Report Page on page 175 Printer Settings on page 176 E Printing from the Computer Install the print driver to use all the features of the pr
195. ing an Answering Machine Printer Line To the Telephone Answering Device Phone wall jack You can connect a telephone answering device TAD directly to the rear of your printer as shown above e Place your printer in the Ans FAX Mode and specify for Auto Ans Ans FAX a period of time before the TAD responds When the TAD picks up an incoming call the printer monitors and takes the line if it hears a fax tone and then starts receiving the fax e When the TAD is turned off the printer automatically enters the FAX Mode after a predefined period of time If you answer an incoming call and hear a fax tone the printer will receive the fax in the following cases You set OnHook to On you can hear a voice or a fax tone from the remote fax machine press the O Start button and then replace the handset You press the two digit remote receive code and replace the handset Faxing 271 E Using a Computer Modem CCOc oee eD OCS ES S Printer Line Telephone Answering Device Phone To the Computer internet If you want to use your computer modem for faxing or dial up internet connection connect the computer modem directly to the rear of your printer with the TAD as shown above e Place your printer in the Ans FAX Mode and specify for Auto Ans Ans FAX a period of time before the TAD responds
196. ing an ID Card on page 205 Scan to SMB FTP Network a Ta Gul s gt 1 1 a a e ie ae You can transfer scanned data to a computer or a server via SMB or FTP without service software Although prior registration of the destination FTP server or the computer on the Address Book is required it helps save your time For more information see Using a Scanner on the Network on page 213 Scan from Document Glass ee You can scan pages of a book or a brochure from the document glass When you scan documents using the document glass place them face down For more information see Making Copies From the Document Glass on page 184 Scan to E Mail Jz m a _ gt t You can directly send scanned data as an e mail attachment You can choose destination e mail addresses from the Address Book or enter addresses directly using the numeric keypad For more information see Sending an E Mail With the Scanned Image on page 235 Scan to USB Storage Device aS DEL AD You do not need a computer to connect your USB storage device to save scanned data Insert your USB storage device into the front USB port on the printer and save scanned data directly to your USB storage device For more information see Scanning to a USB Storage Device on page 234 Scan from ADF a ae You can scan pieces of unbound paper using the Automatic Document Feeder ADF When you scan documents us
197. ing of the toner Maintenance 413 7 Place the printer at a new location and replace the paper tray 414 Maintenance Contacting Fuji Xerox This chapter includes e Technical Support on page 416 e Online Services on page 417 Contacting Fuji Xerox 415 Technical Support Fuji Xerox recommends the Customer first utilize support materials shipped with the product product diagnostics information contained on the Web and e mail support If unsuccessful to obtain services under product warranty the Customer must notify Fuji Xerox Telephone Support or its authorized service representative of the defect before the expiration of the warranty period Customer will provide appropriate assistance to Telephone Support personnel to resolve issues such as restoration of the operating system software program and drivers to their default configuration and settings verification of functionality of our products replacement of customer replaceable units clearing paper misfeeds and cleaning the unit and other prescribed routine and preventative maintenance If the Customer s product contains features that enable Fuji Xerox or its authorized service representative to diagnose and repair problems with the product remotely we may request that the Customer allow such remote access to the product 416 Contacting Fuji Xerox Online Services You can find detail Product and Consumable warranty information and activate your warranty by
198. ing the ADF load them face up For more information see Making Copies From the Automatic Document Feeder ADF on page 186 Product Features 29 Direct Fax from Computer You can directly send faxes from your computer using the fax driver You can select a recipient from the Phone Book PC Fax Address Book or Address Book Device Address Book or enter a name and fax number directly using the numeric keypad For more information see Sending a Fax Using the Driver Direct Fax on page 257 30 Product Features Address Book The Address Book simplifies the recipient specification You can use the Address Book on the printer as well as on the server Select the desired address or fax number from the Address Book when using the Scan to E Mail or Scan to Network feature or sending faxes For more information see Address Book Editor on page 56 Specifications This chapter includes e Copy Function on page 32 Print Function on page 34 Scan Function on page 36 Fax Function on page 37 Direct Fax Function on page 38 Specifications 31 Copy Function Type Console Memory 256 MB HDD Scanning Resolution Document glass 600 x 600 dpi Automatic Document Feeder ADF 600 x 300 dpi Printing Resolution Standard 600 x 600 dpi High Resolution 1200 x 1200 dpi When printing in high resolution mode printing speed may be reduced due to image qual
199. inter Select the desired printing options from the menus and drop down lists that are displayed NOTE On Mac OS X click Save As on the Presets menu screen to save the current printer settings You can create multiple presets and save each with its own distinctive name and printer settings To print jobs using specific printer settings click the applicable saved preset in the Presets menu Mac OS X Print Driver Printing Options The table shown below uses Mac OS X 10 6 TextEdit as an example Printing options for Mac OS X 170 Item Printing Options Copies Collated Pages Paper Size Orientation Layout Pages per Sheet Layout Direction Border Two Sided Reverse page orientation Flip horizontally Color Matching ColorSync In printer Profile Paper Handling Pages to Print Page Order Scale to fit paper size Destination Paper Size Scale down only Cover Page e Print Cover Page Cover Page Type e Billing Info Scheduler e Print Document Priority Printing Basics Item Printing Options Printer Features e 1 Detailed Settings Resolution Screen Toner Saving Mode Image Enhancement e 2 Paper Handling Duplex Paper Type Show Paper Size Type Error Summary Printing Basics 171 E Printing Custom Size Paper This section explains how to print on custom size paper using the print driver The way to load custom size paper is
200. inter When you choose Print from an application a window representing the print driver appears Select the appropriate settings for the file to print Print settings selected on the print driver have precedence over the default menu settings selected on the operator panel or the Printer Setting Utility The following procedure uses Microsoft Windows 7 WordPad as an example Clicking Preferences on the initial Print dialog box enables you to change the print settings If you are not familiar with features on the print driver window open the Help for additional information 1 2 Open the file you want to print From the file menu select Print Verify that the correct printer is selected in the dialog box Modify the print settings as needed such as the pages you want to print or the number of copies To adjust print settings not available from the first screen such as Paper Size Paper Type or Feed Orientation click Preferences The Printing Preferences dialog box appears Specify the print settings For more information click Help Click OK to close the Printing Preferences dialog box Click Print to send the job to the selected printer Printing Basics 159 E Canceling a Print Job There are several methods for canceling a print job This section includes e Canceling a Job From the Operator Panel on page 160 e Canceling a Job From the Computer Windows on page 160 Canceling a Job From the Operator Panel 1 P
201. issions to create a write permission for this folder 9 Click Add 10 Search user login name by clicking Advanced or enter the user login name in the Enter the object names to select box and click Check Names to confirm Example of user login name MySelf NOTE Do not use Everyone as the user login name Select Users or Groups Select this object type Users Groups or Built in security principals Object Types From this location sm oana Enter the object names to select examples MySelf Check Names Cox Ce 11 Click OK Scanning 221 12 Click the user login name that you have just entered Select the Full Control check box This will grant you permission to send the document into this folder Permissions for MyShare po Share Permissions Group or user names Everyone MySelt Hanmer non Permissions for MySelf Deny Full Control Change Read 13 Click OK 14 Click Apply and then click OK NOTE e To add sub folders create new folders in the shared folder you have created Example Folder name MyShare Second level folder name MyPic Third level folder name John You should now see MyShare MyPic John in your directory When you are finished with creating the shared folder go to Configuring the Printer on page 228 222 Scanning For Windows Server 2003 1 Create a folder in the desired directory on your com
202. ite smoother to decrease jagged edges and enhance the visual appearance Values Off Disables the Image Enhance feature On Enables the Image Enhance feature Factory default menu setting Draft Mode Purpose To save toner by printing in the draft mode The print quality is reduced when you print in the draft mode Values Disable Does not print in the draft mode Enable Prints in the draft mode Factory default menu setting Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad 289 e Line Termination Purpose To add the line termination commands Values off The line termination command is not added CR CR LF LF FF FF Add CR The CR command is added CR CR LF CR LF FF CR FF Add LF The LF command is added CR CR LF LF LF FF FF CR XX The CR and LF commands are added CR CR LF LF CR LF FF CR FF Factory default menu setting PS Settings Use the PS Settings menu to change printer settings that only affect jobs using the PostScript Level3 Compatible printer language e PS Error Report Purpose To specify whether to print the description of errors concerning the PostScript Level3 Compatible printer language Values Off Dose not print the PS error report On Prints the PS error report Factory default menu setting e PS Job Time Out Purpose To specify the runtime of a single job using the PostScript Level3 Compatible printer language
203. ity adjustment Printing speed may also be reduced depending on documents Halftone 256 grayscale gradation Warm up Time 45 seconds or less The values are based on a room temperature of 22 C and on the factory default setting IMPORTANT It may take longer due to image quality adjustment Original Paper Size Document glass The maximum size is 215 9 x 297 mm for both sheets and books Automatic Document Feeder ADF The maximum size is 215 9 x 355 6 mm Output Paper Size Paper tray Maximum Legal Minimum 76 2 x 127 mm 3 x 5 Priority Sheet Inserter PSI Maximum Legal Minimum A5 Image loss width Top edge 4 1 mm or less bottom edge 4 1 mm or less left and right edges 4 1 mm or less Output Paper Weight Paper tray 60 163 gsm for postcard 60 190 gsm is available Priority Sheet Inserter PSI 60 163 gsm IMPORTANT Use paper recommended by Fuji Xerox Copying may not be performed correctly depending on the conditions For more information see Print Media That Can Damage Your Printer on page 134 First Copy Output Time 20 seconds for A4 Jistandard mode Reduction Enlargement Size for Size 1 1 1 3 Preset 1 0 50 1 0 70 1 0 81 1 1 00 1 1 22 1 1 41 1 2 00 Variable 1 0 25 1 4 00 1 increments 32 Specifications Continuous Copy Speed Document glass A4 30 sheets minute Measured by making 11 copies of a
204. jam occurs it may cause short circuit and eventually a fire accident 134 Printing Basics E Print Media Storage Guidelines Providing good storage conditions for your paper and other media contributes to optimum print quality Store print media in dark cool relatively dry locations Most paper items are susceptible to damage from ultraviolet UV and visible light UV radiation which is emitted by the sun and fluorescent bulbs is particularly damaging to paper items The intensity and length of exposure to visible light on paper items should be reduced as much as possible Maintain constant temperatures and relative humidity Avoid attics kitchens garages and basements for storing print media Store print media flat Print media should be stored on pallets cartons shelves or in cabinets Avoid having food or drinks in the area where print media is stored or handled Do not open sealed packages of paper until you are ready to load them into the printer Leave paper in the original packaging For most commercial cut size grades the ream wrapper contains an inner lining that protects the paper from moisture loss or gain Leave the media inside the bag until you are ready to use it reinsert unused media in the bag and reseal it for protection Some specialty media is packaged inside resealable plastic bags Printing Basics 135 Supported Print Media Using unsuitable print media may lead to paper jams poor print quali
205. ks only and close the dialog box Click Add to display Wireless network properties h Enter the setting that you will send to the printer and click OK i Click Move up to move the setting to the top of the list j Click OK to close the Wireless Network Connection Properties dialog box Printer Connection and Software Installation For Windows Vista Display Control Panel Select Network and Internet Select Network and Sharing Center Select Connect to a network Select the network and then click Connect ms o 2lo0 3 Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success For Windows Server 2008 Display Control Panel Select Network and Internet Select Network and Sharing Center Select Connect to a network Select the network and then click Connect o 20 30 Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success For Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7 Display Control Panel Select Network and Internet Select Network and Sharing Center Select Connect to a network oo 0 fF Select the network and then click Connect Printer Connection and Software Installation 103 E Setting Up the Printer for Shared Printing One way to make a new printer available for other computers on a network is to use the Software Pack CD ROM supplied with your printer Using the supplied CD is helpful in a way that it will install utilities including the SimpleMonito
206. l address when you have selected E Mail and Print for Forward Settings Prefix Dial Select whether to insert a prefix dial number Prefix Dial Num Enter a prefix dial number of up to five digits This number dials before any auto dial number is started It is useful for accessing the Private Automatic Branch Exchange PABX Discard Size Select whether to discard text or images at the bottom of a fax page when the entire page does not fit onto the output paper Selecting Auto Reduction automatically reduces the fax page to fit it onto the output paper and does not discard any images or text at the bottom of the page ECM Select whether to enable the ECM To use the ECM the remote fax machines must also support the ECM Extel Hook Thresh Select an external telephone hook detection threshold for the condition in which a telephone line is not being used odem Speed Select a fax modem speed when a fax transmission or reception error occurs Fax Activity Select whether to automatically print the Fax Activity Report after every 50 incoming and outgoing fax communications Fax Transmit Select whether to print a transmission report after every fax transmission or only when an error occurs Fax Broadcast Select whether to print a transmission report after every fax transmission to multiple destinations or only when an error occurs Region Select the region where the printer is u
207. lace the toner cartridge with a supported one See also e Replacing the Toner Cartridge on page 398 093 933 Replace the toner cartridge with a new one If you do not replace the toner cartridge print quality problems may occur See also e Replacing the Toner Cartridge on page 398 093 974 Turn off the printer check if the toner cartridge is installed correctly and then turn on the printer If this does not solve the problem contact our local representative office or authorized dealer See also e Online Services on page 417 Troubleshooting 385 386 Error Code What You Can Do 116 210 Turn off the printer and then on If this does not solve the problem contact our local 116 314 representative office or authorized dealer 116 323 See also 116 325 e Online Services on page 417 116 326 116 355 116 395 116 703 Press the x button to cancel the current job Retry when the printer does not process 116 720 any job 117 331 Turn off the printer and then on If this does not solve the problem contact our local 117 332 representative office or authorized dealer 117 333 See also 117 334 e Online Services on page 417 117 342 117 346 117 348 Retry and check the report Turn off the printer and then on If this does not solve the problem contact our local representative office or authorized dealer See also e Online Services on page 417 117 350 Open the rear cover and then close it
208. lation d 3 Confirm there are no errors displayed on the LCD panel and then click Start Installation If you see any errors click Trouble Shooting Guide and follow the instruction 4 Ifyou agree to the terms of the License Agreement click accept the terms of the license agreement to continue the installation process and then click Next 5 Check if the printer to be installed is listed in the Select Printer screen and then click Next NOTE If the printer to be installed is not listed in the Select Printer screen try either of the following steps Click Refresh to update the information Click Add Printer and then enter the details of the printer manually 6 Configure the required items on the Enter Printer Settings screen and then click Next 7 Select the software to be installed and then click Install 8 Click Finish to exit this tool The wireless configuration is complete Printer Connection and Software Installation 93 e CentreWare Internet Services 1 Select CentreWare Internet Services and then click Next 2 Follow the on screen instructions until the Check Setup screen appears Macromedia Flash Player 8 aa Easy Install Navi gt ft D E Remove ackaging material You have completed preparing the printers hardware Set Toner Cartridge Press the Start Installation button on the lower right 2 to go to the software installation procedure 3 Connect and Power ON E
209. le to attacks from the Internet We strongly recommend that you run the Network Setup Wizard to protect your computer O Use the wizard ble file sharing Recommended 5 Select Allow network users to change my files 6 Click Apply and then click OK NOTE To add sub folders create new folders in the shared folder you have created Example Folder name MyShare Second level folder name MyPic Third level folder name John You should now see MyShare MyPic John in your directory When you are finished with creating the shared folder go to Configuring the Printer on page 228 Scanning 219 For Windows XP Professional Edition 1 Create a folder in the desired directory on your computer Example of folder name MyShare and double click the folder 2 Select Folder Options from Tools File Edit View Favorites EJ te Map Network Drive Q O e I Disconnect Network Drive File and Folder Tasks i Folder Options Synchronize 2 Make a new folder Publish this Folder to the Web E2 Share this folder 3 Click View tab and then deselect the Use simple file sharing Recommended check box Folder Options General View File Types Offline Files Folder views You can apply the view such as Details or Tiles that nn you are using for this folder to all folders Apply to All Folders Reset All Folders Advanced settings Do not show hidden files and folders
210. leMonitor from the Start menu The following procedure uses Microsoft Windows 7 as an example 1 Click Start All Programs gt Fuji Xerox Fuji Xerox Printer Software for Asia Pacific gt your printer SimpleMonitor Btype for Asia Pacific The Printer Selection window appears 2 Click the name of the desired printer from the list The Printer Status window appears For details on the functions of the SimpleMonitor refer to the Help of the SimpleMonitor See also SimpleMonitor Windows Only on page 53 408 Maintenance E Checking Printer Status Through E mail When connected in a network environment where e mail exchange is available the printer can send an e mail report to specified e mail addresses containing the following information The network settings and the printer status The error status which has occurred on the printer Setting the E mail Environment Access the CentreWare Internet Services On the Properties tab configure the following settings according to your e mail environment After configuring the settings on each window always click Apply and then turn off on the printer to reboot For details on each item refer to the Help on the CentreWare Internet Services Item Item to be configured Description General Setup gt Recipient s E mail Specify up to two e mail addresses to which notices StatusMessenger Address about changes in printer status or errors are sent
211. lect Network and then press the x button Select TCP IP and then press the button Select IPv4 and then press the x button gt o 20 3 Select IP Address and then press the x button Default IP address range 169 254 xxx yyy IP Address 169 254 000 041 3 Ensure that the IP Address on your computer is assigned by DHCP r Network Connection Details Network Connection Details Property Value Connection specific DN Description LD ALH Wireless LA Physical Address kiya DHCP Enabled Yes IPv4 Address IPv4 Subnet Mask Lease Obtained Lease Expires IPv4 Default Gateway IPv4 DHCP Server IPv4 DNS Server IPv4 WINS Server NetBIOS over Tcpip En Link4ocal IPv6 Address IPv6 Default Gateway IPv6 DNS Server 4 TRTE Friday December 02 2011 5 24 21 PM Sunday December 04 2011 5 24 21 PM Yes eic tibet Lote hik H 4 Launch your web browser Printer Connection and Software Installation 97 5 Enter the IP address of the printer in the address bar and then press the Enter key The CentreWare Internet Services appears on your browser Cc Ww e eaaa SAE FUJI XEROX DocuPrint M255 z tate O General EBFUJI XEROX DocuPrint M255 z P General E E Printer Status Paper Tray Output Tray Cover Consumables Fault Status Fault Status Name DocuPrint M255 z Machine IP Address Pn Product Name FUJI XEROX DocuPrint M25
212. lect Panel from IP Address Mode and then enter the values in IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway Address 5 Click the Restart printer to apply new settings button to take effect The IP address is assigned to your printer To verify the setting display the web browser on any computer connected to the network and enter the IP address into the address bar on the browser If the IP address is set up correctly the CentreWare Internet Services appears on your browser You can also assign the IP address to the printer when installing the print drivers with installer When you use the network installation feature and the Get IP Address is set to DHCP or DHCP AutoIP on the operator panel menus you can set the IP address from 0 0 0 0 to the desired IP address on the printer selection window 70 Printer Connection and Software Installation E Verifying the IP Settings The following procedure uses Windows 7 as an example NOTE The reports and lists are all printed in English 1 Print the System Settings page 2 Look under the IPv4 heading on the System Settings page to ensure that the IP address subnet mask and gateway address are appropriate To verify if the printer is active on the network run the ping command in your computer 1 Click Start and select Search programs and files 2 Enter cmd and then press the Enter key A black window appears 3 Enter ping xx xx xx xx where xx xx xx xx is the IP address of your printer and
213. lect an option below for the type of picture you want to scan BE Color picture a Grayscale picture H Black and white picture ortext Custom Settings You can also Adjust the quality of the scanned picture 14 inches 216x 356 l Preview Escan Cancel a ey j L 4 4 Select your scanning preferences and click Adjust the quality of the scanned picture to display the Advanced Properties dialog box Select the desired properties including brightness and contrast and then click OK Click Scan to start scanning Click the Paint button gt Save as oN O A Enter a picture name and select a file format and destination to save the picture 212 Scanning Using a Scanner on the Network You can connect your printer to a network and use the Scan to Network feature of the computer for scanning This section includes e Overview on page 214 Confirming the Login name and the Password on page 216 Specifying a Destination to Store Scanned Documents on page 218 Configuring the Printer on page 228 Sending the Scanned File to the Network on page 233 Scanning 213 E Overview The Scan to Server Scan to Computer feature allows you to scan documents on the printer and send the scanned documents to a network computer using the FTP or SMB protocol _ y o lac NGS Scan amp Using FTP M S EJ Computer FTP Server m Using SMB
214. led print media Flex fan and straighten print media before you load it If a jam occurs with print media try feeding one sheet at a time through the paper tray or the Priority Sheet Inserter PSI Do not use print media that you have cut or trimmed Do not mix print media sizes weights or types in the same print media source Ensure that the recommended print surface is face up when you load print media in the paper tray or the Priority Sheet Inserter PSI Keep print media stored in an acceptable environment Do not remove the paper tray cover while printing is in progress Ensure that all cables that connect to the printer are correctly attached Overtightening the guides may cause jams See also e About Print Media on page 132 Supported Print Media on page 136 e Print Media Storage Guidelines on page 135 Troubleshooting 341 E Identifying the Location of Paper Jams AX CAUTION Do not attempt to remove a paper deeply jammed inside the product particularly a paper wrapped around the fusing unit or the heat roller Otherwise it may cause injuries or burns Switch off the product immediately and contact your local Fuji Xerox representative IMPORTANT Do not attempt to clear any jams using tools or instruments This may permanently damage the printer The following illustration shows where paper jams may occur along the print media path Sits 5 Center Output Tray Rear Cover
215. lex the sheets back and forth and then fan them Straighten the edges of the stack on a level surface 152 Printing Basics If print media are still not fed correctly add some bending to the leading edge of the print media as shown in the following illustration The amount of the bending shall be 5 mm 0 20 inches or less Printing Basics 153 4 Load print media in the PSI with the top edge first and the recommended print surface facing up stack 6 Select the paper type on the print driver if the loaded print media is not plain paper If a user specified print media is loaded in the PSI you must specify the paper size on the print driver NOTE e For details on specifying the paper size and type on the print driver refer to the Help provided for the print driver 154 Printing Basics Loading Envelopes in the Priority Sheet Inserter PSI Follow the guidelines below to load envelopes in the PSI NOTE Be sure to insert envelopes all the way in Otherwise print media that is loaded in the paper tray will be fed When you print on envelopes be sure to specify the envelope on the print driver If not specified the print image will be rotated 180 degrees If you do not load envelopes in the PSI right after they have been removed from the packaging they may bulge To avoid jams flatten them as shown below before loading them in the PSI If envelopes are still not fed correctly
216. ling Type What s this Ans Select What s this DRPD Pattem Pattem4 w What s this Company Name What s this Your Fax Number What s this FAX Settings Configure the FAX settings The values of each item are retrieved from your printer F you will not use FAX functionality check the I dont use FAX functionality checkbox and click Next L 13 Configure the fax settings if necessary NOTE If you do not intend to use the fax feature select the don t use FAX functionality check box 14 Click Next The Confirm the settings screen appears e TE Printer Setup Utility Configure Printer Confirm the settings Wireless Network Settings i SSID XXXXXXKK Type of wireless network Infrastructure Security Protocol WPA2 PSK AES Index Password P Address Settings IP Mode IPv4 IPv4 Settings Type Use Manual Address 4 Pane rae Confirm Settings Please confirm your settings Select language if you want to change the language of printer s operation panel lt Back Aen cance Printer Connection and Software Installation 81 15 16 17 18 19 20 82 Ensure that the wireless network settings are displayed and then click Apply A confirmation window appears Printer Setup Utility Restart printer for new settings to take effect SP Do you want to restart printe
217. lity NOTE The window to select a printer appears in this step when multiple print drivers are installed on your computer In this case click the name of the desired printer listed in Printer Name The Printer Setting Utility starts Click the Printer Settings Report tab Select Reports from the list at the left side of the page The Reports page appears Click the System Settings button The System Settings page is printed If the IP address is 0 0 0 0 the factory default or 169 254 xx xx an IP address has not been assigned See also e Assigning an IP Address for IPv4 Mode on page 69 72 Printer Connection and Software Installation Installing Print Drivers on Computers Running Windows You can use three types of print drivers on your printer PCL PostScript Level3 Compatible and XML Paper Specification print drivers This section provides information on the PCL print driver For information on the other drivers see the following PostScript Level3 Compatible print driver PostScript Level3 Compatible User Guide XML Paper Specification print driver Using the XML Paper Specification Print Driver on page 113 This section includes Identifying Print Driver Pre install Status for Network Connection Setup on page 74 Inserting the Software Pack CD ROM on page 75 e USB Connection Setup on page 75 e Network Connection Setup on page 76 Configuring Wireless Network Settings DocuPrint M255
218. lling Print Drivers on Computers Running Linux CUPS on page 120 When using a CD drive in a Linux environment you need to mount the drive to your system environment The command strings are mount media CD ROM The following procedure uses Windows 7 as an example 1 2 Click Installing Drivers and Software Select Network Installation and then click Next If you agree to the terms of the License Agreement click accept the terms of the license agreement to continue the installation process and then click Next Select the printer you want to install from the printer list and then click Next If the target printer is not displayed on the list click Refresh to refresh the list or click Add Printer to add a printer to the list manually You may specify the IP address and port name at this point If you have installed this printer on the server computer select I am setting up this printer on a server check box NOTE If the installer displays 0 0 0 0 when you intend to use the AutolP feature you must enter a valid IP address to continue Specify the printer settings and then click Next a Enter the printer name b If you want other users on the network to access this printer select Share this printer with other computers on the network and then enter a share name that users can identify c If you want to set a printer as the default for printing select the Set this printer as default for printing check box d If y
219. lso Changing the Power Saver Mode Settings on page 334 E Exiting the Power Saver Mode The printer automatically exits the power saver mode when it receives a print job from a computer or fax data through the telephone line Alternatively you can manually bring it back into standby mode Press any button on the operator panel in Low Power mode In Sleep mode press the Energy Saver button Whether the printer is in Low Power or Sleep mode it will take about 25 seconds for the printer to resume standby mode NOTE In Low Power mode opening and closing the rear cover will bring the printer back into standby mode When the printer is in Sleep mode all buttons on the operator panel except for the Energy Saver button do not function To use the buttons on the operator panel press the Energy Saver button to exit the power saver mode See also e Changing the Power Saver Mode Settings on page 334 Basic Operation 47 48 Basic Operation Printer Management Software Use the Software Pack CD ROM supplied with your printer to install a combination of software programs depending on your operating system This chapter includes e e Print and Scan Drivers on page 50 CentreWare Internet Services on page 51 Printer Setting Utility Windows Only on page 52 SimpleMonitor Windows Only on page 53 Launcher Windows Only on page 54 Address Book Editor on page 56 Express Scan Manager on pag
220. lues Off Makes regular one to one copies of the source documents Auto Automatically reduces the size of the source documents to print all of them on a single sheet of paper ID Card Copy Prints both sides of the ID card on a single sheet of paper in the original size Manual Reduces the size of the source documents according to the Reduce Enlarge setting and print all of them on a single sheet of paper Factory default menu setting e Margin Top Bottom Purpose To specify the value of the top and bottom margins Values 4 mm 0 2 inch Specify the value in increments of 1 mm 0 1 inch Which factory 0 50 mm 0 0 2 0 inch default menu setting displays depends on the value selected for mm inch under the System Settings menu See mm inch on page 309 for more information Factory default menu setting e Margin Left Right Purpose To specify the value of the left and right margins Values 4 mm 0 2 inch Specify the value in increments of 1 mm 0 1 inch Which factory 0 50 mm 0 0 2 0 inch default menu setting displays depends on the value selected formm inch under the System Settings menu See mm inch on page 309 for more information Factory default menu setting 320 Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad e Margin Middle Purpose To specify the value of the middle margin Values 0 mm 0 0 inch Specify the value in increments of 1 mm 0 1 inch Which factory 0 50 mm 0 0 2
221. mal Does not make the scanned image sharper or softer than the original Softer Makes the scanned image softer than the original Softest Factory default menu setting e Auto Exposure Purpose To suppress the background of the original to enhance text on the scanned image Values Off Does not suppress the background On Suppresses the background of the original to enhance text on the scanned image Factory default menu setting e Margin Top Bottom Purpose To specify the value of the top and bottom margins Values 2 mm 0 1 inch Specify the value in increments of 1 mm 0 1 inch Which factory default menu setting displays depends on the value selected for mm inch under the System Settings menu See mm inch on page 309 for more information 0 50 mm 0 0 2 0 inch Factory default menu setting e Margin Left Right Purpose To specify the value of the left and right margins Values 2 mm 0 1 inch Specify the value in increments of 1 mm 0 1 inch Which factory default menu setting displays depends on the value selected for mm inch under the System Settings menu See mm inch on page 309 for more information 0 50 mm 0 0 2 0 inch Factory default menu setting 324 Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad e Margin Middle Purpose To specify the value of the middle margin Values O mm 0 0 inch Specify the value in increments of 1 mm 0 1 inch Which facto
222. me and the Password on page 216 for details on how to add a password for your user login account 9 Confirm Login Re enter your password Password 10 Port Number Enter the port number If you are unsure you can enter the default value of 139 for SMB and 21 for FTP When you are finished with printer configuration go to Sending the Scanned File to the Network on page 233 232 Scanning E Sending the Scanned File to the Network 1 a fF WwW N Load a document s face up on the Automatic Document Feeder ADF with the top edge going in first or place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover See also e Making Copies From the Automatic Document Feeder ADF on page 186 e Making Copies From the Document Glass on page 184 Press the amp Scan button Select Scan to Network and then press the 0 button Select Scan to and then press the 0x button Select Computer Network Server FTP Or Search Address Book and then press the 0x button Computer Network Stores scanned documents on the computer using the SMB protocol Server FTP Stores scanned documents on the server using the FTP protocol Search Address Book Select the server address registered in the Address Book Select a destination to store the scanned documents and then press the on button If necessary customize scan options Press the lt j Start button to send a file containing the sca
223. memory When you are using the document glass the LCD panel displays a prompt for another page If you have more pages to send select Yes replace the page with a new one and select Continue repeat the actions for the remaining pages and press the ox button Otherwise select No and press the 0x button The printer dials the fax number stored as the speed dial number and send the fax when the remote fax machine answers E Printing the Address Book List You can review your automatic dial entries by printing the Address Book List 1 2 Press the Til System button Select Report List and then press the ox button Select Address Book and then press the ox button A list of your speed and group dial entries is printed Faxing 269 Other Ways to Fax This section includes e Using the Secure Receiving Mode on page 270 Using an Answering Machine on page 271 Using a Computer Modem on page 272 E Using the Secure Receiving Mode You may need to prevent your received faxes from unauthorized access Use the secure receiving mode to prohibit printing out all of the received faxes when the printer is unattended In the secure receiving mode all incoming faxes will be stored in the memory You can then turn off the mode to print all the stored faxes NOTE Before operation ensure that Panel Lock Set is set to Enable To turn on the secure receiving mode 1 2 oOo N O A A Press the Til System
224. ment is detected on the ADF it takes priority over the document on the document glass Contaminants on the document glass may cause black spots on the copy printout For best results clean the document glass before use For more information see Cleaning the Scanner on page 395 To make a copy from the document glass 1 Open the document cover 2 Place a single document face down on the document glass and align it with the registration guide on the top left corner of the document glass CAUTION e Do not apply excessive force to hold a thick document on the document glass It may break the glass and cause injuries 184 Copying 3 Close the document cover NOTE e Leaving the document cover open while copying may affect the copy quality and increase the toner consumption e lf you are copying a page from a book or magazine lift the document cover until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then close the document cover If the book or magazine is thicker than 20 mm start copying with the document cover open Press the 6 Copy button Customize the copy settings including the number of copies copy size and image quality See also e Customizing Copy Options on page 187 To clear the settings use the CA Clear All button 6 Press the lt gt Start button to begin copying NOTE Press the Stop button to cancel a copy job at any time while scanning a document Copying 185 Mak
225. message on the LCD panel You need to know the model of your printer and serial number See the label on the rear cover of your printer 388 Troubleshooting Getting Help This section includes LCD Panel Messages on page 389 e SimpleMonitor Alerts on page 389 e Obtaining the Product Information on page 390 We provide several automatic diagnostic tools to help you produce and maintain print quality m LCD Panel Messages The LCD panel provides you with information and troubleshooting help When an error or warning condition occurs the LCD panel displays a message informing you of the problem See also Understanding Printer Messages on page 379 E SimpleMonitor Alerts The SimpleMonitor is a tool that is included on the Software Pack CD ROM It automatically checks the printer status when you send a print job If the printer is unable to print your job the SimpleMonitor automatically displays an alert on your computer screen to let you know that the printer needs attention Troubleshooting 389 E Obtaining the Product Information Obtaining the Latest Print Driver The latest print driver can be obtained by downloading it from our web site NOTE The communication fee shall be borne by users 1 On your print driver s Properties dialog box click the Configuration tab and then click About 2 Click Fuji Xerox Web Site Your web browser starts and our web site is displayed 3 Follow the instructions
226. mmodate print media within the following dimensions Width 76 2 215 9 mm 3 00 8 50 inches e Length 127 0 355 6 mm 5 00 14 00 inches The Priority Sheet Inserter PSI can accommodate print media within the following dimensions e Width 76 2 215 9 mm 3 00 8 50 inches e Length 210 0 355 6 mm 8 20 14 00 inches Printing Basics 143 E Loading Print Media in the Paper Tray NOTE When you are printing on any print media that is smaller than the A5 size paper be sure to load it in the paper tray To avoid paper jams do not remove the paper tray while printing is in progress Use only laser print media Do not use ink jet paper on your printer e For manually loading print media for duplex 2 sided printing see Manual Duplex Printing PCL Print Driver Only on page 162 Do not wipe the pink tinted grease off as doing so may cause paper to misfeed 1 Pull the paper tray out of the printer about 200 mm Hold the tray with both hands remove it from the printer and then remove the paper tray cover from the paper tray 144 Printing Basics 2 Hold the paper tray end with one hand push and hold the paper tray extension lever with the other hand and then extend the tray to your desired length NOTE The paper tray can accommodate a stack of A5 paper by default and is designed to extend in two lengths To load A4 paper media extend the paper tray to the mid length To
227. ms contact our Customer Support Center or your dealer 2 Mac OS X 10 4 11 10 5 8 10 6 10 7 are supported 3 Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 6 Desktop x86 SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10 11 x86 and Ubuntu 8 10 x86 are supported Connectivity DocuPrint M255 df Standard Ethernet 100BASE TX 10BASE T USB 2 0 DocuPrint M255 z Standard Ethernet 100BASE TX 10BASE T USB 2 0 IEEE802 11b g Specifications 35 Scan Function 36 Type Color scanner Original Paper Size Same as the Copy Function Scanning Resolution 1200 x 1200 dpi 600 x 600 dpi 300 x 300 dpi 200 x 200 dpi Scanning Halftone Monochrome 1 bit for the line art image 8 bit for the gray scale image Color 24 bit Connectivity DocuPrint M255 df Standard Ethernet 100BASE TX 10BASE T USB 2 0 DocuPrint M255 z Standard Ethernet 100BASE TX 10BASE T USB 2 0 IEEE802 11b g Scan to PC Protocol TCP IP SMB FTP Operating System Microsoft Windows XP Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Microsoft Windows Vista Microsoft Windows 7 Microsoft Windows XP x64 Microsoft Windows Server 2003 x64 Microsoft Windows Server 2008 x64 Microsoft Windows Vista x64 Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 x64 Microsoft Windows 7 x64 Mac OS X 10 4 11 10 5 8 10 6 10 7 IMPORTANT For the latest information about the su
228. n Select Admin Menu and then press the 0 button Select Fax Settings and then press the 0x button Select the desired menu item and then press the on button Select the desired setting or enter the value using the numeric keypad Press the 0x button to save the selection Repeat steps 4 to 6 as needed to change the setting oN O A A O N To quit changing settings keep pressing the lt gt Back button until the LCD panel shows Select Function 274 Faxing E Available Fax Options You can use the following options for configuring the fax feature of your printer Option Description Ans Select TEL Mode The printer does not automatically receive faxes To receive an incoming fax you need to pick up the handset of the connected external telephone press the 2 digit code and press the lt gt Start button FAX Mode This option is selected by default and the printer automatically receives faxes EL FAX Mode When the printer receives an incoming fax the external telephone rings for the period of time specified for Auto Ans TEL FAX and then the printer automatically receives the fax If an incoming call is not a fax the printer beeps from the internal speaker indicating that the call is a telephone call Ans FAX Mode The printer shares the telephone line with an answering machine and monitors the line for a fax tone It will pick up an incoming call if it hears a
229. n eyes and mouth as well as inhalation OD If toner spills onto your skin or clothing wash it off with soap and water If you get toner particles in your eyes wash it out with plenty of water for at least 15 minutes until irritation is gone Consult a physician if necessary If you inhale toner particles move to a fresh air location and rinse your mouth with water If you swallow toner spit it out rinse your mouth with water drink plenty of water and consult a physician immediately Safety Notes 23 E Warning and Caution Labels Always follow all warning instructions marked on or supplied with this product To avoid the risk of burn injuries and electric shock never touch the area with the High Temperature or High Voltage marks on NOTE The following shows the toner cartridge label for DocuPrint M255 z AX CAUTION Do not stare at light It may cause discomfort or irritation to your eyes AN GE TW AMORA VS AR ESS RA SRE o AR SYFOHERDOBUTSKAV BORNPRHORRCGSCEMGOET AER AABRRHEKR URERRARSR BSR AF VAS 27 Bo FIle A Ne FE SSO AN0 B ASUCL A xanrasszi9 waasnasudslW nsazarainlnvaandoeszArevhosaae7 24 LA fo ensure optimum quality and ue erformance of your printer we recommend only using genuine Fuji Xerox toner FUJI Xerox ie Not for sale or use in Japan A 750 ta A CAUTION JJIAIITISII Safety Notes Environment For environmental protection and efficient use of resou
230. n Name in the Add Printer dialog box and then click Continue You can optionally specify the location and description of the printer as additional information If you want to share the printer select the Share This Printer check box For a USB printer connected to a computer running the Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 Desktop x86 a Select FUJI XEROX DocuPrint M255 X FUJI XEROX DocuPrint M255 X from the Local Printers menu and then click Continue b Enter the name of the printer in Name in the Add Printer dialog box and then click Continue You can optionally specify the location and description of the printer as additional information If you want to share the printer select the Share This Printer check box Select FX from the Make menu and then click Continue 122 Printer Connection and Software Installation 8 Select FX DocuPrint M255 xxx from the Model menu and then click Add Printer The setup is complete You can optionally specify the default options settings of the printer e For SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 11 x86 1 Select Computer gt More Applications and then select YaST on the Application Browser 2 Enter the administrator password YaST Control Center is activated 3 Select Hardware on YaST Control Center and then select Printer The Printer Configurations dialog box appears 4 Select either of the following according to the type of your printer connection For a network printer a Click
231. n interval between transmission attempts Number of Redial Specify the number of redial attempts to make when the destination fax number is busy If you specify 0 the printer will not redial Redial Delay Specify an interval between redial attempts Junk Fax Filter Select whether to reject faxes from the numbers that are not included in the Address Book Remote Receive Select whether to use this option With this option enabled you can pick up the handset and enter the remote receive code to receive a fax Remote Rev Tone Specify the remote receive code in two digits for the Remote Receive option Faxing 275 276 Option Description Send Header Select whether to print the sender information on the header of faxes Company Name Enter a sender name of up to 30 alphanumeric characters Your Fax Number Enter the fax number of the printer to be printed on the header of faxes Fax Cover Page Select whether to attach a cover page to faxes DRPD Pattern Select a ring pattern for the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection DRPD service 2 Sided Print Select whether to print on either side of the paper Forward Settings Select how you want to forward received faxes Fax Fwd Number Enter the forwarding fax number when you have selected Forward Only or Forward and Print for Forward Settings Fax Fwd E Mail Enter the forwarding e mai
232. n to begin copying Copying E Paper Size You can specify the output paper size 1 Load a document s face up on the Automatic Document Feeder ADF with the top edge going in first or place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover See also e Making Copies From the Automatic Document Feeder ADF on page 186 e Making Copies From the Document Glass on page 184 Press the amp Copy button Select Paper Size and then press the or button Select the desired setting and then press the ox button NOTE To change the default Paper Size settings change the Paper Size settings of Paper Tray under Tray Settings A4 210x297mm A5 148x210mm B5 182x257mm Letter 8 5x11 Folio 8 5x13 Legal 8 5x14 Executive Statement 10Env 4 125x9 5 onarch Env Monarch Env L DL Env 110x220mm DL Env L C5 Env 162x229mm Postcard JPN 148x100mm W Postcard JPN 148x200mm Env Yougata Env Yougata Li Env Yougata Env Yougata Env Yougata 2 2 3 Env Yougata 3L 4 6 3 Env Younaga Env Nagagata 3 Env Nagagata 4 Env Kakugata 3 Copying 189 190 New Custom Size Portrait Y 297mm 11 7inch 127mm 355mm 5 0inch 14 0inch Landscape X 210mm 8 3inch 77mm 215mm 3 0inch 8 5inch Factor
233. name that you have just entered Select the Full Control check box This will grant you permission to send the document to this folder Meee ia Share Permissions Group or user names R Everyone MySetr ukini ayasi Pemissions for MySelf Allow Deny Full Control iv al Change v Read T Leam about access control and permissions ok _Cancet_ Apy Click OK Click OK to exit the Advanced Sharing dialog box Scanning 13 Click Close NOTE To add sub folders create new folders in the shared folder you have created Example Folder name MyShare Second level folder name MyPic Third level folder name John You should now see MyShare MyPic John in your directory When you are finished with creating the shared folder go to Configuring the Printer on page 228 e For Mac OS X 10 4 1 2 Select Home from the Go menu Double click Public Create a folder Example of folder name MyShare NOTE Note down the folder name as you need to use this name in the next setting procedure Open System Preferences and then click Sharing Select the Personal File Sharing check box and the Windows Sharing check box e For Mac OS X 10 5 10 6 10 7 1 O oOo NOORA W ND oO N Create a folder in the desired directory on your computer Example of folder name MyShare NOTE Note do
234. nd then click Next Follow the on screen instructions and then click Next The Printer Setup Utility screen appears Select the printer to be configured in the Select Printer screen and then click Next NOTE e Ifthe printer to be configured is not listed in the Select Printer screen try the following steps Click Refresh to update the information Click Enter IP Address and then enter the IP address of your printer Enter the SSID Fig Printer Setup Utility can ES Configure Printer Wireless Network Settings ssi l What s this Wireless Settings Type of wireless network What s this Infrastructure Ad Hoc The SSID and wireless settings on your printer must match your network s Securty wireless settings to function properly What s this Once the SSID is changed on this Protocol EEEN printer you will lose contact with the Printer until you change the SSID on your computer to match the new SSID L on the printer E Show input es L d Select Type of wireless network Printer Connection and Software Installation 6 Configure the security setting and then click Next The IP Address Settings screen appears E Ti Printer Setup Utility ci o Configure Printer IP Address Settings IP Mode iPv4 x What s this IP Address Setti IPv4 Settings Settings Type Use Manual Address m What s this IP Address W H In case of IPv4 choose DHCP f a server router or other de
235. net network 1 Ensure that the printer computer and any other connected devices have been turned off and all cables have been disconnected 2 Connect one end of an Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port on the rear of the printer and the other end to a LAN drop or hub Ethernet port NOTE Do not connect the Ethernet cable when you intend to use the wireless network feature of the DocuPrint M255 z model See also Configuring Wireless Network Settings DocuPrint M255 z only on page 77 66 Printer Connection and Software Installation Setting the IP Address This section includes TCP IP and IP Addresses on page 67 e Automatically Setting the Printer s IP Address on page 67 e Dynamic Methods of Setting the Printer s IP Address on page 68 Assigning an IP Address for IPv4 Mode on page 69 Verifying the IP Settings on page 71 Printing and Checking the System Settings Page on page 71 E TCP IP and IP Addresses If your computer is on a large network contact your network administrator for the appropriate TCP IP addresses and additional system settings information If you are creating your own small Local Area Network or connecting the printer directly to your computer using Ethernet follow the procedure for automatically setting the printer s IP address Computers and printers primarily use TCP IP protocols to communicate over an Ethernet network With TCP IP protocols each printer and computer mu
236. nfirming the Login name and the Password When Using the SMB The Scan to Server Scan to Computer feature requires a user login account with a valid and non empty password for authentication Confirm the login user name and the password a gt Switch User If you do not use a password for your user login you need to create a password for your user login account with the following procedure For Windows XP 1 Click start Control Panel User Accounts 2 Click Change an account 3 Select your account 4 Click Create a password and add in a password for your user login account For Windows Server 2003 1 Click Start Administrative Tools Computer Management 2 Click Local Users and Groups 3 Double click Users 4 Right click your account and then select Set Password NOTE When an alert message appears confirm the message and then click Proceed 5 Add in a password for your user login account 216 Scanning e For Windows Vista and Windows 7 1 Click Start Control Panel 2 Click User Accounts and Family Safety 3 Click User Accounts 4 Click Create a password for your account and add in a password for your user login account e For Windows Server 2008 and Windows Server 2008 R2 1 Click Start Control Panel 2 Click User Accounts 3 Click User Accounts 4 Click Create a password for your account and add in a password for your user login account e For Mac OS X 10 4 10 5 10 6
237. ng 2 After the even pages are printed pull out the paper tray and remove the paper tray cover See also Loading Print Media in the Paper Tray on page 144 3 Remove the paper stack from the center output tray and load it into the paper tray with the blank surface facing up NOTE e Warped or curled prints can cause paper jams Straighten them before setting them Printing Basics 163 4 Replace the paper tray cover insert the paper tray into the printer and then press the button Pages are printed in the order of page 1 rear of page 2 page 3 rear of page 4 and then page 5 rear of page 6 164 Printing Basics e Loading Print Media in the Priority Sheet Inserter PSI 1 First print the even pages rear sides For a six page document rear sides are printed in the order of page 6 page 4 then page 2 When printing of the even pages is complete the Data LED lights and the LCD panel shows the following OIS O2iL WkWresineeie MSSm GOULD UE ms Omelachy Press OK Button to Continue Printing 2 After the even pages are printed remove the paper stack from the center output tray NOTE Warped or curled prints can cause paper jams Straighten them before setting them 3 Load the paper stack back into the PSI and then press the button Pages are printed in order of page 1 rear of page 2 page 3 rear of page 4 and then page 5 rear of page 6 Printing Basics 165 E Dir
238. ng Page Yield Printer Status and Action 093 426 Approx 500 pages The toner cartridge has become low Prepare a new one 093 933 The toner cartridge has become empty Replace the old toner cartridge with a new one This warning appears only when a genuine toner cartridge is used i e Non Genuine Mode is disabled IMPORTANT When placing a used toner cartridge on the floor or on a table place a few sheets of paper under the toner cartridge to catch any toner that may spill Do not reuse old toner cartridges that you remove from the printer Doing so can impair print quality Do not shake or pound used toner cartridges The remaining toner may spill We recommend you use up a toner cartridge within one year after you remove it from the packaging Maintenance 399 E Removing the Toner Cartridge 1 Turn off the printer 2 Open the front cover 4 Spread a few sheets of paper on the floor or table where you want to place the removed toner cartridge 400 Maintenance 5 Turn the toner cartridge counterclockwise to unlock 6 Pull the toner cartridge out IMPORTANT Do not touch the shutter of the used toner cartridge Always pull the toner cartridge out slowly so you do not spill any toner 7 Place the toner cartridge slowly on the sheets of paper you spread in step 4 Maintenance 401 E Installing a Toner Cartridge 1 Unpack a new toner cartridge and shake it five times to distribute the
239. ng appears A value can be e A phrase or word to describe a setting A numerical value that can be changed An On or Off setting 4 Repeat step 3 until you reach the desired value Press the button to apply the selected value 6 To continue changing the printer settings use the gt Back button to ascend the operator panel menus to one of the top menus and follow steps 2 through 5 To quit changing the printer settings keep pressing the amp Back button until the LCD panel shows Select Function 176 Printing Basics e Using the Printer Setting Utility Windows Only The following procedure uses Windows 7 as an example NOTE 1 4 Once one value is selected it will be active until a new value is applied or the default value is restored Driver settings may have precedence over the changes previously made and you may have to change the printer settings Click Start All Programs Fuji Xerox Fuji Xerox Printer Software for Asia Pacific gt your printer Printer Setting Utility NOTE The window to select a printer appears in this step when multiple print drivers are installed on your computer In this case click the name of the desired printer listed in Printer Name The Printer Setting Utility starts Click the Printer Maintenance tab Select the desired menu item Each menu item has a list of values A value can be A phrase or word to describe a setting A numerical value th
240. ng this product always switch off and unplug it Access to a live machine interior may cause electric shock Do not unplug or re plug this product with the switch on Plugging and unplugging a live connector may deform the plug and generate heat and eventually cause a fire accident 9 Hold the plug not the cord when unplugging this product or it may damage the cord and cause electric shock or a fire accident Safety Notes Switch off and unplug the product when it i e fax function is not used over weekends or long holidays Please note that it cannot receive fax message during switch off oe Once a month switch off this product and check if e the power cord is plugged firmly into an electrical outlet e the plug is not excessively heated rusted or bent e the plug and electrical outlet are free of dust and e the power cord is not cracked or worn down Once you notice any unusual condition switch off and unplug this product first and contact your local Fuji Xerox representative Safety Notes 17 E Machine Installation A WARNING Friction or excessive pressure may generate heat and eventually cause electric shock or a fire Q Do not locate this product where people might step on or trip over the power cord accident Z CAUTION Never locate this product in the following places S e Near radiators or any other heat sources e Near volatile flammable materials such as curtains e
241. nned document s Scanning 233 Scanning to a USB Storage Device The Scan to USB Memory feature allows you to scan documents and save the scanned data to a USB storage device To scan documents and save them follow the steps below 1 ao a Aa Q 234 Load a document s face up on the Automatic Document Feeder ADF with the top edge going in first or place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover See also e Making Copies From the Automatic Document Feeder ADF on page 186 e Making Copies From the Document Glass on page 184 Insert a USB storage device into the front USB port on your printer USB Memory appears Select Scan to and then press the 0x button Select Save to USB Drive ora folder to save a file and then press the ox button Select scanning options as required Press the lt j Start button When the scan is complete the LCD panel displays a prompt for another page Select No or Yes and then press the 0x button If you have selected Yes select Continue or Cancel and then press the ox button Scanning Sending an E Mail With the Scanned Image When sending an e mail with the scanned image from your printer it would be easier if you had an address book You can create this address book with the CentreWare Internet Services See Adding an Entry to the Address Book on page 235 for more information E Adding an Entry to the Address Book The
242. nt face down on the document glass and close the document cover See also e Making Copies From the Automatic Document Feeder ADF on page 186 e Making Copies From the Document Glass on page 184 Press the 6 Copy button Select N Up and then press the 0X button Copying 4 Select the desired setting and then press the ox button 5 oft Makes regular one to one copies of the source documents Auto Automatically reduces the size of the source documents to print all of them on a single sheet of paper ID Card Copy Prints both sides of the ID card on a single sheet of paper in the original size Manual Reduces the size of the source documents according to the Reduce Enlarge setting and print all of them on a single sheet of paper Factory default menu setting If necessary customize other copy options including the number of copies copy size only for Off or Manual and image quality See also e Customizing Copy Options on page 187 Press the lt gt Start button to begin copying When you are using the document glass and N Up is set to Auto ID Card Copy or Manual the LCD panel displays a prompt for another page Select Yes or No and then press the or button If you have selected Yes select Continue or Cancel and then press the ox button Copying 201 E Margin Top Bottom You can specify the top and bottom margins of the copy 1 202 Load
243. o e Loading Print Media on page 143 Turn the print media over or around and try printing again to see if feeding improves Do not mix print media types Do not mix print media sizes Remove the top and bottom curled sheets of a ream before loading the print media Load a print media source only when it is empty The envelope is creased after printing Ensure that the envelope is loaded in the paper tray as instructed in Loading Envelopes in the Paper Tray on page 148 Page breaks in unexpected places Increase the value for Job Time Out in the System Settings menu that is on the Printer Maintenance tab in the Printer Setting Utility Increase the time out value in the Protocol Settings menu on the CentreWare Internet Services Troubleshooting 359 Problem Action Print media does not stack neatly Turn the print media stack over in the Priority Sheet Inserter PSI and in the center output tray the paper tray Printer does not duplex pages Select Flip on Short Edge or Flip on Long Edge from the Duplex menu on the Paper Output tab of the print driver 360 Troubleshooting Print Quality Problems This section includes The Output Is Too Light on page 362 Toner Smears or Print Comes Off Stain on Back Side on page 363 Random Spots Blurred Images on page 364 The Entire Output Is Blank on page 364 Streaks Appear on the Output on page 365 Mottle on page 365
244. o display the version of the controller Adjust BTR Purpose To specify a voltage of the transfer roller BTR for optimum printing of each paper type To lower the voltage specify a negative value To increase specify a positive value The default settings may not yield the best output on all paper types If you see mottles on the print output try increasing the voltage If you see white spots on the print output try decreasing the voltage NOTE The print quality depends on the values you select for this menu item Values Plain 0 e Light Card O 3 3 Labels O 3 s3 Recycled O 3 3 Envelope 0 a3 3 Postcard 0x 3 3 Factory default menu setting 310 Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad e Adjust Fusing Unit Purpose To specify a temperature of the fusing unit for optimum printing of each paper type To lower the temperature specify a negative value To increase specify a positive value The default settings may not yield the best output on all paper types When the printed paper has curled try lowering the temperature When the toner does not fuse on the paper properly try increasing the temperature NOTE The print quality depends on the values you select for this menu item Values Plain O ots Light Card O 33 5 3 Labels O 3 3 Recycled o 3 Envelope O 430553 Postcard
245. ogress e g a fax transmission or reception to complete Troubleshooting 373 Problem Action Blank areas appear at the bottom of each page or on other pages with a small strip of text at the top You may have chosen the wrong paper settings in the user option setting Correct the paper settings See also Tray Settings on page 328 374 The printer will not send or receive faxes Ensure that the region is set correctly 1Press the i System button 2 Select Admin Menu and then press the button 3 Select Fax Settings and then press the button 4 Select Region and then press the button 5 When the setting is correct press the lt gt Back button to return to the previous screen To change the setting select the correct region and then press the x button Select Yes to reboot the printer Check that the phone line is connected properly See also Connecting the Telephone Line on page 244 An error often occurs during a fax transmission or reception Reduce the modem speed 1Press the i System button 2 Select Admin Menu and then press the button 3 Select Fax Settings and then press the button 4 Select Modem Speed and then press the button 5 Select the desired menu item and then press the button Troubleshooting Scanning Problems Problem Action The scanner does not work Ensure that you place the doc
246. olve If a problem occurs with your printer check each of the following The power cord is connected to the printer and to a properly grounded electrical outlet The printer is turned on e The electrical outlet is not turned off at any switch or breaker Other electrical equipment plugged into the outlet is working e When the DocuPrint M255 z model is connected to a wireless network an Ethernet cable should be unplugged from the printer If you have checked all of the above and still have a problem turn off the printer wait for 10 seconds and then turn on the printer This often fixes the problem Troubleshooting 357 Display Problems 358 Problem Action After the printer is turned on the display on the LCD panel is blank keeps showing Please wait or the back light is not lit Turn off the printer wait for 10 seconds and turn on the printer Self Test Message appears on the LCD panel When the test is completed Select Function is displayed Menu settings changed from the operator panel have no effect Settings in the software program the print driver or the printer utilities have precedence over the settings made on the operator panel Change the menu settings from the print driver the printer utilities or the software program instead of the operator panel Troubleshooting Printing Problems Problem Action Job did not print or incorrect characters prin
247. om the Document Glass on page 184 Press the 3 Copy button Select Lighten Darken and then press the 0x button Select the desired setting and then press the 0x button Lighten2 Makes the copy lighter than the source document Works well with Lighten dark print Normal Works well with standard type or printed documents Darkenl Makes the copy darker than the source document Works well with Parken light print or faint pencil markings Factory default menu setting If necessary customize other copy options including the number of copies copy size and image quality See also e Customizing Copy Options on page 187 Press the lt gt Start button to begin copying Copying E Sharpness You can adjust the sharpness to make the copy sharper or softer than the source document 1 Load a document s face up on the Automatic Document Feeder ADF with the top edge going in first or place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover See also e Making Copies From the Automatic Document Feeder ADF on page 186 e Making Copies From the Document Glass on page 184 Press the 6 Copy button Select Sharpness and then press the 0 button Select the desired setting and then press the ox button Sharpest Makes the copy sharper than the source document Sharper Normal Keeps the sharpness of the source document as it is Softer M
248. on Genuine Mode page of the Printer Maintenance tab of the Printer Setting Utility This section includes e Using the Operator Panel on page 391 e Using the Printer Setting Utility Windows Only on page 392 E Using the Operator Panel NOTE Before starting the operation described below confirm that the LCD panel shows Select Function Press the Ll System button Select Admin Menu and then press the button Select Maintenance and then press the button Select Non Genuine Mode and then press the button Select Toner and then press the button Select On and then press the button Nn oO oa FB WO DN Press the button until the top page is displayed The printer switches to Non Genuine Mode Troubleshooting 391 E Using the Printer Setting Utility Windows Only The following procedure uses Windows 7 as an example 1 Click Start gt All Programs gt Fuji Xerox Fuji Xerox Printer Software for Asia Pacific gt your printer Printer Setting Utility NOTE The window to select a printer appears in this step when multiple print drivers are installed on your computer In this case click the name of the desired printer listed in Printer Name The Printer Setting Utility starts 2 Click the Printer Maintenance tab 3 Select Non Genuine Mode from the list at the left side of the page The Non Genuine Mode page is displayed 4 Select the check box next to On and then cli
249. on the web site and download an appropriate print driver NOTE The URL of the driver download service page is as follows http www fujixeroxprinters com For the latest information about the print driver features refer to the Help provided for the print driver Updating the Printer s Firmware Our web site also provides a tool that allows you to update the printer s firmware software embedded within the printer from your computer The latest firmware and updating tool can be downloaded from the following URL Follow the instructions on the web site and download the correct firmware update http www fujixeroxprinters com NOTE The communication fee shall be borne by users 390 Troubleshooting Enabling Non Genuine Mode When toner within the toner cartridge is empty the message 093 933 appears When you want to use the printer in Non Genuine Mode enable Non Genuine Mode and replace the toner cartridge IMPORTANT If you use the printer in Non Genuine Mode the performance of the printer may not be at its optimum And any problems that may arise from the use of Non Genuine Mode are not covered by our quality guarantee The continuous use of Non Genuine Mode can also cause the printer to break down and any repair charges for such break down will be incurred by users NOTE To disable Non Genuine Mode select Off for Toner of Non Genuine Mode on the operator panel or clear the check box next to On on the N
250. ones off Disables all the alert tones in Sets the volume of all the alert tones at once iddle ax Factory default menu setting 308 Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad e mm inch Purpose To specify the measurement unit after the numeric value displayed on the operator panel Values Millimeters mm Inches Factory default menu setting e 2 Sided Report Purpose To specify whether to print a report on either side of paper Values 2 Sided Prints a report on either side of paper 1 Sided Prints a report on the single side of paper Factory default menu setting e Low Toner Alert Msg Purpose To specify whether to show the alert message when the toner is low Values Off Does not show the alert message when the toner is low On Shows the alert message when the toner is low Factory default menu setting e Power On Wizard Purpose To perform initial settings for the printer See also e Setting Initial Settings on the Operator Panel on page 45 Values Yes Performs the initial settings for the printer No Does not perform the initial settings for the printer Factory default menu setting Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad 309 Maintenance Use the Maintenance menu to adjust print settings for each paper type initialize the Non Volatile Memory NVM and change the toner cartridge settings F W Version Purpose T
251. opper and then close the document cover In case the book or magazine is thicker than 20 mm start faxing with the document cover open 250 Faxing E Resolution You can specify the resolution level to be used for fax transmission 1 Press the Fax button 2 Select Resolution and then press the 0x button 3 Select the desired menu item and then press the ox button Standard Suitable for documents with normal sized characters Fine Suitable for documents containing small characters or thin lines or documents printed with a dot matrix printer SuperFine 203dpi Suitable for documents containing extremely fine details The SuperFine 203dpi mode is effective only when the remote fax machine supports the super fine resolution See the notes below SuperFine 406dpi Suitable for documents containing photographic images Factory default menu setting NOTE e Faxes scanned and transmitted in the SuperFine 203dpi mode are received at the highest resolution of the remote machine E Document Type You can select the default document type for the current fax job 1 Press the Fax button 2 Select Document Type and then press the ox button 3 Select the desired setting and then press the ox button Text Suitable for documents with text Photo Suitable for documents with photos Factory default menu setting Faxing 251 E Lighten Darken you can adjust the contrast
252. or more information Landscape X 210mm 8 3inch Specifies the width of the custom size paper Which factory default menu setting displays 77mm depends on the value selected formm inch dt 5am 4 0ineh under the System Settings menu See mm 8 5inch inch on page 309 for more information Factory default menu setting Orientation Purpose To specify how text and graphics are oriented on the page Values Portrait Prints text and graphics parallel to the short edge of the paper Landscape Prints text and graphics parallel to the long edge of the paper Factory default menu setting e 2 Sided Purpose To specify whether to print on either side of paper Values 2 Sided Print oOff Does not print on either side of paper On Prints on either side of paper Binding Edge Flip Long Prints on either side of paper to be bound on the long edge Edge Flip Short Prints on either side of paper to be bound on the short edge Edge Factory default menu setting 286 Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad Font Purpose To select the default font from the fonts installed on the printer Values Courier AlbertusMd ITCBookmanDb CGTimes AlbertusxXb ITCBookmanLtIt CGTimesBd Arial ITCBookmanDbIt CGTimesIt ArialBd NwCentSchlbkRmn CGTimesBdlIt ArialIt NwCentSchlbkBd
253. or more information click the Help button Scanning 231 4 Server Name IP Enter the name or IP address of the FTP server or your computer Address The following are examples e For Computer Server name myhost IP address 192 168 1 100 e For Server Server name myhost example com myhost host name example com domain name IP address 192 168 1 100 5 Share Name For Computer only Enter the name of the shared folder on your computer 6 Path For Computer To store scanned documents simply in the shared folder specified for Share Name leave this box blank To store scanned documents in a subfolder within the shared folder enter the path to the subfolder as shown in the example below Example Shared folder name MyShare Second level folder name MyPic Third level folder name John You should now see MyShare MyPic John in your directory MyShare Shared folder L MyPic L John In this case enter for Path as follows MyPic John For Server Enter the path to the FTP server where you want to store scanned documents 7 Login Name Enter the user account name that has access to the shared folder on your computer or the FTP server 8 Login Password Enter the password for the above login name NOTE You cannot use an empty password for the Scan to Server Scan to Computer feature Ensure that you have a valid password for the user login account See Confirming the Login na
254. orce to hold thick document on the document glass It may break the glass and cause injuries Ventilate well during extended operation or mass copying It may affect the office air environment due to odor such as ozone in a poorly ventilated room Provide proper ventilation to ensure the comfortable and safe environment 22 Safety Notes E Consumable A WARNING OD Store all consumables in accordance with the instructions given on its package or container OD Use a broom or a wet cloth to wipe off spilled toner Never use a vacuum cleaner for the spills It may catch fire by electric sparks inside the vacuum cleaner and cause explosion If you spill a large volume of toner contact your local Fuji Xerox representative S Never throw a toner cartridge into an open flame Remaining toner in the cartridge may catch fire and cause burn injuries or explosion If you have a used toner cartridge no longer needed contact your local Fuji Xerox representative for its disposal Z CAUTION OD Keep drum cartridges or drum if not a cartridge type and toner cartridges out of the reach of children If a child accidentally swallows toner spit it out rinse mouth with water drink water and consult a physician immediately OD When replacing drum cartridges or drum if not a cartridge type and toner cartridges be careful not to spill the toner In case of any toner spills avoid contact with clothes ski
255. ord required to use the Copy Fax Password and Scan functions and the Print from USB Memory feature Factory default menu setting Displayed only when any of the Service Lock items is set to Password Locked e Secure Receive Purpose To specify whether to require a password to print incoming faxes and to set or change the password When Secure Receive Set is set to Enable the printer stores incoming faxes and prints them when the correct password is entered on the operator panel NOTE You can access to the items under Secure Receive only when Panel Lock Set is set to Enable Values Secure Receive Disable Does not require a password to print incoming faxes Pee Enable Requires a password to print incoming faxes Change 0000 9999 Sets or changes the password required to print incoming Password faxes Factory default menu setting Not displayed when Secure Receive Set is setto Disable e Software Download Purpose To install or discard the software data downloaded and sent by the connected computer Values Disable Discards the downloaded software data to maximize data security Enable Installs the downloaded software data Factory default menu setting Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad 315 Scan to E Mail Use the Scan to E Mail menu to edit the transmission source e Edit From Field Purpose To enable or disable editing of the transmission s
256. original position 5 Close the rear cover Troubleshooting 350 E Clearing Paper Jams From the Rear of the Printer IMPORTANT To prevent electric shock always turn off the printer and disconnect the power cord from the grounded outlet before performing maintenance To avoid burns do not clear paper jams immediately after printing The fusing unit becomes extremely hot during use Protect the OPC drum against bright light If the rear cover is left open for more than three minutes print quality may deteriorate NOTE To resolve the error displayed on the LCD panel you must clear all print media from the print media path 1 Push the rear cover handle and open the rear cover fl oe LZ Z KS Troubleshooting 351 4 Lower the levers to the original position If the error is not resolved there may be a piece of paper remaining inside the printer Use the following procedure to clear the jam Load print media in the paper tray or the Priority Sheet Inserter PSI if there is no print media Press the CA Clear All button on the operator panel for three seconds The print media is fed to push out the jammed paper 352 Troubleshooting E Clearing Paper Jams From the Center Output Tray IMPORTANT To prevent electric shock always turn off the printer and disconnect the power cord from the grounded outlet before performing maintenance To avoid burns do not clear paper jams
257. ou want to set a printer as the default for scanning select the Set this printer as default for scanning check box e If you want to install the fax driver select the Install fax driver check box Select the software and documentation you want to install and then click Install You can specify folders in which to install the software and documentation To change the folders click Browse Click Finish to exit the wizard 76 Printer Connection and Software Installation E Configuring Wireless Network Settings DocuPrint M255 z only You can configure wireless network settings with the Easy Install Navi IMPORTANT Be sure to obtain the SSID and security information from a system administrator in advance when you use a communications standard other than WPS to configure wireless network settings Ensure that the Ethernet cable has been disconnected from the printer before you configure the wireless network settings The wireless network specifications are described below Item Specification Connectivity Wireless Connectivity Standard IEEE 802 11b g compliant Bandwidth 2 4 GHz Data Transfer Rate IEEE 802 11b mode 11 5 5 2 1 Mbps IEEE 802 11g mode 54 48 36 24 18 12 9 6 Mbps Security 64 40 bit key 128 104 bit key WEP WPA PSK TKIP AES WPA2 PSK AES IEEE802 1x attestation function of WPA 1x non corresponds Certifications Wi Fi WPA2 0 Personal Wi Fi Protected Setup W
258. ould be emptied before it holds more than 50 sheets or your source documents may be damaged NOTE To ensure the best scan quality especially for gray scale images use the document glass instead of the ADF You cannot load the following documents on the ADF Be sure to place them on the document glass H Curled documents Pre punched paper Lightweight documents y Folded creased or torn documents S Cut and paste documents Carbon paper 1 Load a document s face up on the ADF with the top edge going in first Then adjust the document guides to the correct document size 2 Adjust the document resolution referring to Resolution on page 251 Faxing 249 E Loading a Source Document on the Document Glass 1 Open the document cover 2 Place a single document face down on the document glass and align it with the registration guide on the top left corner of the document glass CAUTION e Do not apply excessive force to hold a thick document on the document glass It may break the glass and cause injuries 3 Adjust the document resolution referring to Resolution on page 251 4 Close the document cover NOTE Ensure that no document is on the Automatic Document Feeder ADF If any document is detected on the ADF it will take priority over the document on the document glass If you are faxing a page from a book or magazine lift the document cover until its hinges are caught by the st
259. our Printer on page 134 e Print Media Storage Guidelines on page 135 E Print Media Usage Guidelines The paper tray accommodates various sizes and types of paper and other specialty media Follow these guidelines when loading paper and media Before buying large quantities of any print media it is recommended that you try a sample first e For 60 to 135 gsm 16 to 36 Ib bond paper grain long where the paper fibers run along the length of the paper is recommended For paper heavier than 135 gsm 36 Ib bond grain short where the paper fibers run along the width of the paper is preferred e Envelopes can be printed from the paper tray and the Priority Sheet Inserter PSI Fan paper or other specialty media before loading in the paper tray Do not print on label stock once a label has been removed from a sheet e Use only paper envelopes Do not use envelopes with windows metal clasps or adhesives with release strips e Print all envelopes single sided only e Some wrinkling and embossing may occur when printing envelopes e When loading print media in the paper tray do not load it above the fill line on the paper width guides of the paper tray Slide the paper width guides to adjust to the paper size If excessive jams or wrinkles occur use paper or other media from a new package A WARNING e Do not use conductive paper such as origami paper carbonic paper or conductively coated paper When paper jam occurs
260. our local 024 340 representative office or authorized dealer 024 360 See also 024 371 e Online Services on page 417 024 958 Load the specified paper and press the ox button to clear the message Follow the on 024 963 screen instruction if one appears See also e Loading Print Media in the Paper Tray on page 144 e Loading Print Media in the Priority Sheet Inserter PSI on page 152 024 969 Load the specified paper and press the x button to clear the message See also e Loading Print Media in the Paper Tray on page 144 Loading Print Media in the Priority Sheet Inserter PSI on page 152 026 720 Press the x button to clear the message Check if the USB memory device has enough memory 026 721 Press the x button to clear the message Check if the USB memory device is write pro 026 722 tected or gets any disk problem 026 723 Press the x button to clear the message Check if the path and file name to save the data is too long 026 750 Press the x button to clear the message Check if the interface cable is securely con nected or restart the application you use Troubleshooting Error Code What You Can Do 026 751 Press the x button to clear the message Check if the interface cable is securely con 026 752 nected 027 446 IPv6 address duplication Change the IP address setting 027 452 IPv4 address duplication Change the IP address sett
261. ource Values Disable Disables editing of the transmission source Enable Enables editing of the transmission source Factory default menu setting USB Settings Use the USB Settings menu to change printer settings affecting a USB port e Port Status Purpose To enable or disable the USB interface Values Disable Disables the USB interface Enable Enables the USB interface Factory default menu setting e PS Data Format Purpose To set the PS data communications protocol To make any changes effective turn off the printer and then turn it back on Values Auto Sets the PS data communications protocol automatically Standard Sets the PS data communications protocol to Standard BCP Sets the PS data communications protocol to BCP TBCP Sets the PS data communications protocol to TBCP Factory default menu setting 316 Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad E Defaults Settings Use the Defaults Settings menu to configure the default copy scan and fax settings of the printer Copy Defaults Use the Copy Defaults menu to configure a variety of copy features e Collated Purpose To specify whether to collate the copy job Values Off Does not copy documents in the collated order On Copies documents in the collated order Factory default menu setting e Reduce Enlarge Purpose To specify the default copy reduction enlargement ratio Values
262. ox button Select the desired setting or enter the value using the numeric keypad and then press the ox button Repeat steps 3 and 4 as needed Press the lt gt Start button to begin scanning Emailing the Scanned Image To temporarily change a scan setting when emailing the scanned image 1 2 3 4 5 Press the amp Scan button Select Scan to E Mail and then press the 0X button Select an e mail recipient and then press the 0 button Select the desired menu item and then press the or button Select the desired setting or enter the value using the numeric keypad and then press the ox button Repeat steps 4 and 5 as needed Press the Q Start button to begin scanning Scanning 241 242 Scanning Faxing NOTE e Ifthe Service Lock setting for FAX is set to Password Locked you need to enter the four digit password to use the fax function If the Service Lock setting is set to Locked the fax function is disabled and the menu is not displayed on the LCD panel For more information see Service Lock on page 314 This chapter includes Connecting the Telephone Line on page 244 Configuring Fax Initial Settings on page 246 Sending a Fax on page 249 Sending a Delayed Fax on page 256 Sending a Fax Using the Driver Direct Fax on page 257 Receiving a Fax on page 262 Automatic Dialing on page 265 Other Ways to Fax on page 270 Setting Sounds on page 273 Sp
263. p localhost 631 admin in the address bar and then press the Enter key The CUPS window appears NOTE 3 4 5 6 126 Set the password for authority as the printer administrator before setting the printer queue If you have not set it see Setting the Password for Authority as the Printer Administrator on page 128 Click Manage Printers Click Modify Printer on the printer Specify necessary printing options and then click Continue Enter root as the user name enter the administrator password and then click OK The message Printer FUJI_XEROX_DocuPrint_M255_X has been modified successfully appears The setting is complete Printer Connection and Software Installation e For Ubuntu 10 x86 Open the URL http localhost 631 using a web browser Click Administration Click Manage Printers Click the queue name for which you want to specify printing options Enter the User Name and the Password and then click OK 1 2 3 4 5 Click the Administration drop down box and then select Modify Printer 6 7 Select the printer you want to modify 8 Specify necessary printing options and then click Continue or Modify Printer The message Printer FUJI_XEROX_DocuPrint_M255_X has been modified successfully appears The setting is complete Printer Connection and Software Installation 127 E Setting the Password for Authority as the Printer Administrator For SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10 and 11 you m
264. page 42 E Front View 1 Output Tray Extension 2 Center Output Tray 3 Front USB Port 4 Operator Panel 5 Automatic Document Feeder ADF 6 Document Feeder Tray 7 Document Output Tray 8 Document Stopper 9 Power Switch 10 Toner Cartridge 11 Paper Tray Cover 12 Paper Tray 13 Front Cover 14 Priority Sheet Inserter PSI 15 Paper Width Guides 16 Toner Access Cover 40 Basic Operation E Rear View 1 Registration Roller 2 OPC Drum 3 Levers 4 ADF Cover 5 Ethernet Port 6 USB Port 7 Paper Chute 8 Transfer Roller 9 Power Connector 10 Rear Cover Handle 11 Rear Cover 12 Phone Connector 13 Wall Jack Connector E Automatic Document Feeder ADF 1 2 3 4 d ADF Cover Document Guides ADF Glass Document Glass Document Cover 0 A O N gt Document Feeder Tray Basic Operation 41 E Operator Panel The operator panel has a 4 line by 28 character liquid crystal display LCD light emitting diodes LED control buttons one touch buttons and numeric keypad which allow you to control the printer 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 16 17 18 19 20 21 2223 24 One touch buttons Calls up the stored fax number registered in the Phone Book The first eight fax numbers in the Phone Book are assigned to the buttons in row order starting from the top left corner 2
265. pecified in advance 300 Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad e Send Header Purpose To print the information of sender on the header of faxes Values Off Does not print the information of sender on the header of faxes On Prints the information of sender on the header of faxes Factory default menu setting e Company Name Purpose To specify the name of sender to be printed on the header of faxes Up to 30 alphanumeric characters can be entered e Your Fax Number Purpose To specify the fax number of the printer to be printed on the header of faxes e Fax Cover Page Purpose To specify whether to attach a cover page to faxes Values Off Does not attach a cover page to faxes On Attaches a cover page to faxes Factory default menu setting Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad 301 e DRPD Pattern Purpose To provide a separate number for faxing with a distinctive ring pattern Values Patternl 7 DRPD is a service provided by some telephone companies DRPD patterns are specified by your telephone company The patterns provided with your printer are shown below Patternl Pattern2 Pattern3 patterna Patterns Pattern6 Pattern7 Ask your telephone company which pattern you need to select to use this service For example Pattern7 is the New Zealand FaxAbility distinctive ring patte
266. pends on the value selected formm inch under the System Settings menu See mm inch on page 309 for more information Factory default menu setting If necessary customize other copy options including the number of copies copy size and image quality See also e Customizing Copy Options on page 187 Press the lt gt Start button to begin copying Copying Copying an ID Card You can copy both sides of an ID card on one side of a single sheet of paper in its original size by selecting ID Card Copy on the operator panel NOTE a A WwW N Ifthe Service Lock setting for Copy is setto Password Locked you need to enter the four digit password to use the copy function If the Service Lock setting for Copy is set to Locked the copy function is disabled and the menu is not displayed on the LCD panel For more information see Service Lock on page 314 Place the front side of an ID card face down on the document glass and close the document cover See also e Making Copies From the Document Glass on page 184 Press the Copy button Select N Up and then press the 0X button Select ID Card Copy and then press the 0x button If necessary customize other copy options including the image quality See also e Customizing Copy Options on page 187 Press the lt gt Start button to begin copying When the scanning completes the LCD panel prompts you for another page Select Yes or No an
267. per is fed from the paper tray 1 Sided 30 sheets min IMPORTANT 1 Print speed may decrease due to factors such as paper type paper size and printing conditions 2 When continuously printing a single document of A4 D Print Resolution Standard 600 x 600 dpi High Resolution 1200 x 1200 dpi When printing in high resolution mode printing speed may be reduced due to image quality adjustment Printing speed may also be reduced depending on documents PDL Standard PCL 5e PCL 6 PostScript Level3 Compatible PDF Ver 1 6 TIFF JPEG Protocol DocuPrint M255 df Ethernet standard TCP IP LPD Port9100 WSD DocuPrint M255 z Ethernet standard TCP IP LPD Port9100 WSD IEEE802 11b g standard NOTE e WSD stands for Web Services on Devices e WSD is available only on Microsoft Windows Vista or Windows 7 Specifications Operating System Microsoft Windows XP Microsoft Windows XP x64 Edition Microsoft Windows Vista Microsoft Windows Vista x64 Edition Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Microsoft Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Microsoft Windows Server 2008 x64 Edition Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 x64 Edition Microsoft Windows 7 Microsoft Windows 7 x64 Edition Mac OS Linux os IMPORTANT 1 For the latest information about the supported operating syste
268. plication Browser Enter the administrator password YaST Control Center is activated Select Printer from Hardware The Printer Configurations dialog box appears Click Edit A dialog box to modify the specified queue appears Confirm that the printer you want to specify as the default queue is selected in the Connection list Select the Default Printer check box Confirm the settings and then click OK e For Ubuntu 10 x86 a fF WO N Select System Administration Printing Select the printer you want to specify as the default queue Select the Printer menu Select Set As Default Select whether to set this printer as the system wide default printer and then click OK Printer Connection and Software Installation 125 E Specifying Printing Options You can specify printing options such as the duplex 2 sided printing e For Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 Desktop x86 O a fF WwW N Open the URL http localhost 631 using a web browser Click Administration Click Manage Printers Click the queue name for which you want to specify printing options Click the Administration drop down box and then select Modify Printer Specify necessary printing options and then click Continue or Modify Printer The message Printer FUJI_XEROX_DocuPrint_M255_X has been modified successfully appears The setting is complete e For SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 11 x86 1 Open a web browser 2 Enter htt
269. pose To specify the region where the printer is used Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad 305 System Settings Use the System Settings menu to configure a variety of printer features e Power Saver Timer Purpose To specify a time period before the printer enter each power saver mode Values Low Power 1lmin By default the printer enters Low Power mode in one minute Timer imin 30min of inactivity after completion of the last job You can change the Low Power Timer setting within a range from 1 to 30 minutes Sleep Timer 6min By default the printer enters Sleep mode in six minutes of Gnin Limin inactivity starting from the moment it entered Low Power mode You can change the Sleep Timer setting within a range from 6 to 11 minutes Factory default menu setting Select 1min default for Low Power Timer if your printer shares an electrical circuit with your room lights and you notice them flickering Otherwise select a high value to keep your printer available for frequent use with the minimum warm up time The printer automatically exits a power saver mode when it receives a print job from a computer or fax data through the telephone line Alternatively you can manually bring it back to the ready to print state Press any button on the operator panel in Low Power mode In Sleep mode press the Energy Saver button Whether the printer is in Low Power or Sleep mode it will take about 25 seconds
270. pported operating systems refer to the Fuji Xerox Web Site File Format PDF multi page 1 file JPEG TIFF 1 page 1 file Scan to e mail Protocol TCP IP SMTP POP3 File Format TIFF 1 page 1 file JPEG PDF multi page 1 file Specifications Fax Function Send Document Size Document glass Maximum 215 9 x 297 mm Automatic Document Feeder ADF Maximum 215 9 x 355 6 mm Recording Paper Size Maximum Legal Minimum A5 Transmission Time 3 seconds V 34 IMPORTANT When transmitting an A4 size 700 character document in the standard quality 8 x 3 85 lines mm and high speed mode 28 8 kbps or above JBIG This is only the transmission speed for image information and does not include the controlling time for the communication Note that the actual transmission time depends on the content of documents the machine that the recipient uses and the status of the communication line Transmission Mode ITU T Super G3 ITU T G3 ECM ITU T G3 Scanning Resolution 400 x 400 pixel 25 4 mm R16 x 15 4 line mm 300 x 300 pixel 25 4 mm R8 x 15 4 line mm 200 x 200 pixel 25 4 mm R8 x 7 7 line mm 200 x 100 pixel 25 4 mm R8 x 3 85 line mm Coding Method Monochrome 1 bit JBIG MMR MR MH encoding Color Not supported Transmission Speed V 34 33 6 31 2 28 8 26 4 124 21 6 19 2 116 8 14 4 12 9 6 17 2 4 8 2 4kbps V 17 14 4 12 19 6 7 2kbps V
271. press the 0x button The printer restarts automatically with the factory default menu settings Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad 335 Changing the Language To display a different language on the operator panel E Using the Operator Panel 1 Press the i System button 2 Select Panel Language and then press the on button 3 Select the desired language and then press the 0x button E Using the Printer Setting Utility Windows Only The following procedure uses Microsoft Windows 7 as an example 1 Click Start All Programs gt Fuji Xerox Fuji Xerox Printer Software for Asia Pacific gt your printer Printer Setting Utility NOTE The window to select a printer appears in this step when multiple print drivers are installed on your computer In this case click the name of the desired printer listed in Printer Name The Printer Setting Utility appears 2 Click the Printer Maintenance tab 3 Select System Settings from the list at the left side of the page The System Settings page is displayed 4 Select the desired language from Panel Language and then click the Apply New Settings button 336 Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad Using the Numeric Keypad As you perform various tasks you may need to enter numbers and names For example when you enter the password you enter four digit number When you set up your printer you enter your name or your company name ABC D
272. printed output in the paper tray or the Priority Sheet Inserter PSI and press the x button Troubleshooting Error Code What You Can Do 077 100 Open the rear cover and remove the jammed paper a See also 077 106 e Clearing Paper Jams From the Rear of the Printer on page 351 077 108 077 109 077 304 Close the rear cover 077 900 Open the rear cover and remove the jammed paper pera See also 077 907 Clearing Paper Jams From the Rear of the Printer on page 351 091 402 The service life of your printer is coming to an end and the printer will soon stop run ning If you want to keep using the printer change the Machine life setting to Con tinue Print However continuous use of the printer will degrade the print quality See also e Machine life on page 312 091 441 The printer has exceeded its service life or the settings have been changed to continue using it The quality of printouts will degrade if the printer continues to be used See also e Machine life on page 312 092 651 Turn off the printer and then on If this does not solve the problem contact our local 092 661 representative office or authorized dealer See also e Online Services on page 417 093 426 Replace the toner cartridge soon See also e Replacing the Toner Cartridge on page 398 093 925 Set the toner cartridge appropriately or replace it See also e Replacing the Toner Cartridge on page 398 093 926 Rep
273. puter Example of folder name MyShare 2 Right click the folder and then select Properties 3 Click the Sharing tab and then select the Share this folder 4 Enter a shared name in the Share name box NOTE Note down the shared name as you need to use this name in the next setting procedure MyShare Properties 2 x General Sharing Security Customize You can share this folder with other users on your network To enable sharing for this folder click Share this folder Share name MyShare Comment User limit Maximum allowed Allow this number of users To set permissions for users who access this PE folder over the network click Permissions _Eemissions To configure settings for offline access click Caching Cachina k Windows Firewall will be configured to allow this folder to be shared with other computers on the network View your Windows Firewall settings 5 Click Permissions to give write permission for this folder 6 Click Add 7 Search user login name by clicking Advanced or enter the user login name in the Enter the object names to select box and click Check Names to confirm Example of user login name MySelf NOTE Do not use Everyone as the user login name Select Users or Groups 2 x Select this object type Users Groups or Built in security principals Object Types From this location e me sama Locations Enter the objec
274. r Click Yes Wait a few minutes until the printer restarts to establish a wireless network connection and the Configuration Complete screen appears Fi Printer Setup Utility aren x Configure Printer Configuration Complete Utility has finished sending your settings to printer After your printer restarts wait for a few minutes and then check the settings by clicking Print Printer Setting Click Next and continue setting up your printer according to instructions of Easy Setup Navigator L d Click Print Printer Setting Confirm that Link Quality is shown as Good Acceptable or Low on the report NOTE e When Link Quality is shown as No Reception check if the wireless network settings are correctly configured To reconfigure the wireless network settings click Next on the Configuration Complete screen and then click Return Click Next Printer Connection and Software Installation 21 Follow the on screen instructions until the Check Setup screen appears 22 23 24 25 26 27 Macromedia Flash Player 8 a Easy Install Navi gt a D E Remove ackaging material You have completed preparing the printers hardware Set Toner Cartridge Press the Start Installation button on the lower right A to go to the software installation procedure E connect and Power ON E Load Paper If any error is displayed on the operator panel click the following link
275. r Address Boo E mail Address iy FUJI Xerox lt w gt The Add Personal Address page appears 6 Enter a name a phone number and an e mail address in the Name Phone Number and E mail Address fields 7 Click the Apply button 236 Scanning E Sending an E mail With the Scanned File NOTE To use the Scan to E Mail feature you first need to set up your SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol server information SMTP is a protocol for sending e mail For more information refer to the Setup Guide 1 Load a document s face up on the Automatic Document Feeder ADF with the top edge going in first or place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover See also e Making Copies From the Automatic Document Feeder ADF on page 186 e Making Copies From the Document Glass on page 184 Press the amp Scan button Select Scan to E Mail and then press the 0x button Select E Mail to and then press the 0X button a fF WwW N Select the setting listed below and then press the ox button Keypad Enter the e mail address directly and then press the 0x button Address Book Select the e mail address registered in the E mail Address Book and then press the 0x button E Mail Group Select the e mail group registered in the E mail Groups and then press the ox button Search Address Book Enter a text to search from the E mail Address Book and then p
276. r as well The following however describes the procedures for sharing a printer on a network without using the supplied CD To set up a printer to be shared on a network you need to set up the printer for network sharing and install print drivers for the printer on every computer on the network NOTE You need to purchase an additional Ethernet cable at your own cost to connect a printer to an Ethernet network Setting Up the Printer for Network Sharing e For Windows XP Windows XP 64 bit Edition Windows Server 2003 and Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition 1 Click Start start for Windows XP gt Printers and Faxes 2 Right click the icon for your printer and select Properties 3 From the Sharing tab select Share this printer and then enter a name in the Share name text box 4 Click Additional Drivers and select the operating systems of all network clients using your printer 5 Click OK If the files are not present in your computer and then you will be prompted to insert the server operating system CD 6 Click Apply and then click OK e For Windows Vista and Windows Vista 64 bit Edition Click Start Control Panel Hardware and Sound gt Printers Right click the printer icon and select Sharing Click Change sharing options button The Windows needs your permission to continue appears Click Continue button Select the Share this printer check box and then enter a name in the Share name text box
277. r or Redial Delay longer eLower Modem Speed eCheck if the destination number is available 034 709 Press the x button to clear the message If the error continues to appear after the 034 710 redial for the specified number of times try the following Set Number of Redial to the largest value Set Interval Timer or Redial Delay longer 034 711 Press the x button to clear the message If the error continues to appear after the 034 712 redial for the specified number of times try the following 034 713 Set Number of Redial to the largest value Set Interval Timer or Redial Delay longer eLower Modem Speed 034 714 Press the x button to clear the message If the error continues to appear after the redial for the specified number of times try the following Set Number of Redial to the largest value Set Interval Timer or Redial Delay longer eCheck if the destination number is available 034 715 Press the x button to clear the message If the error continues to appear after the redial for the specified number of times try the following Set Number of Redial to the largest value Set Interval Timer or Redial Delay longer eLower Modem Speed 034 716 Press the x button to clear the message If the error continues to appear after the retry for the specified number of times it will be cancelled When retrying sending the fax lower Modem Speed 034 717 Press the x button to clear the message If the error continues to appear
278. rator panel See also Storing a Fax Number for Speed Dialing on page 265 e Group Dial Purpose To create a group of fax destinations and register it under a 2 digit dial code Up to six group dial codes can be registered See also Creating Group Dial Numbers on page 267 284 Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad PCL Settings Use the PCL Settings menu to change printer settings that only affect jobs using the PCL emulation printer language e Paper Size Purpose To specify the default paper size Values A4 210x297mm A5 148x210mm B5 182x257mm Letter 8 5x11 Folio 8 5x13 Legal 8 5x14 Executive Statement 10Env 4 125x9 5 onarch Env onarch Env L DL Env 110x220mm DL Env C5 Env 162x229mm Postcard JPN 148x100mm W Postcard JPN 148x200mm Env Yougata Env Yougata Env Yougata Env Yougata Env Yougata 2 2 3 Env Yougata 3L 4 6 3 Env Younaga Env Nagagata 3 Env Nagagata 4 Env Kakugata 3 Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad 285 New Portrait Y 297mm 11 7inc Specifies the length of the custom size paper Custom h Which factory default menu setting displays Size 127mm depends on the value selected for mm inch 355mm 5 0inch unger the System Settings menu See mm 14 0inch inch on page 309 f
279. rces Fuji Xerox reuses returned toner cartridges and drums photoreceptors to make recycle parts recycle materials or energy recovery e Proper disposal is required for toner cartridges no longer needed Do not open toner cartridges Return them to your local Fuji Xerox representative Environment 25 Regulation E Radio Frequency Emissions Class B OD This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to the International Standard for Electromagnetic Interference CISPR Publ 22 and Radiocommunications Act 1992 in Australia New Zealand These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This product generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this product does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning this product off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between this product and the receiver e Connect this product into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is
280. re wireless settings to connect your printer to an access point infrastructure network or computer to computer ad hoc network e Connecting to Access Point Network To configure the wireless settings through an access point such as a wireless router a fF WO N 116 On the operator panel press the i System button Select Admin Menu and then press the button Select Network and then press the button Select Wireless Setup and then press the button Select the desired access point and then press the button If the desired access point does not appear a SelectManual Setup and then press the button b Enter the SSID and then press the button Use the numeric keypad to enter the desired value and press the lt or gt button to move a cursor c Select Infrastructure and then press the button d Select an encryption type and then press the button IMPORTANT e Be sure to use one of the supported encryption methods from Mixed Mode PSK WPA PSK TKIP WPA2 PSK AES and WEP to protect your network traffic Enter the WEP key or pass phrase and then press the button Use the numeric keypad to enter the desired value and press the lt or gt button to move a cursor When the encryption type is WEP select a transmit key from Auto WEP Key 1 WEP Key 2 WEP Key 3 and WEP Key 4 after entering the WEP key Wait a few minutes until the printer restarts to establi
281. ress the 0x button Select the e mail address from the list and then press the 0x button NOTE E mail recipients need to be registered before you can select Address Book on the operator panel 6 Select scanning options as required 7 Press the lt j Start button to send e mail Scanning 237 Customizing Scan Options This section includes e Changing the Default Scan Settings on page 238 Changing the Scan Settings for an Individual Job on page 241 E Changing the Default Scan Settings This section includes Setting the Scanned Image File Type on page 238 Setting the Color Mode on page 239 Setting the Scan Resolution on page 239 Setting the Document Size on page 240 Automatically Suppressing Background Variations on page 240 For a complete list of all of the default settings see Defaults Settings on page 317 Setting the Scanned Image File Type To specify the file type of the scanned image 1 2 3 4 5 238 Press the i System button Select Defaults Settings and then press the ox button Select Scan Defaults and then press the 0X button Select File Format and then press the 0x button Select the type and then press the 0x button Available types PDF factory default setting e MultiPageTIFF TIFF JPEG Scanning Setting the Color Mode You can scan an image in color or in black and white Selecting black and white significantly reduces
282. ress the Stop button NOTE e Printing is canceled only for the current job All the following jobs will continue to print Canceling a Job From the Computer Windows e Canceling a Job From the Taskbar When you send a print job a small printer icon appears on the taskbar 1 Double click the printer icon A list of print jobs appears in the printer window 2 Select the job you want to cancel Press the Delete key 4 Click Yes on the Printers dialog box to cancel a print job e Canceling a Job From the Desktop 1 Minimize all programs to reveal the desktop Click start Printers and Faxes for Windows XP Click Start Printers and Faxes for Windows Server 2003 Click Start Devices and Printers for Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 Click Start Control Panel Hardware and Sound gt Printers for Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008 A list of available printers appears 2 Double click the printer you selected when you sent the job A list of print jobs appears in the printer window Select the job you want to cancel 4 Press the Delete key Click Yes on the Printers dialog box to cancel a print job 160 Printing Basics E Duplex Printing Duplex 2 sided printing allows you to print on either side of a sheet of paper The paper sizes available for duplex printing are A4 B5 A5 Letter Executive Folio and Legal This section includes e Automatic Duplex Printing on page 161
283. ring Center Select Connect to a network Select the network and then click Connect Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success For Windows Server 2008 o a 0 FT Display Control Panel Select Network and Internet Select Network and Sharing Center Select Connect to a network Select the network and then click Connect Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success For Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7 oo 0 3 Display Control Panel Select Network and Internet Select Network and Sharing Center Select Connect to a network Select the network and then click Connect e For Fixed IP Networks 1 Set up your computer for wireless connectivity NOTE Ifthe operating system on your computer provides a wireless configuration software use it to change the wireless network settings See the instructions below For Windows XP and Windows Server 2003 a Select Network Connections from Control Panel b Right click Wireless Network Connection and select Properties c Select the Wireless Networks tab d Ensure that the check box for Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings is selected NOTE Be sure to write down the current wireless computer settings in step f and step h so that you can restore them later Click the Advanced button Select Computer to computer ad hoc networks only and close the Advanced dialog box
284. rint M255 z only Purpose To initialize wireless network settings Enabling this feature and rebooting the printer will reset all the wireless settings to their factory default settings Values No Does not reset the wireless setting Yes Resets the wireless setting Factory default menu setting NOTE This menu item appears only when the printer is connected to a wireless network e TCP IP Purpose To configure TCP IP settings To make any changes effective turn off the printer and then turn it back on Values IP Mode Dual Stack Uses both IPv4 and IPv6 to set the IP address IPv4 Uses IPv4 to set the IP address IPv4 Get IP DHCP AutoIP Automatically sets the IP address padEeee BOOTP Uses BOOTP to set the IP address RARP Uses RARP to set the IP address DHCP Uses DHCP to set the IP address Panel Enter the IP address on the operator panel IP Address Enter the IP address allocated to the printer Subnet Mask Enter the subnet mask Gateway Address Enter the gateway address Factory default menu setting NOTE To configure the IPv6 settings use the CentreWare Internet Services Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad 295 e Protocol Purpose To enable or disable each protocol To make any changes effective turn off the printer and then turn it back on Values LPD Disable Disables the Line Printer Daemon LPD
285. rn rings for 400 ms stops for 800 ms rings for 400 ms and stops for 1400 ms This pattern is repeated over and over again This printer only responds to Distinctive Alert cadence s DA4 in New Zealand e 2 Sided Print Purpose To specify whether to use the duplex printing for faxing Values Off Disables the duplex printing On Enables the duplex printing Factory default menu setting 302 Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad e Forward Settings Purpose To specify whether to forward incoming faxes to a specified destination Values Off Incoming faxes will not be forwarded Forward Only Incoming faxes will be forwarded to a specified destination and if an error occurs while forwarded they will be printed Forward and Print Incoming faxes will be printed and forwarded to a specified destination E Mail and Print Incoming faxes will be printed and sent with an e mail to a specified destination Factory default menu setting e Fax Fwd Number Purpose To enter the fax number of the destination to which incoming faxes will be forwarded e Fax Fwd E Mail Purpose To enter the e mail address to which incoming faxes will be sent with an e mail e Prefix Dial Purpose To specify whether to insert a prefix dial number Values Off Does not insert a prefix dial number On Inserts a prefix dial number Factory default menu setting e Prefix Dial Num Purpose
286. ry 0 50 mm 0 0 2 0 inch default menu setting displays depends on the value selected formm inch under the System Settings menu See mm inch on page 309 for more information Factory default menu setting e TIFF File Format Purpose To specify the TIFF file format Values TIFF V6 TTN2 Factory default menu setting e Image Compression Purpose To specify the image compression level Values Higher Sets the higher image compression level Normal Sets the normal image compression level Lower Sets the lower image compression level Factory default menu setting e Max E Mail Size Purpose To specify the maximum size of e mail that can be sent within the range of 50KB to 16384KB The default is 2048KB Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad 325 Fax Defaults Use the Fax Defaults menus to configure a variety of fax features NOTE The Fax service cannot be used unless you specify your region under Region If Region is set to Unknown the message Set The Region Code appears on the LCD panel e Resolution Purpose To specify the resolution level to be used for fax transmission Values Standard Suitable for documents with normal sized characters Fine Suitable for documents containing small characters or thin lines or documents printed with a dot matrix printer SuperFine 203dpi Suitable for documents containing extremely fine details The Super
287. s on page 206 Copying 181 Loading Paper for Copying The instructions for loading print documents are the same whether you are printing faxing or copying See also e Usable Print Media on page 137 e Loading Print Media on page 143 182 Copying Preparing a Document You can use the document glass or the Automatic Document Feeder ADF to load a source document for copying scanning and sending a fax You can load up to 50 sheets of 64 gsm documents for one job using the ADF or one sheet at a time using the document glass IMPORTANT Avoid loading documents that are smaller than 148 0 x 210 0 mm 5 83 x 8 27 inch or larger than 215 9 x 355 6 mm 8 5 x 14 inch different sizes or weights together booklets pamphlets transparencies or documents having other unusual characteristics in ADF Carbon paper or carbon backed paper coated paper onion skin or thin paper wrinkled or creased paper curled or rolled paper or torn paper cannot be used in ADF Do not use the documents with staples paper clips or exposed to adhesives or solvent based materials such as glue ink and correcting fluid in ADF NOTE To ensure the best scan quality especially for color or gray scale images use the document glass instead of the ADF Copying 183 Making Copies From the Document Glass NOTE A computer connection is not required for copying Ensure that no document is on the Automatic Document Feeder ADF If any docu
288. s designed to use a variety of media types for print jobs However some media can cause poor output quality excessive paper jams or damage to your printer Unacceptable media includes e Paper that is too heavyweight or too lightweight less than 60 gsm or more than 190 gsm Transparencies Photo paper or coated paper Tracing paper Illumination film Special ink jet printer paper and ink jet transparencies Static cling paper Pasted up or glued paper Specially coated paper Color paper with surface treatments Paper that uses ink that deteriorates with heat Photosensitive paper Carbon paper or carbonless copy paper Paper with a rough surface such as Japanese paper pulp paper or fibrous paper Envelopes that are not flat or that have clasps windows or adhesives with release strips Padded envelopes Tack film Water transfer paper Textile transfer paper Perforated paper Leather paper embossed paper Conductive paper such as origami paper carbonic paper or conductively coated paper Wrinkled creased folded or ripped paper Damp or wet paper Wavy or curled paper Paper with staples clips ribbons or tape Label paper with some labels already peeled off or that are partially cut off Paper pre printed by another printer or copy machine Paper pre printed all over rear side A WARNING e Do not use conductive paper such as origami paper carbonic paper or conductively coated paper When paper
289. s of the license agreement to continue the installation process and then click Next 20 Check if the printer to be installed is listed in the Select Printer screen and then click Next NOTE e If the printer to be installed is not listed in the Select Printer screen try either of the following steps Click Refresh to update the information Click Add Printer and then enter the details of the printer manually 21 Configure the required items on the Enter Printer Settings screen and then click Next 22 Select the software to be installed and then click Install 23 Click Finish to exit this tool The wireless configuration is complete NOTE To make the specified wireless network settings effective you need to restart the printer 90 Printer Connection and Software Installation e WPS PIN NOTE WPS PIN Wi Fi Protected Setup Personal Identification Number is a method to authenticate and register devices required for wireless configuration by entering PIN code to a printer and computer This setting performed through access point is available only when the access points of your wireless router supports WPS Before WPS PIN starts you will need to enter your PIN code at the web page of the wireless access point See the access point manual for the details 1 Select WPS PIN and then click Next 2 Follow the on screen instructions until the Check Setup screen appears Macromedia Flash Player 8 oss Easy Inst
290. s or is blurred See also Installing a Toner Cartridge on page 402 If you use a non genuine brand toner cartridge install a genuine brand toner cartridge Clean up the fusing unit 1 Load one sheet of paper in the paper tray and then print a solid image all over paper 2 Load the printed sheet with the print surface facing down and then print a blank sheet of paper NOTE lt Ifthe problem continues even though you have taken suggested actions described above contact our local representative office or authorized dealer E The Entire Output Is Blank If this trouble happens contact our local representative office or authorized dealer 364 Troubleshooting E Streaks Appear on the Output tr If this trouble happens contact our local representative office or authorized dealer E Mottle Problem Action The printed result has mottled Adjust the transfer bias appearance 1 Launch the Printer Setting Utility click Adjust BTR on the Printer Maintenance tab 2 Adjust the setting for the type of print media being used 3 Click the Apply New Settings button If you use non recommended print media use the print media recommended for the printer NOTE Ifthe problem continues even though you have taken suggested actions described above contact our local representative office or authorized dealer Troubleshooting 365 E Ghosting Problem
291. sconnected from the printer before you configure the wireless settings NOTE Before you configure the wireless settings on the operator panel you need to set up the wireless network settings on your computer For details see the Setup Guide For information on the specifications of the wireless LAN feature see the Configuring Wireless Network Settings DocuPrint M255 z only on page 77 You can select a method to configure a wireless setting from the following Manual Wireless Setup for Access Point Infrastructure Network Computer to computer Ad hoc Network Automatic setup using WPS PIN WPS PBC 2 1 WPS PIN is a method to authenticate and register devices required for wireless configuration by entering PIN code in the printer and computer This setting performed through access point is available only when the access points of your wireless router supports WPS 2 WPS PBC is a method to authenticate and register devices required for wireless configuration by pressing the button provided on the access point via wireless routers and then performing WPS PBC setting on the operator panel This setting is available only when the access point supports WPS To configure wireless settings refer to the method you selected e Manual Wireless Setup on page 116 e Auto Setup With the Access Point on page 118 Printer Connection and Software Installation 115 Manual Wireless Setup You can manually configu
292. se between numbers press the j t Redial Pause button and confirm that appears on the LCD panel Select Apply Settings and then press the 0x button Select Yes and then press the 0 button Repeat steps 5 to 11 as needed to add speed dial numbers To quit adding speed dial numbers keep pressing the lt gt Back button until the LCD panel shows Select Function Faxing 265 E Sending a Fax Using Speed Dialing 1 Load a document s face up on the Automatic Document Feeder ADF with the top edge going in first or place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover See also Loading a Source Document on the Automatic Document Feeder ADF on page 249 Loading a Source Document on the Document Glass on page 250 2 Press the 4E Fax button and do either of the following lt Select Fax to and then press the 0x button Select Speed Dial and then press the 0 button lt Press the 3 Speed Dial button 3 Enter a speed dial number between 01 and 99 using the numeric keypad The corresponding entry s name briefly appears on the LCD panel 4 Press the 0X button Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs See also e Resolution on page 251 e Lighten Darken on page 252 6 Press the O Start button to scan and store the document in the memory When you are using the document glass the LCD panel displays a prompt for another page If you have
293. sed Faxing e Prefix Dial The prefix dial number is required in an environment where out going fax calls go through a PBX machine 1 Press the i System button 2 Select Admin Menu and then press the 0x button 3 Select Fax Settings and then press the 0x button 4 Select Line Type and then press the ox button 5 Select PBx and then press the 0x button 6 Press the gt Back button to return to the previous menu 7 Select Prefix Dial and then press the ox button 8 Select on and then press the 0x button 9 Press the gt Back button to return to the previous menu 10 Select Prefix Dial Num and then press the 0x button 11 Enter an up to five digit prefix number using 0 9 and 12 Confirm the prefix dial number on the LCD panel is correct and then press the 0x button 13 Reboot the printer by turning the power switch off and then on Faxing 277 Changing the Default Fax Settings You can customize the default fax settings using the menu items that you use most frequently a fF WO N ez 278 Press the i System button Select Defaults Settings and then press the 0X button Select Fax Defaults and then press the or button Select the desired menu item and then press the on button Select the desired setting or enter the value using the numeric keypad and then press the ox button Repeat steps 4 and 5 as needed To quit changing the default settings keep pressing
294. send scanned image files 1 Load a document s face up on the Automatic Document Feeder ADF with the top edge going in first or place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover See also e Making Copies From the Automatic Document Feeder ADF on page 186 e Making Copies From the Document Glass on page 184 Press the amp Scan button Select Scan to Computer USB and then press the ox button If necessary customize scan options a fF WwW N Press the lt gt Start button A scanned image file is generated NOTE Ifa dialog box to select a program appears on your computer select Express Scan Manager Btype and then click OK Once you select the Always use this program for this action check box when selecting Express Scan Manager Btype the selected application is automatically used without displaying the program selection window See also e Express Scan Manager on page 57 Scanning 209 E Using the TWAIN Driver Your printer supports the Tool Without An Interesting Name TWAIN driver for scanning images TWAIN is one of the standard components provided with Microsoft Windows XP Windows Server 2003 Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows Vista Windows 7 and Mac OS X 10 4 10 5 10 6 and works with various scanners The following procedure uses Windows 7 as an example NOTE e Ensure that the printer is connected to the computer with a USB
295. ser name and password for the POP3 server are set correctly by contacting your server administrator 016 506 Press the x button to clear the message Check if the SMTP server address and e mail destination are set correctly 016 507 Press the x button to clear the message Check if the user name and password used for the SMTP server are set correctly by contacting your server administrator 016 718 Press the ox button to clear the message Retry when the printer does not process any job 016 719 Press the ox button to cancel the current job Retry when the printer does not process 016 720 any job 016 744 Press the button to clear the message If this does not solve the problem contact our 016 745 local representative office or authorized dealer See also e Online Services on page 417 016 749 Press the x button to cancel the current job Retry when the printer does not process any job 016 753 Press the x button to cancel the current job Retry when the printer does not process 016 755 any job 016 764 Press the x button to clear the message Check if the Ethernet cable is properly con nected If this does not solve the problem contact SMTP server administrator 016 766 Press the x button to clear the message Check if the server or the computer is available by pinging the IP address If this does not solve the problem contact your server administrator Troubleshooting 379 380 Error Code What You Can Do
296. sh the wireless network Print a System Settings page from the operator panel a Press the i System button b Select Report List and then press the button c Select System Settings and then press the button The System Settings page is printed Confirm that Link Quality is shown as Good Acceptable or Low on the report NOTE e When Link Quality is No Reception check if the wireless settings are correctly configured If the wireless setting does not work contact your system administrator or Fuji Xerox Customer Support Center Printer Connection and Software Installation e Using Ad Hoc Connection To configure the wireless settings for an ad hoc connection where the wireless devices communicate directly with each other without an access point a fF WO N 10 On the operator panel press the i System button Select Admin Menu and then press the button Select Network and then press the button Select Wireless Setup and then press the button Select the desired access point and then press the button If the desired access point does not appear a Select Manual Setup and then press the button b Enter the SSID and then press the button Use the numeric keypad to enter the desired value and press the lt or gt button to move a cursor c Select Ad hoc and then press the button d Select an encryption type and then press the button IMPORTA
297. single page document Automatic Document Feeder ADF A4 20 sheets minute Measured by making a single copy of an 11 page document IMPORTANT The speed may be reduced due to image quality adjustment The performance may be reduced depending on the paper type Paper Weight 60 163 gsm Paper Tray Capacity Standard 250 sheets Paper tray 10 sheets PSI Maximum paper capacity 260 sheets standard IMPORTANT e Fuji Xerox P paper 64 gsm Continuous Copy 99 images NOTE e The machine may pause temporarily to perform image stabilization Output Tray Capacity Center output tray Approximately 125 sheets A4 J Document output tray Approximately 50 sheets A4 J IMPORTANT e Fuji Xerox P paper 64 gsm Power Supply AC 220 240 V 10 110 127 V 10 5 9A for both 50 60 Hz 3Hz Power Consumption Sleep mode 4 W or less Low Power mode 8 W or less Standby mode 55 W or less Dimensions Width 420 x Depth 398 x Height 365 mm Measured when the paper tray is inserted but not extended Machine Weight 12 0 kg IMPORTANT The weight of paper is not included The weight of the toner cartridge is included Space Requirement Width 795 5 x Depth 1049 mm Measured when the front cover and the rear cover are open Specifications 33 Print Function 34 Type Built in Continuous Print Speed A4 J When plain pa
298. smission resolution 38 Transmission speed 37 38 Transmission time 37 Tray Settings 328 U USB direct print Limiting access 333 USB port 40 41 63 USB Settings 316 USB storage device 234 User Setup Disk Creating Tool 58 WwW Wall jack connector 41 63 245 Warm up time 32 White document cover 395 Windows Image Acquisition WIA 212 Wireless network settings Mac OS X 115 Wireless network settings Windows 77 Wireless Setup 294 Wireless Status 293 WPS Setup 295 X XML Paper Specification print driver 73 113 Y Index 423
299. so Loading a Source Document on the Automatic Document Feeder ADF on page 249 e Loading a Source Document on the Document Glass on page 250 Press the E Fax button Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs See also e Resolution on page 251 e Lighten Darken on page 252 Select Delayed Start and then press the 0X button Select On and then press the 0X button Enter the start time using the numeric keypad or press the A or w button to select the start time and then press the 0X button Select Fax to and then press the 0 button Select Keypad and then press the 0x button Enter the number of the remote fax machine using the numeric keypad and then press the ox button You can also use speed or group dial numbers See also e Automatic Dialing on page 265 Press the lt gt Start button When the Delayed Start mode is activated the printer scans and stores all the documents in its memory and sends them at the specified time The data in the memory is cleared upon completion of the fax transmission Faxing Sending a Fax Using the Driver Direct Fax You can send a fax directly from the computer running a Microsoft Windows operating system or Mac OS X by using the driver NOTE Only black and white faxes can be sent using Direct Fax This section includes e Sending a Fax from Windows on page 258 e Sending a Fax from Mac OS X on page 260 Faxing 257
300. ss Scan Manager To exit click the X button at the top right of the window For more information click the Help button icon of each application Status Window Opens the Printer Status window See also SimpleMonitor Windows Only on page 53 Printer Setting Utility Starts the Printer Setting Utility See also Printer Setting Utility Windows Only on page 52 Troubleshooting Opens the Troubleshooting guide which allows you to resolve issues by yourself 54 Printer Management Software Address Book Editor Starts the Address Book Editor which allows you to add and edit Address Book entries See also e Address Book Editor on page 56 Express Scan Manager Starts the Express Scan Manager See also e Express Scan Manager on page 57 Printer Management Software 55 Address Book Editor The Address Book Editor provides a convenient interface for modifying the printer s Address Book entries With it you can add Fax entries e E Mail entries Server entries When you start the software the Address Book Editor reads the printer s Address Book You can add edit and delete entries After making changes you can then save the updated Address Book to the printer or to your computer The Address Book Editor is installed along with your print driver It is available for Windows and Mac OS X 56 Printer Management Software Express Scan Manager The Express Scan Man
301. ss the amp Copy button Select Margin Left Right and then press the ox button Press the A or button or enter the desired value using the numeric keypad and then press the 0x button 4 mm 0 2 inch Specify the value in increments of 1 mm 0 1 inch Which factory 0 50 mm 0 0 2 0 inch default menu setting displays depends on the value selected for mm inch under the System Settings menu See mm inch on page 309 for more information Factory default menu setting If necessary customize other copy options including the number of copies copy size and image quality See also e Customizing Copy Options on page 187 Press the lt gt Start button to begin copying Copying 203 E Margin Middle You can specify the middle margin of the copy 1 204 Load a document s face up on the Automatic Document Feeder ADF with the top edge going in first or place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover See also e Making Copies From the Automatic Document Feeder ADF on page 186 e Making Copies From the Document Glass on page 184 Press the 3 Copy button Select Margin Middle and then press the ox button Press the A or button or enter the desired value using the numeric keypad and then press the 0x button 0 mm 0 0 inch Specify the value in increments of 1 mm 0 1 inch Which factory 0 50 mm 0 0 2 0 inch default menu setting displays de
302. st have a unique IP address It is important that the addresses are similar but not the same only the last digit needs to be different For example your printer can have the address 192 168 1 2 while your computer has the address 192 168 1 3 Another device can have the address 192 168 1 4 Many networks have a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP server A DHCP server automatically programs an IP address into every computer and printer on the network that is configured to use DHCP A DHCP server is built into most cable and Digital Subscriber Line DSL routers If you use a cable or DSL router see your router s documentation for information on IP addressing E Automatically Setting the Printer s IP Address If the printer is connected to a small established TCP IP network without a DHCP server use the installer on the Software Pack CD ROM to detect or assign an IP address to your printer For further instructions insert the Software Pack CD ROM into your computer s CD DVD drive After the Installer starts follow the prompts for installation NOTE For the automatic installer to function the printer must be connected to an established TCP IP network Printer Connection and Software Installation 67 E Dynamic Methods of Setting the Printer s IP Address There are two protocols available for dynamically setting the printer s IP address DHCP e DHCP Auto IP enabled by default You can turn on off either protocol using
303. standing Printer Messages on page 379 Contacting Service on page 388 Getting Help on page 389 Enabling Non Genuine Mode on page 391 Troubleshooting 339 Clearing Jams Careful selection of appropriate print media and proper loading allow you to avoid most jams A WARNING e If you cannot remove the paper jam by doing the procedures in the manual do not try to forcibly remove the jam Doing so may cause injuries Contact your local Fuji Xerox representative See also About Print Media on page 132 Supported Print Media on page 136 NOTE Before buying large quantities of any print media it is recommended that you try a sample first This section includes Avoiding Jams on page 341 Identifying the Location of Paper Jams on page 342 Clearing Paper Jams From the Automatic Document Feeder ADF on page 343 Clearing Paper Jams From the Front of the Printer on page 346 e Clearing Paper Jams From the Rear of the Printer on page 351 Clearing Paper Jams From the Center Output Tray on page 353 Jam Problems on page 356 340 Troubleshooting E Avoiding Jams Use only recommended print media See Loading Print Media in the Paper Tray on page 144 and Loading Print Media in the Priority Sheet Inserter PSI on page 152 to load print media properly Do not load print media before turning on the printer Do not overload the print media sources Do not load wrinkled creased damp or cur
304. swering machine line cord into the phone connector Phone connector To an external telephone or an answering machine Faxing 245 Configuring Fax Initial Settings This section includes e Setting Your Region on page 246 e Setting the Printer ID on page 246 e Setting the Time and Date on page 247 e Changing the Clock Mode on page 248 E Setting Your Region You need to set the region where your printer is used for using the fax service on the printer Press the Til System button Select Admin Menu and then press the 0x button Select Fax Settings and then press the 0 button Select Region and then press the 0x button Select the locale of the printer and then press the on button O a fF O N When the LCD panel shows Restart System select Yes and then press the 0x button The printer restarts to apply the setting NOTE e Changing the Region setting initializes all the information specified for your printer E Setting the Printer ID You may be required to indicate your fax number on any fax you send The printer ID containing your fax number and your name or company name will be printed at the top of each page sent from your printer Press the Ti System button Select Admin Menu and then press the on button Select Fax Settings and then press the 0X button Select Your Fax Number and then press the 0x button a fF WO N Enter your fax number using the numer
305. t and continue setting up your printer according to instructions of Easy Setup Navigator L d 14 Click Next 15 Follow the on screen instructions until the Check Setup screen appears Macromedia Flash Player 8 balak Easy Install Navi gt fa D 1 Remove packaging material You have completed preparing the printers hardware E set Toner cartridge Press the Start Installation button on the lower right to go to the software installation procedure E connect and Power ON E Load Paper If any error is displayed on the operator panel click the following link H configure Printer g Check Setup Trouble Shooting Guide l 4B Retum amp Previous gt Start instaiation L d 16 Print the System Settings page using the operator panel See Printing the System Settings Page on page 175 17 Confirm that Link Quality is shown as Good Acceptable or Low on the report NOTE e When Link Quality is shown as No Reception check if the wireless network settings are correctly configured To reconfigure the wireless network settings click Return Printer Connection and Software Installation 89 18 19 Confirm there are no errors displayed on the LCD panel and then click Start Installation If you see any errors click Trouble Shooting Guide and follow the instruction If you agree to the terms of the License Agreement click accept the term
306. t names to select examples MySelf Check Names Advanced Cancel p Scanning 223 8 Click OK 9 Click the user login name that you have just entered Select the Full Control check box This will grant you permission to send the document to this folder Permissions for MyShare Share Permissions Group or user names a Everyone MySelt Test MME Add Remove Permissions for MySelf Test Allow Deny Full Control Change Read 10 Click OK 11 Specify other settings as necessary and then click Apply and click OK NOTE e To add sub folders create new folders in the shared folder you have created Example Folder name MyShare Second level folder name MyPic Third level folder name John You should now see MyShare MyPic WJohn in your directory When you are finished with creating the shared folder go to Configuring the Printer on page 228 224 Scanning e For Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 R2 1 Create a folder in the desired directory on your computer Example of folder name MyShare 2 Right click the folder and then select Properties 3 Click the Sharing tab and then select Advanced Sharing For Windows Vista when User Account Control dialog box appears click Continue E 5 J MyShare Properties x General Sharing Security Previous Versions Customize Network File and Folder Sharing x MyShare Not Shared
307. tall your new printer on the network using the Software Pack CD ROM that shipped with your printer or using the Add Printer wizard Installing a Print Driver Using the Add Printer Wizard 1 Click Start gt Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Printers Start Devices and Printers for Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7 Click Add a printer to launch the Add Printer wizard Select Add a network wireless or Bluetooth printer In the list of available printers select the one you want to use and then click Next NOTE e In the list of available printers the Web Services on Devices printer is displayed in the form of http IP address ws If no Web Services on Devices printer is displayed in the list enter the printer s IP address manually to create a Web Services on Devices printer To enter the printer s IP address manually follow the instructions below For Windows Server 2008 R2 to create a Web Services on Devices printer you must be a member of Administrators group 1 Click The printer that I want isn t listed 2 Select Add a printer using a TCP IP address or hostname and click Next 3 Select Web Services Device from Device type 4 Enter the printer s IP address in the Hostname or IP address text box and click Next e Before installing the driver using the Add Printer wizard on Windows Server 2008 R2 or Windows 7 perform one of the followings Establish the Internet connection so that Windows Up
308. tch off and then on again If a scan application is running close the application once restart the application and then try scanning again The scan driver has not been registered on your computer and cannot be accessed from the Express Scan Manager Install the scan driver If the driver is already installed uninstall it and then reinstall it Failed to scan your document on the printer via the Express Scan Manager Ensure that your computer and the printer is properly connected with the USB cable Check whether the printer is turned on If the printer is turned on reboot it by turning the power switch off and then on again If a scan application is running close the application once restart the application and then try scanning again Failed to create an image file via the Express Scan Manager Ensure that there is sufficient space in your hard disk Uninstall the Express Scan Manager on your computer and then reinstall it Failed to initialize the Express Scan Manager Uninstall the Express Scan Manager on your computer and then reinstall it Failed to execute the Express Scan Manager Uninstall the Express Scan Manager on your computer and then reinstall it An unexpected error occurred on the Express Scan Manager Uninstall the Express Scan Manager on your computer and then reinstall it Troubleshooting 377 Other Problems Problem Action Condensa
309. ted Ensure that the Select Function screen appears on the LCD panel before you send a job to print Ensure that print media is loaded in the printer Verify that you are using the correct print driver Ensure that you are using the correct Ethernet or USB cable and that it is securely connected to the printer Verify that the correct print media size is selected If you are using a print spooler verify that the spooler has not stalled Check the interface of your printer from Admin Menu Determine the host interface you are using Print the System Settings page to verify that the current interface settings are correct Refer to Printing the System Settings Page on page 175 for details on how to print the System Settings page Print media misfeeds or multiple feeds occur Ensure that the print media you are using meets the specifications for your printer See also e Usable Print Media on page 137 Fan the print media before loading it Ensure that the print media is loaded correctly Ensure that the paper width guides and length guide are adjusted correctly Do not overfill the print media sources Do not force print media into the Priority Sheet Inserter PSI or the paper tray when you load it Otherwise it may skew or buckle Ensure that the print media is not curled Load print media with the recommended print surface facing in the correct direction See als
310. ted in the available network list and click Connect f Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success 100 Printer Connection and Software Installation For Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7 Display Control oa ao TFT 2 Check the IP addres Panel Select Network and Internet Select Network and Sharing Center Select Connect to a network Select xxxxxxxx XXXXXXXX indicates a wireless device s SSID which you use from the network items listed in the available network list and click Connect s on your computer r Network Connection Details Network Connection Details Property Connection specific DN Description Physical Address DHCP Enabled IPv4 Address IPv4 Subnet Mask Lease Obtained Lease Expires IPv4 Default Gateway IPv4 DHCP Server IPv4 DNS Server IPv4 WINS Server NetBIOS over Tcpip En Link4ocal IPv6 Address IPv6 Default Gateway IPv6 DNS Server 4 Value ELST SL ALP EHF Wireless LA is fe at Yes Elias Friday December 02 2011 5 24 21 PM Sunday December 04 2011 5 24 21 PM a Pan Yes wit bihet Lote eh 4 m J r 3 Set the IP address on the printer See Assigning an IP Address for Pv4 Mode on page 69 4 Launch your web browser Printer Connection and Software Installation 101 102 Enter the IP address of the printer in the address bar and then press the Enter key The CentreWare
311. ter Readings 284 mm inch 309 Modem Speed 276 304 Mottle 365 Multiple Up 28 410 N Network 292 Network connection setup 76 Non Genuine Mode 313 391 Number of copies 188 Number of fax lines 37 Number of Redial 275 300 Numeric keypad 42 N Up 200 320 O OK button 42 One touch buttons 42 OPC drum 41 342 Operating system 35 38 Operational safety 21 Operator panel 40 42 Ordering supplies 404 Orientation 286 Original paper size 32 36 Output paper size 32 Output paper weight 32 Output tray capacity 33 Output tray extension 40 157 P Panel Language 330 Panel Lock 314 331 Panel Settings 283 Panel Settings page 46 Paper chute 41 Paper Error 321 Paper jam location 342 Center output tray 342 Front cover 342 Levers 342 OPC drum 342 Paper tray 342 Priority Sheet Inserter PSI 342 Rear cover 342 Paper jams 346 351 353 356 Paper tray 346 Priority Sheet Inserter PSI 349 Paper Size 189 285 292 Paper Tray 328 Paper tray 40 137 342 Paper tray capacity 33 Paper tray cover 40 Paper weight 33 Paper width guides 40 147 Parts name 40 PCL Fonts List 283 PCL print driver 73 PCL Settings 285 PDF Password 291 328 PDF Settings 291 PDL 34 Peer to peer 109 Phone Book 284 Phone connector 41 63 Plain 310 311 Point and Print 106 Port 9100 296 Port Status 316 Post Card 310 311 PostScript Level3 Compatible print driver 73 Power connector 41 Power consumption 33 Power On Wizard 309 Power saver mode 334 Power Sa
312. ternet Services To display the CentreWare Internet Services use the link local address To check a link local address see Printing and Checking the System Settings Page on page 71 Assigning an IP address is considered as an advanced function and is normally done by a system administrator Depending on the address class the range of the IP address assigned may be different On Class A for example an IP address in the range from 0 0 0 0 to 127 255 255 255 will be assigned For assignment of IP addresses contact your system administrator You can assign the IP address by using the operator panel or the Printer Setting Utility Using the Operator Panel 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Turn on the printer Ensure that the LCD panel shows Select Function On the operator panel press the i System button Select Admin Menu and then press the button Select Network and then press the button Select TCP IP and then press the button Select IPv4 and then press the button Select Get IP Address and then press the button Select Panel and then press the button Press the amp Back button and then ensure that Get IP Address is selected Select IP Address and then press the button Enter the value of the IP address using the numeric keypad Press the gt button Repeat steps 11 and 12 to enter all of the digits in the IP address and then press the button Press the Back bu
313. the Back button until the LCD panel shows Select Function Faxing Printing a Report The following reports may be useful when using the fax function Address Book List This list shows all the addresses currently stored in the memory of the printer as Address Book information Fax Activity Report This report shows information about the recent 50 faxes you received or sent Protocol Monitor This report shows a detailed list of monitored protocols Monitor Report This report shows the details of a fax job This is printed when the fax was successfully sent Transmission Report This report shows the details of a fax job This is printed when the fax transmission failed Broadcast Report This report shows all the destinations of a broadcast fax and the transmission result for each destination NOTE The reports and lists are all printed in English To print a report or list 1 Press the i System button 2 Select Report List and then press the 0x button 3 Select a report or list you want to print and then press the ox button The selected report or list is printed NOTE You cannot manually print the Monitor Report Transmission Report and Broadcast Report with the above procedure They will be printed as specified upon completion of a fax job For details on setting when to print them see Fax Transmit on page 305 or Fax Broadcast on page 305 Faxing 279 280 Faxing Using the Operator Pan
314. the Automatic Document Feeder ADF 0008 249 Loading a Source Document on the Document Glass 250 PRESOIMMON AG ea a ctr ts en ihe tacoma Mol e at 251 Document Type sss tices ths cece cots Sete ec catia eae cts cca nerien iena 251 Lighten Darken pci eco cee toe een e eeelee abe 252 Inserting a PAUSE irelease e a a SEa aee aaRS ats 252 Sending a Fax from Memory cceeeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 253 Contents 5 Sending a Fax Manually 2 3002 ieios danni eile eee 254 Confirming Transmissions cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 254 Automatic Redialling c0 sccesneeseseseeeeeeceeecece eeedeenedeeteeeeeeeteneeees 255 Sending a Delayed Fae toie oa wcsdetsd Use lhe anacavocteelepennedens enndeserevers 256 Sending a Fax Using the Driver Direct Fax ccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 257 Sending a Fax from WiNdOWS cceeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 258 Sending a Fax from Mac OS X eee eeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeee 260 Receiving a he a et oer A a te tierce Pues E EEEE a Ieee 262 About Receiving MOOS scree 2ccacosecesecestoresesevacescactecteseceneeentesweceeesess 262 Loading Paper for Receiving Faxes ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeetttteeeeeeees 262 Receiving a Fax Automatically in the FAX Mode cere 263 Receiving a Fax Manually in the TEL Mode o e 263 Receiving a Fax Automatically in the TEL FAX Mode or Ans
315. the Software Pack CD ROM Click Install Package Enter the user password and click OK Click Close a fF WO N Click the X button at the top right of the dialog box to close the Package Installer dialog box Printer Connection and Software Installation 121 To Specifying the Queue perform printing you must set up the print queue on your workstation NOTE When you have finished specifying the queue you can then send print jobs from applications Start a print job from an application and specify the queue in the print dialog box Depending on the application Mozilla for example however you may have to use the default queue for printing In such a case you must specify a queue you want to use as the default queue For details on specifying the default queue see Specifying the Default Queue on page 125 e For Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 Desktop x86 O a fF QQ N Open the URL http localhost 631 using a web browser Click Administration Click Add Printer Enter root as the user name and then enter the administrator password Click OK Select either of the following according to the type of your printer connection For a network printer a Select LPD LPR Host or Printer from the Other Network Printers menu and then click Continue b Enter the IP address of the printer in Connection Format Ipd xxx xxx xxx xxx the IP address of the printer Click Continue Enter the name of the printer i
316. the following options for the current copy job before pressing the lt gt Start button to make copies NOTE After a copy job is completed the copy options would be kept until the LCD panel shows Select Function auto reset or the gt Back button is pressed the CA Clear All button is pressed or the B Copy button is pressed again This section includes Number of Copies on page 188 e Paper Size on page 189 e Collated on page 191 e Reduce Enlarge on page 192 Document Size on page 194 Document Type on page 195 Lighten Darken on page 196 Sharpness on page 197 e Auto Exposure on page 198 e 2 Sided on page 199 e N Up on page 200 Margin Top Bottom on page 202 Margin Left Right on page 203 Margin Middle on page 204 Copying 187 E Number of Copies You can specify the number of copies from 1 to 99 1 188 Load a document s face up on the Automatic Document Feeder ADF with the top edge going in first or place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover See also e Making Copies From the Automatic Document Feeder ADF on page 186 e Making Copies From the Document Glass on page 184 Press the 6 Copy button Enter the number of copies using the numeric keypad If necessary customize other copy options including the copy size and image quality See also e Customizing Copy Options on page 187 Press the Q Start butto
317. then press the ox button The factory default panel password is 0000 1 2 3 4 Select 5 Select 6 7 8 NOTE NOTE Be sure to remember the password The procedure described below allows you to reset the password However the settings for the Address Book are cleared 1 Turn off the printer Then while holding the jj System button turn on the printer e Ifyou want to change the password while Panel Lock Set is Enable perform steps 1 and 2 Enter the current password and then press the 0x button Perform steps 3 and 4 Select Change Password and then press the 0x button Enter a new password and then press the 0x button This will change the password Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad 331 E Disabling the Panel Lock Feature NOTE You can select Disable for Panel Lock Set when all items under Service Lock are set to Unlocked and Secure Receive Set is set to Disable Press the fi System button Select Admin Menu and then press the 0x button Enter the password and then press the 0x button Select Secure Settings and then press the 0x button Select Panel Lock and then press the ox button O a fF QO N Select Panel Lock Set and then press the 0 button 7 Select Disable and then press the 0x button NOTE The password is reset to 0000 when the setting for Panel Lock Set is changed from Enable to Disable 332 Using the Operator Panel Menus and Ke
318. this case click the name of the desired printer listed in Device Name The Enter Password window appears when Panel Lock Set is set to Enable In this case enter the password you specified and click OK 2 Click OK on the Retrieval Successful message window 3 Click Tool New Device Address Book gt Server Help New Device Address Book gt Fax E Mail gt New PC Fax Address Book b Server Edit Name Update E Mail Message Settings The Server Address dialog box appears f Server Address 001 Address ID 001 E Specify an Address Number 1 Name 2 Server Type Computer Server 3 E Computer Settings wizard 4 Server Name IP Address 5 Share Name 6 Path 7 Login Name 8 Login Password l 9 Confirm Login Password 1 0 Port Number 139 Use Default Port Number i Cara ee o To fill in the fields enter the information as follows 1 Name Enter a friendly name that you want it to appear on the Address Book 2 Server Type Select Computer to store scanned documents in a shared folder on your computer Select Server to use a FTP server 3 Computer Settings For Computer only wizard Clicking this button opens the wizard screen which guides you through several steps When you complete the steps in the wizard the settings for Server Address are automatically configured F
319. time See also e Using an Answering Machine on page 271 E Receiving a Fax Manually Using an External Telephone PHONE This feature works best for using an external telephone connected to the phone connector amp on the rear of your printer You can receive a fax from someone you are talking to on the external telephone without having to go to the printer When you receive a call on the external telephone and hear fax tones press the two digit remote receive code slowly in sequence on the external telephone to receive the incoming fax If you still hear the fax tone from the remote fax machine try pressing the two digit remote receive code once again The Remote Receive option is disabled by default You can change the two digit remote receive code to whatever you choose For details on changing the code see Remote Rev Tone on page 300 NOTE Set the dialing system of your external telephone to DTMF Faxing 263 E Receiving Faxes in the DRPD Mode The Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection DRPD is a service provided by some telephone companies This service assigns multiple telephone numbers to a single telephone line and distinguishes each line with a distinctive ring pattern of long and short sounds If this service is available from your telephone company subscribe the service and ask the telephone company which one of the available seven DRPD patterns on your printer you can use for the service See also e DRP
320. tion has occurred This usually occurs within several hours after you heat the room in inside the printer winter This also occurs when the printer is operating in a location where relative humidity reaches 85 or more Adjust the humidity or relocate the printer to an appropriate environment 378 Troubleshooting Understanding Printer Messages The printer s LCD panel displays a message describing the current state of the printer or indicates a possible printer problem you must resolve This section describes error codes included in the messages their meanings and how to clear the messages IMPORTANT When an error message is displayed the print data remaining on the printer and the information accumulated in the memory of the printer are not secured Error Code What You Can Do 005 121 Open the ADF cover Remove the jammed paper and then close the ADF cover See also Clearing Paper Jams From the Automatic Document Feeder ADF on page 343 005 301 Close the ADF cover 010 397 Turn off the printer and then on If this does not solve the problem contact our local 016 315 representative office or authorized dealer 016 317 See also 016 372 e Online Services on page 417 016 501 016 502 016 503 Press the button to clear the message Check if the SMTP server setting is correct by contacting your server administrator 016 504 Press the button to clear the message Check if the u
321. to make the fax lighter or darker than the source document 1 Press the Fax button 2 Select Lighten Darken and then press the 0 button 3 Select the desired setting and then press the 0 button Lighten2 Makes the fax lighter than the source document Works well with dark Lightenl print Normal Works well with standard typewritten or printed documents Darkenl Makes the fax darker than the source document Works well with light Dacken print or faint pencil markings Factory default menu setting E Inserting a Pause On some telephone systems it is necessary to dial an access code and listen for a second dial tone A pause must be entered in order for the access code to function For example enter the access code 9 and then press the J J Redial Pause button before entering the telephone number appears on the LCD panel to indicate that a pause is entered 252 Faxing E Sending a Fax from Memory 1 2 3 Load a document s face up on the Automatic Document Feeder ADF with the top edge going in first or place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover See also Loading a Source Document on the Automatic Document Feeder ADF on page 249 e Loading a Source Document on the Document Glass on page 250 Press the 4E Fax button Adjust the document resolution to suit your fax needs See also e Resolution on page 251 e Lighten
322. tting to Continue Print the printing quality is not guaranteed e Initialize NVM Purpose To initialize the NVM for the printer settings the Phone Book data for fax and the Address Book data for scan Enabling this feature and rebooting the printer will reset all the printer settings and all the Phone Book fax and Address Book scan data to their factory default values See also e Resetting to Factory Defaults on page 335 Values User Fax Yes Initializes the Speed Dial and Group Dial entries in the Phone Section Book No Does not initialize the Speed Dial and Group Dial entries in the Phone Book User Scan Yes Initializes the e mail and server address entries in the Address Section Book No Does not initialize the e mail and server address entries in the Address Book System Section Yes Initializes the printer settings No Does not initialize the printer settings Factory default menu setting 312 Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad e Non Genuine Mode Purpose To use a toner cartridge of another manufacturer NOTE Using a non genuine toner cartridge may make some printer features unusable reduce print quality and decrease the reliability of your printer We recommend you use only new Fuji Xerox brand toner cartridges for your printer We do not provide warranty coverage for problems caused by using non genuine consumables Before you use a toner cartridge of another manufacturer
323. tton and then ensure that IP Address is selected Select Subnet Mask and then press the button Enter the value of the subnet mask using the numeric keypad Press the gt button Repeat steps 16 and 17 to set subnet mask and then press the button Press the Back button and then ensure that Subnet Mask is selected Select Gateway Address and then press the button Printer Connection and Software Installation 69 21 Enter the value of the gateway address using the numeric keypad 22 Press the button 23 Repeat steps 21 and 22 to set gateway address and then press the button 24 Turn off and turn on the printer See also e Operator Panel on page 42 Using the Printer Setting Utility Windows Only The following procedure uses Windows 7 as an example NOTE e When you use IPv6 mode for network printing you cannot use the Printer Setting Utility to assign an IP address 1 Click Start All Programs gt Fuji Xerox Fuji Xerox Printer Software for Asia Pacific gt your printer Printer Setting Utility NOTE The window to select a printer appears in this step when multiple print drivers are installed on your computer In this case click the name of the desired printer listed in Printer Name The Printer Setting Utility starts 2 Click the Printer Maintenance tab 3 Select TCP IP Settings from the list at the left side of the page The TCP IP Settings page is displayed 4 Se
324. tton to clear the message Check if the phone line is connected properly os See also e Connecting the Telephone Line on page 244 034 754 Press the x button to clear the message Lower Modem Speed 034 755 034 756 034 757 034 758 Press the x button to clear the message Check if the phone line is connected properly Or lower Modem Speed See also e Connecting the Telephone Line on page 244 034 759 Press the x button to clear the message Lower Modem Speed 034 760 034 761 Press the x button to clear the message Check if the phone line is connected properly See also e Connecting the Telephone Line on page 244 034 762 Press the x button to clear the message Try the following eLower Modem Speed Enable ECM 034 763 Press the x button to clear the message Lower Modem Speed 034 764 034 765 034 766 034 767 Press the x button to clear the message Check if the phone line is connected properly See also e Connecting the Telephone Line on page 244 034 768 Press the x button to clear the message Lower Modem Speed 041 340 Turn off the printer and then on If this does not solve the problem contact our local 042 358 representative office or authorized dealer 061 370 See also 062 321 e Online Services on page 417 075 100 Check and clear the paper path load the paper and then press the x button to clear the message See also Clearing Paper Jams From the Front of the Printer on page 346 075 921 Load the
325. ty breakdown and damage to your printer To use the features of your printer effectively use the suggested print media that is recommended here IMPORTANT The toner may come off the print media if it gets wet by water rain steam and so on For more information contact our local representative office or authorized dealer 136 Printing Basics E Usable Print Media The types of print media that can be used on your printer are as follows Paper Tray Paper Size A4 SEF 210 x 297 mm B5 SEF 182 x 257 mm A5 SEF 148 x 210 mm Letter SEF 8 5 x 11 inches Executive SEF 7 25 x 10 5 inches Legal 13 Folio SEF 8 5 x 13 inches Legal 14 SEF 8 5 x 14 inches Statement SEF 139 7 x 215 9 mm Com 10 Envelope SEF 4 125 x 9 5 inches Monarch Envelope SEF 3 875 x 7 5 inches Monarch Envelope LEF 7 5 x 3 875 inches DL Envelope SEF 110 x 220 mm DL Envelope LEF 220 x 110 mm C5 Envelope SEF 162 x 229 mm Postcard 100 x 148 mm Postcard 148 x 200 mm Yougata 2 Envelope SEF 114 x 162 mm Yougata 2 Envelope LEF 162 x 114 mm Yougata 3 Envelope SEF 98 x 148 mm Yougata 3 Envelope LEF 148 x 98 mm Yougata 4 Envelope 105 x 235 mm Yougata 6 Envelope 98 x 190 mm Younaga 3 Envelope 120 x 235 mm Nagagata 3 Envelope 120 x 235 mm Nagagata 4 Envelope 90 x 205 mm Kakugata 3 Envelope 216 x 277 mm Custom size Width 76 2 215 9 mm 3 8 5 inches Length 127 355 6 mm 5 14 inches Paper Type Plain
326. ult is 6 seconds e Auto Ans Ans FAX Purpose To specify a period of time for which the printer waits before entering the FAX Mode when the answering machine receives an incoming call The interval can be specified within the range of 0 to 255 seconds The default is 21 seconds 298 Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad e Line Monitor Purpose To specify the volume of the sound that the printer emits from the internal speaker while establishing a connection for fax transmission Values Off Turns off the line monitor Min Sets the volume of the line monitor Middle Max Factory default menu setting e Ring Tone Volume Purpose To specify the volume of the ring tone that the printer emits from the internal speaker to indicate an incoming telephone call while in the TEL FAX Mode Values Off Turns off the ring tone Min Sets the volume of the ring tone Middle Max Factory default menu setting e Line Type Purpose To specify the line type Values PSTN Sets the line type to PSTN PBX Sets the line type to PBX Factory default menu setting e Dialing Type Purpose To specify the dialing type Values Tone Uses the touch tone dialing system DP 10pps Uses the pulse dialing system 10 pulses per second Factory default menu setting NOTE DP 10pps is not displayed when Australia is set for Region Using the Operator Panel Men
327. ument Feeder ADF on page 186 e Making Copies From the Document Glass on page 184 Press the amp Copy button Select 2 Sided and then press the ox button Select the desired binding position and then press the ox button 1 gt 1 Sided Makes regular single sided copies Flip on Long Edge Makes duplex 2 sided copies ready to be bound on the long edge Flip on Short Edge Makes duplex 2 sided copies ready to be bound on the short edge Factory default menu setting If necessary customize other copy options including the number of copies copy size and image quality See also e Customizing Copy Options on page 187 Press the lt gt Start button to begin copying Copying 199 m N Up You can print two original images to fit onto one sheet of paper AOA Ham LAI o N 1 2 i A N i i Ii il m Auto ID Card Copy Manual Automatically Prints both sides Reduces the size of the reduces the of the ID card ona source documents size of the single sheet of according to the source paper in the Reduce Enlarge setting documents to original size and print all of them on print all of them a single sheet of paper on a single sheet of paper 1 200 Load a document s face up on the Automatic Document Feeder ADF with the top edge going in first or place a single docume
328. ument to be scanned face down on the document glass or face up in the Automatic Document Feeder ADF There may not be enough available memory to hold the document you want to scan Try the Preview feature to see if that works Try lowering the scan resolution rate Check that the USB cable is connected properly Ensure that the USB cable is not defective Switch the cable with a known good cable If necessary replace the cable Check that the scanner is configured correctly Check the application you want to use to make certain that the scanner job is being sent to the correct port The printer scans very slowly Graphics are scanned more slowly than text when using the Scan to E Mail or Scan to Network feature Communication speed becomes slow in scan mode because of the large amount of memory required to analyze and reproduce the scanned image Scanning images at a high resolution takes more time than scanning at a low resolution Document misfeeds or multiple feeds occur in the ADF Ensure that the document s paper type meets the specifications for the printer See also Preparing a Document on page 183 e Making Copies From the Automatic Document Feeder ADF on page 186 Check whether the document is properly loaded in the ADF Ensure that the document guides are adjusted properly Ensure that the number of document sheets do not exceed the maximum capacity of the ADF
329. up until the Select Access Point screen appears fe Configure Printer Select Access Point Select from the found Access Points Select the Access Point you want to Access Point use SSID Encryption Type Status If your Access point is not listed Ensure the Access Point is connected to the network then click Refresh e For Non broadcasted SSID use the J e AFS Verv Low Input the SSID directly option to m J gt provide SSID information When unsure of the SSID referto the User Guide of Access Point or contact F the required Access Point is not displayed above click the following option to enter the SSID directly mo Input the SSID directly SSID 7 Select either of the following Click the Select from the found Access Points radio button and select the SSID e Click the Input the SSID directly radio button and enter the SSID in the SSID box 8 Click Next Printer Connection and Software Installation 79 9 Enter for Passphrase for the SSID you specified above and click Next gt E T Printer Setup Utility oj Configure Printer Enter Passphrase Passphrase SSID Passphrase Moo ao a key to encrypt data on El Show input Enter the same Passphrase that was set previously at the Access Point Refer to the user guide of Access Point or contact the network administrator on how to access to the Wireless Encryption Key
330. ur printer is preset to enter the FAX Mode by default When the printer receives an incoming fax transmission it automatically enter the FAX Mode after a predefined period of time and receives the fax To change the interval at which the printer enter the FAX Mode after receiving an incoming fax see Auto Answer Fax on page 298 E Receiving a Fax Manually in the TEL Mode You can receive a fax by picking up the handset of the external telephone and then pressing the On Start button The printer begins receiving a fax and returns to standby mode when it is finished with the fax reception E Receiving a Fax Automatically in the TEL FAX Mode or Ans FAX Mode To use TEL FAX Mode or Ans FAX Mode you must connect an external telephone to the phone connector on the rear of your printer If the printer receives an incoming fax while in the TEL FAX Mode the external telephone rings for the period of time specified for Auto Ans TEL FAX and then the printer automatically receives a fax If a caller leaves a message while the printer is in the Ans FAX Mode the answering machine stores the message as it would normally If the printer hears a fax tone on the line on the other hand it automatically starts receiving the fax NOTE e Ifyou have set a value for Auto Answer Fax and your answering machine is turned off or no answering machine is connected the printer will automatically enters the FAX Mode after a predefined period of
331. us and Keypad 299 e Interval Timer Purpose To specify an interval between transmission attempts within the range of 3 to 255 seconds The default is 8 seconds e Number of Redial Purpose To specify the number of redial attempts to make when the destination fax number is busy within the range of 0 to 9 If you specify O the printer will not redial The default is 3 e Redial Delay Purpose To specify an interval between redial attempts within the range of 1 to 15 minutes The default is 1 minute e Junk Fax Filter Purpose To reject faxes from the numbers that are not included in the Address Book Values Off Accepts all faxes On Rejects faxes sent from the numbers that are not included in the Address Book Factory default menu setting NOTE Ensure to register the fax numbers you want to accept faxes from in the Address Book before using Junk Fax Filter e Remote Receive Purpose To receive a fax by pressing the remote receive code on the external telephone after picking up the handset of the telephone Values Off You cannot receive a fax by pressing the remote receive code on the external telephone On You can receive a fax by pressing the remote receive code on the external telephone Factory default menu setting e Remote Rcv Tone Purpose To specify the remote receive code in two digits to start the Remote Receive action As the factory default menu setting 00 is s
332. use your printer to turn pictures and text into editable images on your computer The resolution setting for scanning depends on the scan source type and how you plan to use the scanned image or document on your computer For the best results use these recommended settings Scan Source Type Resolution Documents 300 dpi black and white or 200 dpi grayscale or color Documents of poor quality or that contain small text 400 dpi black and white or 300 dpi grayscale Photographs and pictures 100 200 dpi color or 200 dpi grayscale Images for an inkjet printer 150 300 dpi Images for a high resolution printer 300 600 dpi Scanning beyond these recommended resolutions may exceed the capabilities of the application If you require a resolution above those recommended in the above table you should reduce the size of the image by previewing or pre scanning and cropping before scanning the image 208 Scanning Scanning to a USB Connected Computer You can connect your printer to a computer with a USB cable and use the printer as a scanner This section includes e Using the Operator Panel on page 209 e Using the TWAIN Driver on page 210 e Using the WIA Driver on page 212 E Using the Operator Panel The following procedure uses Window 7 as an example NOTE Ensure that the printer is connected to the computer with a USB cable You must use the Express Scan Manager on your computer to specify the location to
333. ust set the password for authority as the printer administrator to do operations as the printer administrator e For SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 11 x86 1 Select Computer More Applications and select GNOME Terminal on the Application Browser 2 Enter the following command in the terminal window su lppasswd g sys a root Enter the password for authority as the printer administrator after the Enter password prompt Reenter the password for authority as the printer administrator after the Enter password again prompt 128 Printer Connection and Software Installation E Uninstalling Print Drivers e For Red Hat Enterprise Linux 6 Desktop x86 1 Select Applications gt System Tools Terminal 2 Enter the following command in the terminal window to delete the print queue su Enter the administrator password lpadmin x Enter the print queue name 3 Repeat the command above for all queues for the same model 4 Enter the following command in the terminal window rpm e FX DocuPrint M255 The print driver is uninstalled e For SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 11 x86 1 Select Computer gt More Applications and select GNOME Terminal on the Application Browser 2 Enter the following command in the terminal window to delete the print queue su lpadmin x Enter the print queue name Repeat the command above for all queues for the same model 4 Enter the following command in the terminal win
334. ve the newly added SSID to the top of the list j Click OK to close the Wireless Network Connection Properties dialog box For Windows Vista Display Control Panel Select Network and Internet Select Network and Sharing Center Select Connect to a network oo 0 T Select xxxxxxxx XXXXXXXX indicates a wireless device s SSID which you use from the network items listed in the available network list and click Connect f Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success For Windows Server 2008 Display Control Panel Select Network and Internet Select Network and Sharing Center Select Connect to a network oa a aon Select xxxxxxxx XXXXXXXX indicates a wireless device s SSID which you use from the network items listed in the available network list and click Connect f Click Close in the dialog box after confirming the connection is a success 96 Printer Connection and Software Installation For Windows Server 2008 R2 and Windows 7 Display Control Panel Select Network and Internet Select Network and Sharing Center Select Connect to a network oao0aoc8c Select xxxxxxxx XXXXXXXX indicates a wireless device s SSID which you use from the network items listed in the available network list and click Connect 2 Check the IP address assigned by AutolP on the printer On the operator panel press the Yi System button Select Admin Menu and then press the x button Se
335. vely coated paper When paper jam occurs it may cause short circuit and eventually a fire accident When cleaning this product use the designated cleaning materials exclusive to it Other cleaning materials may result in poor performance of the product Never use aerosol cleaners to avoid catching fire and explosion If you cannot remove the paper jam by doing the procedures in the manual do not try to forcibly remove the jam Doing so may cause injuries Contact your local Fuji Xerox representative OOOO Never play the CD ROM supplied with the product on an audio player Always use a CD ROM player Otherwise large sound may damage audio players or your ears A CAUTION Always follow all warning instructions marked on or supplied with this product To avoid the risk of burn injuries and electric shock never touch the area with the High Temperature or High Voltage marks on Z Keep electrical and mechanical safety interlocks active Keep the safety interlocks away from magnetic materials Magnetic materials may accidentally activate the product and cause injuries or electric shock Safety Notes 21 Do not attempt to remove a paper deeply jammed inside the product particularly a paper wrapped around the fusing unit or the heat roller Otherwise it may cause injuries or burns Switch off the product immediately and contact your local Fuji Xerox representative Do not apply excessive f
336. ver Timer 306 Power supply 33 Power switch 40 Prefix Dial 276 277 303 Prefix Dial Num 276 303 Print button LED 42 Print driver Linux 120 Mac OS X 114 PCL 73 PostScript Level3 Compatible 73 Windows 73 XML Paper Specification 73 113 Print driver pre install status 74 Index 421 Print media 410 Dimensions 143 Print Mode 291 Print quality problems 361 Print resolution 34 Printer Managing 407 Messages 379 Moving 412 Status 409 Printer messages 379 Printer Setting Utility 52 Printer software 49 Printer status 409 Printing 159 Basics 131 Custom paper 172 From computer 159 Problems 359 With Web Services on Devices 178 Printing problems 359 Printing resolution 32 Printing with Web Services on Devices 178 Priority Sheet Inserter PSI 28 40 138 342 9 Product features 28 Product information 390 Protocol 34 296 Protocol Monitor 283 PS Data Format 297 316 PS Error Report 290 PS Fonts List 283 PS Job Time Out 290 PS Settings 290 Quantity 289 291 R Rear cover 41 342 Rear cover handle 41 Recording paper size 37 Recycled 310 311 Recycling supplies 405 Redial Delay 275 300 Redial Pause button 42 Reduce Enlarge 192 317 Reduction enlargement 32 Region 276 305 Registration roller 41 Remote Rev Tone 275 300 Remote Receive 275 300 Report page 175 422 Index Reset Wireless 295 Resetting to factory defaults 335 Resolution 251 323 326 Setting scan resolution 239 Ring Tone Volume 275 299
337. vice Subnet Mask m m m 5 automatically assigns IP addresses to devices on the network Gateway Address ti mi In case of IPv6 f IP addresses are ed manually click the check IPv6 Settings assign Use Manual Address What s this DANa L 7 Select IP Mode depending on your network scheme When IPv4 is selected configure the following a Select Type b If you have selected Use Manual Address from Type enter the following items IP Address of your printer e Subnet Mask e Gateway Address When Dual Stack is selected configure the following a Configure IPv4 Settings b If you have selected the Use Manual Address check box under IPv6 Settings enter the following items IP Address of your printer e Gateway Address Printer Connection and Software Installation 87 8 Click Next The FAX Settings screen appears r al T Printer Setup Utility b Configure Printer FAX Settings F I dont use FAX functionality s FAX Settings FAX Settings Region aan gt What s this Configure the FAX settings Line Type What s this The values of each item are retrieved z from your printer Dialing Type pam gt What s this If you will not use FAX functionality Ans Select What s this check the I dont use FAX functionality checkbox and click DRPD Pattem Pattem4 w What s this Next Company Name What s this Your Fax Number What s this L 4 Configure t
338. view the Help Selecting Options for an Individual Job Windows If you want to use special printing options for a particular job change the driver settings before sending the job to the printer For example if you want to use Photo print quality mode for a particular graphic select this setting on the print driver before printing that job 1 With the desired document or graphic open in your application access the Print dialog box 2 Select your printer and click Preferences to open the print driver 3 Make selections on the driver tabs NOTE On Windows OS you can save current printing options with a distinctive name and apply them to other print jobs Make selections on the Paper Output Graphics Layout Watermarks Forms or Advanced tab and then click Save under Favorites on the Paper Output tab Click Help for more information 4 Click OK to save your selections 5 Print the job See the following table for specific printing options Printing Basics 167 Printing Options for Windows 168 Operating System Driver Tab Printing Options Windows XP Paper Output tab e Favorites Windows XP x 64bit e Duplex Windows Server 2003 Copies Windows Server 2003 x Collated 64bit e Paper Summary Windows Vista Paper Size e Paper Type Windows Vista x 64bit Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2008 x 64bit Feed Orientation Envelope Paper Setup Navigator Printer Status Restore Defaults Windows Server
339. wireless network with the WPA2 PSK AES AES encryption PassPhrase Enter a passphrase of 8 to 63 Entry alphanumeric characters WEP Configures a wireless network with the WEP encryption and specify a WEP key of 10 or 26 hexadecimal characters Transmit Select the transmit key from Key Auto WEP Key 1 WEP Key 2 WEP Key 3 and WEP Key 4 Ad hoc Configures a wireless network without access points No Configures a wireless network without security Security encryption WEP Configures a wireless network with the WEP encryption and specify a WEP key of 10 or 26 hexadecimal characters Transmit Select the transmit key from WEP Key Key 1 WEP Key 2 WEP Key 3 and WEP Key 4 Factory default menu setting NOTE This menu item appears only when the printer is connected to a wireless network 294 Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad e WPS Setup DocuPrint M255 z only Push PBC Start No Disables the PBC method for the WPS encryption Button Yes Enables the PBC method for the WPS encryption Control PIN Code Start Starts configuring wireless network settings using the PIN code Configuration assigned automatically by the printer Print PIN Code Prints the PIN code to be entered on the computer for the WPS encryption setup Factory default menu setting NOTE This menu item appears only when the printer is connected to a wireless network e Reset Wireless DocuP
340. without prior notice 3 We welcome any comments on ambiguities errors omissions or missing pages 4 Never attempt any procedure on the machine that is not specifically described in this manual Unauthorized operation can cause faults or accidents Fuji Xerox is not liable for any problems resulting from unauthorized operation of the equipment Decompiling this manual is prohibited An export of this product is strictly controlled in accordance with Laws concerning Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade of Japan and or the export control regulations of the United States XEROX the sphere of connectivity design CentreWare Internet Services and DocuPrint are trademarks or registered trademarks of Xerox Corporation in the U S or Fuji Xerox Co Ltd DocuWorks is a trademark of Fuji Xerox Co Ltd All Xerox and Fuji Xerox product names are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Xerox Corporation or Fuji Xerox Co Ltd 10 Trademarks and Document Disclaimer About License RSA BSAFE Your printer includes RSA BSAFER Cryptographic software from EMC Corporation RESTAN SECURED DES This product includes software developed by Eric Young eay mincom oz au AES Copyright 2003 Dr BrianGladman Worcester UK All rights reserved This product uses published AES software provided by Dr Brian Gladmanunder BSD licensing terms TIFF libtiff LibTIFFCopyright 1988 1997 SamLeffler Copyright 1991 1997 Silicon
341. wn the folder name as you need to use this name in the next setting procedure Select the created folder and then select Get Info from the File menu Select the Shared folder Shared Folder for Mac OS X 10 5 check box Open Sharing amp Permissions Click the plus sign Specify an account you want to share and then click Select Set the Privilege of the account to Read amp Write Repeat steps 5 to 7 as needed and then close the window Open System Preferences and then click Sharing Select the File Sharing check box and then click Options Select the Share files and folders using SMB Share files and folders using SMB Windows for Mac OS X 10 5 check box and your account name Enter your account password and then click OK Click Done Scanning 227 When Using the FTP For a destination to store scanned documents contact your system administrator E Configuring the Printer You can configure the printer to use the Scan to Server Computer feature with the CentreWare Internet Services or Address Book Editor The following procedure uses Windows 7 as an example Using the CentreWare Internet Services 1 Launch your web browser 2 Enter the IP address of the printer in the address bar and then press the Enter key The CentreWare Internet Services appears on your browser NOTE e For details on how to check the IP address of the printer see Verifying the IP Settings on page 71 3 Click the Address Book
342. ws XP 64 bit Edition Windows Server 2003 and Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition 1 ao a Aa Q Click start Start for Windows Server 2003 Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition gt Printers and Faxes Click Add a printer Add Printer for Windows Server 2003 Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition to launch the Add Printer Wizard Click Next Select A network printer or a printer attached to another computer and then click Next Click Browse for a printer and then click Next Select the printer and then click Next If the printer is not listed click Back and enter the path to the printer in the text box Add Printer Wizard Specify a Printer If you don t know the name or address of the printer you can search for a printer that meets your needs What printer do you want to connect ta Browse for a printer Connect to this printer or to browse for a printer select this option and click Next Name server printed Example sei er printer Connect to a printer on he Internet or on a home or office network URL Example http f server printers myprinter printer For example lt server host name gt lt shared printer name gt The server host name is the name of the server computer that identifies it to the network The shared printer name is the name assigned during the server installation process If this is a new printer you may be prompted to install a print driver If no system driver is
343. y a user may not be printed properly IMPORTANT Before removing the USB storage device ensure that the printer is not accessing the device Removing the USB storage device while being accessed may destroy the data in the device or the USB storage device itself 166 Printing Basics E Selecting Printing Options This section includes e Selecting Printing Preferences Windows on page 167 e Selecting Options for an Individual Job Windows on page 167 e Selecting Options for an Individual Job Mac OS X on page 170 Selecting Printing Preferences Windows Printing preferences control all of your print jobs unless you override them specifically for a job For example if you want to use duplex 2 sided printing for most jobs set this option in printing preferences 1 Click start Printers and Faxes for Windows XP Click Start Printers and Faxes for Windows Server 2003 Click Start Devices and Printers for Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2 Click Start gt Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Printers for Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008 A list of available printers appears 2 Right click the icon for your printer and then select Printing preferences The printer s Printing Preferences dialog box appears 3 Make selections on the driver tabs and then click OK to save your selections NOTE e For details on the Windows print driver options click Help on the print driver tab to
344. y default menu setting If necessary customize other copy options including the number of copies and image quality See also e Customizing Copy Options on page 187 Press the lt j Start button to begin copying Copying E Collated You can sort the copy output For example if you make two copies of three page documents one complete three page document will print followed by the second complete document 1 1 fs f NOTE Copying documents with a large amount of data may exhaust available memory If a memory shortage occurs cancel the collating by turning Collated to Off on the operator panel 1 Load a document s face up on the Automatic Document Feeder ADF with the top edge going in first or place a single document face down on the document glass and close the document cover See also e Making Copies From the Automatic Document Feeder ADF on page 186 e Making Copies From the Document Glass on page 184 2 Press the 3 Copy button Select Collated and then press the 0x button 4 Select the desired setting and then press the ox button Off Does not copy documents in the collated order On Copies documents in the collated order Factory default menu setting 5 If necessary customize other copy options including the number of copies copy size and image quality See also e Customizing Copy Options on page 1
345. y have been removed from the packaging they may bulge To avoid jams flatten them as shown below before loading them in the paper tray If envelopes are still not fed correctly add some bending to the flap of the envelopes as shown in the following illustration The amount of the bending shall be 5 mm 0 20 inches or less IMPORTANT Never use envelopes with a window or coated linings as it causes paper jams that may result in damage to the printer 148 Printing Basics e Loading Com 10 Yougata 4 6 or Younaga 3 Envelopes Load envelopes with the print surface facing up Ensure that the flapped edge is pointing toward the right of the printer and each flap is folded under the envelope e Loading Monarch DL or Yougata 2 3 Envelopes You can load Monarch DL and Yougata 2 3 Envelopes in either of the following orientations SEF Load envelopes with the print surface facing up Ensure that the flapped edge is pointing toward the right of the printer and each flap is folded under the envelope LEF Load envelopes with the print surface facing up Ensure that the flapped edge is pointing toward the front of the printer and the flaps are left unfolded NOTE When you load the envelopes in the LEF orientation be sure to specify the landscape orientation on the print driver To confirm the correct orientation of each print media such as envelopes see the instructions on the Envelope Paper Setup Navigator dialog
346. ypad Limiting Access to Copy Fax Scan and USB Direct Print Operations Enabling the Copy FAX Scan and Print from USB lock options limits access to copy fax scan and USB direct print operations Taking the Copy lock option as an example the following procedure explains how to enable or disable the option Use the same procedure to enable or disable the FAX Scan and Print from USB lock options 1 Press the i System button 2 Select Admin Menu and then press the ox button 3 Select Secure Settings and then press the 0X button 4 Select Panel Lock and then press the 0x button 5 Select Panel Lock Set and then press the ox button 6 Select Enable and then press the button 7 If necessary select Change Password and change the password using the numeric keypad Then press the 0x button NOTE The factory default panel password is 0000 8 Press the Back button 9 Select Service Lock and then press the X button 10 Select copy and then press the 08 button 11 Select one of the following options and then press the ox button e Unlocked Locked e Password Locked Using the Operator Panel Menus and Keypad 333 Changing the Power Saver Mode Settings The printer enters a power saver mode after the specified time period of inactivity You can set Power Saver Timer to place the printer in either of the power saver modes O a fF Ww N 334 Press the i System button

DocuPrint M255 df/M255 z User Guide Help

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents